JP2016163617A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving a performance effect by a movable accessory while avoiding damage to the movable accessory when the movable accessory is driven and brought into contact with another member.SOLUTION: In an upper left third movable accessory 820, an arm member 830 comprises: a first arm member 831 whose base end side engages with a motor 722, and which pivotally supports a first connection member 724; and a second arm member 832 which engages with the first arm member 831 movably, pivotally supports a second connection member 726, and has a fourth connection member 835 capable of engaging with a third connection member 840. After an illumination body 727 rotates, the third connection member 840 engages with the fourth connection member 835, and the second arm member 832 moves in a direction extending from a tip side of the first arm member 831 by the rotation of the third connection member 840. The illumination body 727 can come into contact with the other members as the second arm member 832 moves.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 25

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area with a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Also, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined number of times. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls won in the big prize opening. Here, some prize winning openings have a blade member, and such a prize winning opening repeatedly operates from the closed state to the open state by operating the blade member to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hit game in which a special winning opening is opened from a closed state for a predetermined time.

  By the way, in recent years, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of movable accessories are driven from a standby position at a predetermined timing and, after driving, form one design without touching each other in front of a display screen. As such a gaming machine, Patent Document 1 discloses a first movable body pivotally supported via a first movable shaft and a first pivotable pivotally supported via a second movable shaft. Two movable bodies, interlocking means for interlocking the first movable body and the second movable body, and driving the interlocking means to swing the first movable body between the first position and the second position. Driving means for swinging the second movable body between the third position and the fourth position, wherein the driving means moves the first movable body from the first position to the second position and the second movable body to the third position. When the interlocking unit is driven in a direction to swing from the position toward the fourth position, the first movable body swings upward and the second movable body swings downward in front of the display screen of the effect display device. A gaming machine is disclosed.

JP 2014-46038 A

  However, since the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 has a structure in which a plurality of movable actors cannot contact after driving, a single design is formed by supplementing each other with a video displayed on the display screen. doing. Therefore, such a gaming machine needs to limit the place where one design is formed by a plurality of movable accessories to the front of the display screen, for example.

  In addition, when forming a single design with only a plurality of such movable objects, the plurality of movable objects are driven to a place where a single design is to be formed while maintaining the momentum when driving from the standby position is performed. If the movable accessories are brought into contact with each other, the movable accessory may be damaged by the impact.

  In order to solve such a problem, the present invention improves the effect of the movable accessory while avoiding damage to the movable accessory when the movable accessory is driven and brought into contact with another member. An object is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines. The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine described later) provided with a movable accessory (for example, a second movable object 710 described below) that rotates by driving of a driving means (for example, a motor 712 described later). The movable accessory is provided with a first member tooth portion (for example, a base tooth portion 711d described later) in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge. A first member (e.g., a base member 711 described below) having a first member main body (e.g., a base body 711a described later), and a pivot member rotatably supported by the first member, A first movable member main body (for example, a first movable member main body 713a, which will be described later) that rotates by driving, and a gear that is rotatably supported by the first movable member main body; Meshing first transmission member (e.g., first transmission described below) A first movable member (e.g., first movable member 713 described later) and a first movable member pivotally supported by the first movable member, and projecting radially along the outer edge. A second movable member tooth portion (for example, a second movable member tooth portion 714c described later) in which a plurality of teeth are arranged, and the second movable member tooth portion meshes with the first transmission member. A member (for example, a second movable member 714 described later).

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a movable accessory that rotates by driving of the driving means.
The movable accessory includes a first member, a first movable member, and a second movable member.
The first member has a first member body provided with a first member tooth portion in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge.
The first movable member is a first movable member main body that is pivotally supported by the first member and is rotated by driving of the driving means, and a gear that is pivotally supported by the first movable member main body. A first transmission member that meshes with the first member tooth portion.
The second movable member is pivotally supported by the first movable member, has a second movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge, and the second movable member The tooth portion meshes with the first transmission member.

  Thereby, when the driving means is driven, the first movable member main body is rotated. When the first movable member main body rotates, the first transmission member, which is a gear pivotally supported by the first movable member main body, also moves together. At this time, the first transmission member rotates by moving while meshing with the first member tooth portion of the first member. And when the 1st transmission member rotates, the 2nd movable member which has the 2nd movable member tooth part which meshes with the 1st transmission member rotates.

  That is, the driving force for rotating the first movable member is generated from the driving means. On the other hand, the driving force for rotating the second movable member is generated when the meshing position of the first transmission member and the first member tooth portion of the first member moves with the rotation of the first movable member main body. To do.

  As described above, the driving force for rotating the first movable member and the second movable member is not simply generated from the driving means, but the driving force is generated at different locations. For this reason, for example, the driving mode of the first movable member can be determined by the driving unit, and the driving mode of the second movable member can be determined by the first member. For example, two movable members can be determined by one driving unit. It can be driven in different ways.

  Therefore, the first movable member and the second movable member are rotated by the driving forces that are different from each other while being interlocked. For this reason, it is possible to diversify the variation of the operation of the movable accessory consisting of a plurality of movable members, and to give each movable member an individual effect, and to synergistically enhance the effect. Therefore, even when a plurality of movable members are interlocked, it is possible to enhance the individual effect of each movable member and improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above-described configuration, the first member is further rotatably supported by the first member main body and rotated by driving of the driving means (for example, described later). Base transmission member 711b, etc.), and in the first member main body, a pair of the first member teeth are provided, and the first movable member main body has a plurality of protrusions protruding radially along the outer edge. A first movable member tooth portion (for example, a first movable member tooth portion 713d to be described later) arranged with teeth; the first movable member tooth portion meshes with the second transmission member; The transmission member meshes with one of the first member teeth, and the movable accessory is further pivotally supported by the first member, has an outer edge, and extends radially along the outer edge. A third movable member tooth portion (for example, a third movable member tooth to be described later) 715d etc.) and a gear rotatably supported by the third movable member main body (for example, a third movable member main body 715a described later) and the third movable member main body. A third movable member (for example, a third movable member 715 to be described later) having a third transmission member (for example, a third transmitted member 715b to be described later) that meshes with the portion, and the third movable member to rotate. A fourth movable member tooth portion (for example, a fourth movable member tooth portion 716c to be described later) having an outer edge and having a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction along the outer edge. A fourth movable member (e.g., a fourth movable member 716 described later) that meshes with the third transmission member, and the third movable member tooth portion includes the fourth movable member tooth portion, Meshed with the second transmission member, the first movable member, the second movable member, the first The movable member and the fourth movable member move to a driving position that is a position where the movable member and the fourth movable member are stopped after rotating from an initial position, so that the second transmission member, the first movable member, the second movable member, the first A formed body having a predetermined shape is integrally formed by the three movable members and the fourth movable member.

In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the first member has a second transmission member in addition to the first member main body.
The second transmission member is rotatably supported by the first member main body and is rotated by driving of the driving means. The first member main body is provided with a pair of first member teeth.
The first movable member main body has a first movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge.
The first movable member tooth portion meshes with the second transmission member. The first transmission member meshes with one first member tooth portion.
The movable combination includes a third movable member main body and a fourth movable member in addition to the first member, the first movable member, and the second movable member.
The third movable member has a third movable member main body and a third transmission member. The third movable member body is pivotally supported by the first member and has a third movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge. The third transmission member is a gear rotatably supported by the third movable member main body, and meshes with the other first member tooth portion.
The fourth movable member is rotatably supported by the third movable member, has an outer edge, and has a fourth movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge. And this 4th movable member tooth part meshes with the 3rd transmission member.
The third movable member tooth portion meshes with the second transmission member.
Then, the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member move to the drive position that is the position where the first movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member stopped after rotating from the initial position. The movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member integrally form a formed body having a predetermined shape.

Thereby, when the drive means is driven, the second transmission member is rotated. When the second transmission member rotates, a first movable member body having a first movable member tooth portion meshing with the second transmission member and a third movable member body having a third movable member tooth portion meshing with the second transmission member are formed. Rotate.
When the first movable member main body rotates, the first transmission member, which is a gear pivotally supported by the first movable member main body, also moves together. At this time, the first transmission member rotates by moving while meshing with one first member tooth portion of the first member.
Further, when the third movable member main body rotates, the third transmission member, which is a gear pivotally supported by the third movable member main body, also moves together. At this time, the third transmission member rotates while meshing with the other first member tooth portion of the first member.
And when the 1st transmission member rotates, the 2nd movable member which has the 2nd movable member tooth part which meshes with the 1st transmission member rotates. Further, when the third transmission member rotates, the fourth movable member having the fourth movable member tooth portion meshing with the third transmission member rotates.

  That is, when the second transmission member is rotated by driving of the driving unit, the third movable member and the fourth movable member are also rotated in addition to the first movable member and the second movable member. As described above, in addition to the first movable member and the second movable member, the third movable member and the fourth movable member can be driven by one driving means. Further, similarly to the first movable member and the second movable member, the third movable member and the fourth movable member are rotated by driving forces that are different from each other while being interlocked. For this reason, since it is possible to make the drive mode of the 2nd movable member and the 4th movable member different from the drive mode of the 1st movable member and the 3rd movable member, four movable members are made into one drive means. It can be driven in different ways.

  Further, the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member move to the driving position, so that the first member, the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and A formed body having a predetermined shape is integrally formed by the fourth movable member.

  Therefore, the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member can be operated in a variety of ways while being interlocked, and have a predetermined shape at the driving position. It is possible to form and complete. Therefore, it is possible to give each movable member an individual production effect, and to synergistically enhance the production effect, and to improve the production effect as the entire movable accessory.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, in addition to the above-described configuration, the movable accessory is such that the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member are moved to the driving position. In this case, when the end portions of the second movable member and the fourth movable member are close to each other, a completed state is formed in which one component is formed.

  In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the end of the second movable member pivotally supported by the first movable member and the end of the fourth movable member pivotally supported by the third movable member are close to each other at the drive position. By doing so, the first member, the first movable member, the second movable member, the third movable member, and the fourth movable member are in a completed state in which one component is formed. Accordingly, it is possible to individually rotate the plurality of movable members to the driving position and form a structure in which all of the movable members are connected at the driving position. Therefore, it is possible to give each movable member an individual effect and synergistically enhance the effect, and further improve the effect as a whole movable accessory.

  The present invention also provides the following gaming machines. The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a first game area in which a game ball can roll (for example, a game area 120a described later) and a game ball that easily passes a specific area (for example, a specific area 611c described later). A first movable member (for example, a V shutter 612 described later) that is in one of a state and a second state in which the game ball does not easily pass through the specific region, and is provided in the game region. When the first movable member is in the first state, a guide passage that guides the game ball that has passed through the specific area (for example, a first guide passage 611f, a second guide passage 611g, and a third guide passage 611h described later). And the like, and at least a part of the game ball guided by the guide passage can be visually recognized (for example, a second big prize device 610 described later), and the variable prize The apparatus includes the first movable member In the first state, first passage detection means (for example, a right prize ball sensor to be described later) that detects the passage of the game ball that has entered the variable winning device and can give a predetermined game value to the player. 613, left prize ball sensor 614, etc.) and a first state that is provided below the first passage detection means and that allows a game ball to easily pass through a predetermined area (for example, a first guide passage 611f described later) and the like A second movable member (for example, a V-velo 615, which will be described later) that is in one of the second states in which the game ball is difficult to pass through the predetermined region, and the second movable member is in the first state. At the time, out of the game balls that have passed through the first passage detection means, it is possible to detect the game balls that have passed through the predetermined area, and if the passage of the game balls is detected, an advantageous game state can be given to the player Second passing detection means (for example, V prize sensor 616 described later) ) And third passage detecting means capable of detecting a game ball that has not passed through the predetermined area among the game balls that have passed through the first passage detection means when the second movable member is in the second state. For example, a discharge sensor 617 described later) is further provided, and a deceleration unit (for example, a deceleration unit 611j described later) capable of decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball passing through the predetermined region is provided in the predetermined region. It is arranged.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a game area in which a game ball can roll and a variable winning device.
The variable winning device has a first movable member and a guide passage. The first movable member is in one of a first state in which the game ball easily passes through the specific area and a second state in which the game ball does not easily pass through the specific area. The guide passage is provided in the game area, and guides the game ball that has passed through the specific area when the first movable member is in the first state. The variable winning device can visually recognize at least a part of the game ball guided by the guide passage.
In addition, the variable winning device includes a first passage detection unit, a second movable member, a second passage detection unit, and a third passage detection unit.
When the first movable member is in the first state, the first passage detection means detects the passage of the game ball that has entered the variable winning device, and can give a predetermined game value to the player.
The second movable member is provided below the first passage detection means, and is either one of a first state in which the game ball easily passes through the predetermined area and a second state in which the game ball does not easily pass through the predetermined area. One state is entered.
The second passage detection means can detect a game ball that has passed through a predetermined area among the game balls that have passed through the first passage detection means when the second movable member is in the first state. When detected, it is possible to give an advantageous gaming state to the player.
When the second movable member is in the second state, the third passage detection unit can detect a game ball that has not passed through the predetermined area among the game balls that have passed through the first passage detection unit.
And the deceleration part which can decelerate the rolling speed of the game ball which passes the said predetermined area is distribute | arranged to the predetermined area.

Thereby, for example, when the first movable member (for example, the shutter) is in the first state (for example, the open state), the player is guided by the guide passage with the game ball that has entered the variable winning device. At least a part of the game ball is visible.
The first passage detection means (for example, a prize ball sensor), the second passage detection means (for example, a winning sensor), and the third passage detection means (for example, a discharge sensor) are provided in the game area. It is possible to detect a game ball rolling in the area. For this reason, the game ball can roll in the game area until at least immediately before the game ball is detected by each passage detection means.

  Therefore, by allowing the player to see at least a part of the game ball from when the game ball enters the variable winning device until it reaches each winning sensor, the game ball in the winning device can be viewed. It becomes possible to improve the visibility with respect to. In addition, since it is possible to roll the game area until the game ball is detected by each passage detection means, it is possible to produce an effect using the game ball rolling in the game area even in the variable prize device. It is possible to improve the production effect for the player.

  Further, since the guide passage is provided in the game area and the first passage detection means, the second passage detection means, and the third passage detection means are provided in the game area, the game area can be used as a part of the variable winning device. Therefore, for example, it is possible to omit the passing path of the game ball provided on the back side of the game board as in the past, and the configuration of the variable winning device can be simplified.

  In addition, when the game ball rolling in the game area passes through the second passage detection means, if it passes through the game area at the rolling speed, the rolling speed is too high, and the second passage detection means is It is also conceivable that the passage of the ball cannot be accurately detected, and in order for the second passage detection means to accurately detect the passage of the game ball, it is necessary to reduce the speed of the game ball rolling in the game area, In order to adjust the speed at which such a game ball rolls, it is possible to use a speed reducer. Therefore, it is possible to accurately detect the passage of the game ball by the passage detection means.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, the variable prize apparatus is provided between the plurality of first passage detection means, the first movable member, and the first passage detection means, A contact member (for example, a contact member 611d to be described later) that can contact the game ball that has passed through the area, and a game ball that has passed through the specific area, one of the first passage detection means and the other of the first passage. A distribution unit (for example, a distribution unit 611e described later) that can be distributed to any of the detection means, and the game ball that has passed one of the first passage detection means has the second movable member as the first movable member. The game ball that can pass through the predetermined area in the state 1 and has passed through the other first passage detection means is detected by the third passage detection means regardless of the state of the second movable member. It is characterized by.

In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the variable winning device further includes a plurality of first passage detection means, a contact member, and a distribution unit.
The contact member is provided between the first movable member and the first passage detection means, and can contact the game ball that has passed through the specific area.
The distribution unit can distribute the game balls that have passed through the specific area to one first passage detection means and the other first passage detection means.
The game ball that has passed through one of the first passage detecting means can pass through a predetermined area when the second movable member is in the first state. Further, the game ball that has passed through the other first passage detection means is detected by the third passage detection means regardless of the state of the second movable member.

Accordingly, for example, when the game ball rolls from the upstream side to the downstream side of the first movable member, the game ball comes into contact with the contact member on the downstream side, thereby reducing the speed of the game ball and the player's game ball It becomes possible to collect awareness about.
In addition, the distribution unit can distribute the game balls to one of the first passage detection means and the other first passage detection means. The game ball that has passed through one of the first passage detection means may pass through the second passage detection means that can give an advantageous gaming state to the player, but the other first passage detection means. The game ball that has passed through passes through the third passage detection means without passing through the second passage detection means. In other words, whether or not it is advantageous for the player is determined by the rolling of the game ball in the distribution unit.

  Therefore, it is possible to reduce the rolling speed of the game ball immediately before the distribution part where the game part is improved by the contact part and the game part is improved by the contact member. It is possible to further improve the presentation effect for the player in the variable winning device.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, the distance between the other first passage detection means and the first movable member is greater than the distance between the first passage detection means and the first movable member. The contact member is provided above the other first passage detection means, and is not provided above one of the first passage detection means.

Thereby, since the distance between the other first passage detection means and the first movable member is shorter than the distance between the first passage detection means and the first movable member, the game ball that has passed through the first movable member. Of these, the rolling speed of the game ball passing between the first movable member and the other first passage detection means is larger than the game ball passing between the first movable member and the first passage detection means. However, it may be difficult to detect the passing of the game ball by the other first passage detecting means, but by reducing the rolling speed of the game ball by the contact member, the other first The passage detection means can also reliably detect the passage of the game ball.
Further, since the contact member is provided above the other first passage detection means and not provided above the first passage detection means, the contact member is provided above both the first passage detection means. This makes it possible to reduce the manufacturing cost as compared to the game machines.

  Here, the game ball that has passed through one of the first passage detection means can be detected by the second passage detection means when the second movable member is in the first state. The second passage detection means can detect a game ball that has passed through the predetermined area when the second movable member is in the first state, and a gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the passage of the game ball is detected. Can be granted. For this reason, a contact member is also provided above one of the first passage detection means, the second movable member is in the first state, the game ball contacts the contact member, and the falling speed is reduced. There may be a case where the second movable member enters the second state before the game ball passes through the predetermined area, and the game ball cannot pass through the second passage detection means that can provide an advantageous game state. In such a case, the player's interest in the game may be reduced.

  However, by providing the contact member only above the other first passage detection means and not above the first passage detection means, the contact member can collect the player's awareness of the game ball. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in games.

  The present invention also provides the following gaming machines. The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, described later) including a movable accessory (for example, upper left third movable accessory 720 (described later)) that is rotated by driving of a driving means (for example, motor 722 (described later)). The movable accessory is a predetermined position (for example, described later) on a first member (for example, a base member 721 to be described later) to which the driving means is attached and the first member. A second member (for example, an arm member 723 described later) that is pivotally supported around a predetermined position 723a and the like and rotated by driving of the driving means, and the second member is rotatable. A pivoting member (for example, described later) that pivots about the predetermined position and pivots about a specific position (for example, a specific position 725a described later) separated from the predetermined position by a predetermined distance. Rotating member 725 etc.), The rotating member has a gear (for example, a second connecting member 726 described later) that rotates around the specific position in accordance with the rotation of the second member, and the gear is arranged on the periphery thereof. An abutting member (for example, an abutting member 726b described later) is formed, and in rotation around the specific position, the abutting member rotates from a standby position where rotation starts to a driving position where rotation ends, The abutting member can be urged by a magnetic force in the direction of the driving position in the vicinity of the driving position.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a movable accessory that rotates by driving of the driving means.
The movable accessory includes a first member, a second member, and a rotating member. The first member is attached with driving means. The second member is pivotally supported by the first member so as to be rotatable around a predetermined position, and is rotated by driving of the driving means. The rotating member is pivotally supported by the second member, rotates around a predetermined position, and rotates around a specific position separated from the predetermined position by a predetermined distance.
The rotating member has a gear that rotates about a specific position in accordance with the rotation of the second member. A contact member is formed on the periphery of the gear. Further, in the rotation around the specific position, the gear rotates from the standby position where the rotation starts to the drive position where the rotation ends. The abutting member can be biased by a magnetic force in the direction of the driving position in the vicinity of the driving position.

Thereby, for example, when the driving means is driven, the second member is rotated, and the second member is rotated, whereby the rotating member is rotated from the standby position to the driving position around the specific position. For example, when the second member or the like is provided with a magnet (or a part made of a ferromagnetic material) with which the contact member of the gear contacts at the driving position, and the contact member is formed of a ferromagnetic material (or magnet), the gear Is a standby position, the contact member is not biased by maintaining a certain distance between the magnet and the contact member.
On the other hand, when the gear rotates to the driving position, the magnet and the contact member come close to or come into contact with each other, whereby it becomes possible to urge the accessory by the attractive force (magnetic force) of either one.

  In this way, the gear for rotating the movable rotating member is provided with the contact member that is urged by the magnetic force at the driving position where the rotation is completed, so that the role such as the rotating member can be separated. Even if it is the structure which drives by, it can stabilize the state after operation | movement easily. Therefore, the state after the operation of the accessory can be easily stabilized by the configuration capable of fixing the operating accessory.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, in addition to the above-described configuration, the rotating member is attached to the gear and emits light in a predetermined manner (for example, an electric decoration 727 described later), and the specific position. A tape measure portion (for example, a tape measure portion 728a, which will be described later) having a biasing force in the winding direction is connected to the electrical decoration body. A connecting member (for example, a flat cable 728, which will be described later), the gear is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a housing portion (for example, a housing portion 726c, which will be described later) that houses the tape measure, and the housing portion A locking portion (for example, a locking portion 726d to be described later) that locks with one end of the tape measure portion housed in the tape measure portion, and the tape measure portion is wound in a direction where one end of the tape measure portion is wound inside the storage portion. By the urging force to the And wherein the biasing said gear toward said waiting position.

In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the rotation member includes an electrical decoration body and a connection member. The electrical decoration body is attached by being fixed to a gear or the like, and emits light in a predetermined manner. The connecting member is wound around a specific position, is formed in a tape measure shape so as to be elastically changeable, includes a tape measure portion having an urging force in a winding direction, and is connected to the electric decoration body.
Further, the gear has a housing portion and a locking portion. The accommodating portion is formed in a cylindrical shape and accommodates the tape measure portion. The locking part locks one end of the tape measure housed in the housing part.
And a tape measure part urges | biass a gearwheel in the direction of a standby position via a latching | locking part by elastically deforming in the winding direction in the inside of an accommodating part.

  By elastically deforming the tape measure of the connecting member in the winding direction inside the gear housing, and by biasing the gear in the direction of rotating the gear through the locking portion by the elastic force of the connecting member, The movable speed can be increased and a space can be saved because the gear is used as the housing position of the connecting member.

Here, when a gear is used as the movable accessory, a backlash is usually provided between the gear and another member meshing with the gear in order to smoothly rotate the gear. This backlash causes the member attached to the gear to slightly move when the gear stops.
However, in the rotating member, a tape measure is formed on the connecting member connected to the electric body attached to the gear, and one end of the tape measure is biased in the winding direction inside the gear housing. By energizing the gear in the direction of the standby position via the locking portion locked by, it is possible to reduce the fine movement of the rotating member due to backlash when the gear stops.

  The present invention also provides the following gaming machines. The gaming machine of the present invention has a gaming area in which a game ball can roll (for example, a game area 120a described later) and a winning device in which a game ball that rolls in the game area can enter (for example, a first game described later). 2 start opening winning device 510 etc.) (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 described later), wherein the winning device can detect that a game ball has passed a predetermined area. (For example, a winning detection means 514 described later) and a predetermined driving condition are established, the first inductible state in which the game ball can be guided to the predetermined area, and the first inductive that cannot be guided A first movable piece that can be driven to an impossible state (for example, a first movable piece 515 described later) and a first movable piece that is provided above the first movable piece and can guide the game ball to the first movable piece Drive to the second navigable state and the second non-navigable state A second movable piece (for example, a second movable piece 516 described later), and when the first movable piece is driven from the first non-guideable state to the first guideable state, The second movable piece is driven from the second inoperable state to the second inducible state, the game ball can be guided to the predetermined area by the first movable piece, and the first movable piece is in the first guide. When the second movable piece is driven from the second inducible state to the second inoperable state when driving from the possible state to the first non-inducible state, the predetermined by the first movable piece The guidance of the game ball to the area can be blocked by the second movable piece.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a game area in which a game ball can roll and a winning device in which a game ball rolling in the game area can enter.
The winning device includes a winning detection means, a first movable piece, and a second movable piece. The winning detection means can detect that the game ball has passed the predetermined area. The first movable piece can be driven into a first guideable state in which the game ball can be guided to a predetermined area and a first non-guideable state in which the first movable piece cannot be guided based on a predetermined drive condition being satisfied. is there. The second movable piece is provided above the first movable piece and can be driven into a second inducible state in which the game ball can be guided to the first movable piece and a second inducible state in which the game ball cannot be induced. is there.

  When the first movable piece is driven from the first non-guideable state to the first guideable state, the second movable piece is driven from the second non-guideable state to the second guideable state, and the first movable piece is The game ball can be guided to a predetermined area. Further, when the first movable piece is driven from the first guideable state to the first non-guideable state, the second movable piece is driven from the second guideable state to the second non-guideable state. The guidance of the game ball to the predetermined area by the movable piece can be blocked by the second movable piece.

  Here, normally, the gaming machine switches the first movable piece between the first inducible state and the first inoperable state at a timing based on a preset performance relating to a prize ball. Originally, the player's benefit due to the first movable piece being in the first inducible state ends when the first movable piece starts to be driven into the first inducible state. However, after that, while the first movable piece is driven from the first guideable state to the first non-guideable state, the game ball is guided to the predetermined area detected by the winning detection means by the first movable piece and won. There is a case. For example, a winning ball based on such a winning is an unexpected profit for the player and an unexpected loss for the game hall.

According to the present invention, when the first movable piece is driven from the first guideable state to the first non-guideable state, the second movable piece is driven from the second guideable state to the second non-guideable state. Even when the first movable piece is in the process of guiding the game ball to the predetermined area detected by the winning detection means at the start of driving from the first guideable state to the first non-guideable state, It is also possible to prevent the second movable piece from guiding the game ball guided to the first movable piece to a predetermined area. Thereby, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls are won, even in a gaming machine that switches between the first guideable state and the first non-guideable state, it is possible to prevent winning beyond the predetermined number. It becomes possible.
Therefore, it is possible to accurately calculate the performance related to the prize ball of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately manage the balance of profits between the player and the game hall.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above-described configuration, the winning device includes a driving unit that can be driven based on the establishment of the predetermined driving condition (for example, a driving unit 517 described later), and the other one end. One end side is rotatably engaged with the first movable piece, the other end side is rotatably engaged with the second movable piece, and has a fulcrum between the one end side and the other end side. The first movable piece further comprising an interlocking member (for example, a link member 518 described later) that is rotated about the fulcrum when one of the one end side and the other end side is driven by the driving means. Is driven from the first non-guideable state to the first guideable state when the interlocking member is rotated in a predetermined direction, and when the interlocking member is rotated in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, Driving from the first inducible state to the first inoperable state, the second movable Is driven from the second non-guideable state to the second guideable state when the interlocking member rotates in the predetermined direction, and when the interlocking member rotates in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction In addition, the second inducible state is driven to the second inoperable state.

In the gaming machine having such a configuration, the variable winning device further includes a driving unit and an interlocking member. The drive means can be driven based on a predetermined drive condition being satisfied. The interlocking member extends from one end to the other end, one end side is rotatably engaged with the first movable piece, the other end side is rotatably engaged with the second movable piece, and between the one end side and the other end side. And one of the one end side and the other end side is rotated around the fulcrum by driving of the driving means.
The first movable piece is driven from the first inducible state to the first inducible state when the interlocking member rotates in a predetermined direction, and when the interlocking member rotates in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. And driving from the first inducible state to the first inoperable state. The second movable piece is driven from the second non-guideable state to the second guideable state when the interlocking member rotates in a predetermined direction, and when the interlocking member rotates in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. And driving from the second inducible state to the second inoperable state.

  In this way, by engaging a plurality of movable pieces together with the interlocking member, for example, if one movable piece is driven by one driving means, the other movable piece can also be driven. Further, by using an interlocking member, for example, when a second movable piece is further added to a gaming machine having only the first movable piece driven by the drive means, this second movable piece can be provided without providing another drive means. The piece can be driven in conjunction with the first movable piece. This makes it possible to easily design and replace the winning device.

  Further, since the first movable piece and the second movable piece are configured to be interlocked by the interlocking member, for example, due to a malfunction, the first movable piece stops during driving from the first guideable state to the first guide impossible state. It is conceivable that the game ball will continue to be picked up if only the first movable piece is used, and this game ball will be guided to a predetermined area detected by the winning detection means, but by providing the second movable piece, The second movable piece can prevent the game ball from being guided to the predetermined area to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately calculate the performance of the gaming machine regarding the prize ball, and it is possible to more accurately manage the balance of profits between the player and the game hall.

  The present invention also provides the following gaming machines. The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine to be described later) provided with a movable accessory (for example, an upper left third movable accessory 820 to be described later) driven by a driving means (for example, a motor 722 to be described later). 1), and the movable accessory is rotatable about a predetermined position with respect to a first member (for example, a base member 721 described later) to which the driving means is attached and the first member. A second member (for example, an arm member 830 described later) that is pivotally supported and rotated by driving of the driving means, is pivotally supported by the second member, meshes with the first member, and A first connecting member (for example, a first connecting member 724 described later) that rotates by rotating the second member and the contact position that meshes with the first member by moving the shaft center; The first connecting member is rotatably supported by two members, And a second connecting member (for example, a second connecting member 726 described later) that rotates as the first connecting member rotates, and the first connecting member that is attached to the first connecting member. A third connecting member that rotates with movement (for example, a third connecting member 840 described later) and a decorative member that is attached to the second connecting member and rotates with the rotation of the second connecting member (for example, The second member is engaged with the driving means on the base end side, and a first arm member that pivotally supports the first connecting member (for example, a first member described later). A first arm member 831 and the like, and a fourth connection member (for example, a later-described first connection member) that is movably engaged with the first arm member, pivotally supports the second connection member, and meshes with the third connection member. A second arm member (e.g., a second arm member 832 described later) having four connecting members 835); And the second arm member is configured such that the third connecting member meshes with the fourth connecting member after the decorative member is rotated by rotation of the second connecting member from the standby position, and the third connecting member is engaged with the third connecting member. The member moves in a direction extending from the distal end side of the first arm member, and the decorative member moves in a direction in which the second arm member extends from the distal end side of the first arm member. It is possible to contact other members.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a movable accessory that rotates by driving of the driving means.
The movable accessory includes a first member, a second member, a first connecting member, a second connecting member, a third connecting member, and a decorative member. The first member is attached with driving means. The second member is pivotally supported by the first member so as to be rotatable around a predetermined position, and is rotated by driving of the driving means. The first connecting member is pivotally supported by the second member, meshes with the first member, and the abutment position meshing with the first member moves as the shaft moves by the rotation of the second member. Then rotate. The second connecting member is pivotally supported by the second member, meshes with the first connecting member, and rotates as the first connecting member rotates. The third connecting member is attached to the first connecting member and rotates as the first connecting member rotates. The decorative member is attached to the second connecting member and rotates as the second connecting member rotates.
The second member has a first arm member and a second arm member. The first arm member has a proximal end engaged with the driving means and pivotally supports the first connecting member. The second arm member has a fourth connecting member that is movably engaged with the first arm member, pivotally supports the second connecting member, and can mesh with the third connecting member.
Then, after the decorative member is rotated by the rotation of the second connecting member from the standby position, the second arm member is engaged with the fourth connecting member, and the third connecting member is rotated by the rotation of the third connecting member. It moves in the direction of extending from the tip side of one arm member.
Further, the decorative member can come into contact with other members by moving the second arm member in a direction extending from the distal end side of the first arm member.

  Thereby, after a decoration member rotates by rotation of a 2nd connection member from a standby position, a 3rd connection member meshes with a 4th connection member of a 2nd arm member, and rotation of a 1st arm member is carried out. As a result, the first connecting member and the third connecting member rotate, the second arm member moves in the extending direction, and can come into contact with other members. In this way, after performing the effect of rotating the decorative member, the decorative member is moved so as to be able to come into contact with another member, for example, the decorative member is quickly rotated and slowly brought into contact with the other member. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to avoid damage to the movable accessory due to contact with other members.

In addition, for example, when a plurality of movable accessories including such a decorative member are provided and interlocked, the second arm members are extended after the decorative members of the plurality of movable accessories are respectively rotated. The decorative members can be brought into contact with each other by moving in the direction. As a result, when a plurality of decorative members that do not form one design when rotating are moved in the extending direction of each second arm member, they are brought into contact with each other to form one design. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the movement of the decorative member and improve the expression of the effect by the decorative member.
Therefore, when the movable accessory is driven and brought into contact with another member, it is possible to improve the effect of the movable accessory while avoiding damage to the movable accessory due to contact.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above-described configuration, the first arm member extends in a direction in which the second arm member moves, and the rotation shaft of the second connecting member that moves together with the second arm member (for example, And a groove (for example, a slide groove 831a described later) that is movably engaged with an end portion of the rotation shaft 726e described later.

  Accordingly, when the second arm member moves, the end of the rotation shaft of the second connecting member moves while engaging the groove, so that the groove serves as a guide, and the decorative member attached to the second connecting member It is possible to suppress the swinging of the lens and move it smoothly.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, when driving a movable accessory and making it contact | abut with another member, it becomes possible to improve the production effect by a movable accessory, avoiding damage to a movable accessory.

1 is a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the 2nd big prize apparatus of the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention, and Drawing 4 (a) is in the state where a game ball does not win V prize mouth, and Drawing 4 (b) Is a state in which a game ball wins a V winning opening. It is a schematic block diagram of the payout unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the prize ball case unit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the composition of the 2nd start opening prize device of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention, and Drawing 9 (a) shows the 2nd start opening prize device of the state which can win. FIG. 9B is a diagram showing the second start opening winning device in a state where winning is impossible. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a game ball contact portion of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 10 (a) is a diagram illustrating a game ball contact portion according to the first modification. FIG. 10B is a view showing the game ball contact portion of the second modification, and FIG. 10C is a view showing the game ball contact portion of the third modification. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd big prize apparatus of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is the perspective view which looked at the front decoration set of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention from the back side. It is a perspective view of the state which removed the front decoration set of the 2nd big prize device of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 1st movable accessory of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 1st movable accessory of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd movable accessory of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd movable accessory of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd movable accessory of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd movable accessory of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view of the 3rd movable accessory and the 4th movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left 3rd movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left 3rd movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left 3rd movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd connection member of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left 3rd movable accessory of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left 3rd movable accessory of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the upper left 3rd movable accessory of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the arm member of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. FIG. 28A is a cross-sectional view along AA ′ in FIG. 25, and FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view along BB ′ in FIG. 27. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 3rd connection member of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 4th movable accessory of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure explaining the structure of the 4th movable accessory of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a front view of the 3rd movable accessory and the 4th movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine concerning modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. 1 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which shows the basic specification of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention, FIG.34 (a) is a figure which shows a special symbol game specification table, FIG.34 (b) is a normal symbol. It is a figure which shows a game specification table, FIG.34 (c) is a figure which shows a win distribution table, FIG.34 (d) is a figure which shows an open | release pattern table. It is a state transition diagram of the main control of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a state transition diagram of the sub control of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the main fluctuation time determination table 1 of the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the main fluctuation time determination table 2 of the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ceiling lottery table of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the point addition table of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention, Fig.40 (a) is a figure which shows during 2nd high probability, FIG.40 (b) shows normal inside FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the short navigation time short navigation lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time navigation lottery table of the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation lottery table at the time of the set game completion | finish of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process performed by main CPU in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process performed by main CPU in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control process in the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory | storage check process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol determination process in the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol change time management process in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management process in the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hits start interval management process in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the middle hit process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing after the end of a small hit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot start interval management process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the pachinko machine based on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special winning opening release process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game completion | finish process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interruption process in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input process in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol related switch check process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the movable member control process in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub control main process which can be performed by sub CPU in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process in the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command interruption process in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis process in the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis process in the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol effect start command reception process in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the normal gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the normal gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the normal gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production determination process in 1st high probability in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd high-probability production determination process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production determination process in the 3rd high probability in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production determination process in the 4th high probability in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of jackpot start command reception in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example at the time of start command reception process per V in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the small hit | end command reception in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of receiving the display command during the big prize opening opening in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the end-of-interval command per special symbol in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure showing the production per 16R of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the production per 2R of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interruption process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the security ball presence detection process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the no collateral ball detection process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the count switch detection process performed by the payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor start waiting process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor starting initial process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows the excitation system of the payout motor in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding reception of prize ball control data of a payout control circuit in a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding transmission of the payout error information data by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the communication form between the main control circuit and the payout control circuit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of error information transmission by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the synthetic | combination method of the error information in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting aspect of the error information in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart of the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment incomplete using the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of the basic payout operation of the prize ball control processing by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the excitation data according to the drop request | requirement number in the basic payout operation | movement of the prize ball control process by the payout control circuit in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 1 of this invention. 5 is a timing chart when a retry operation is required during the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process by the payout control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the payment state alerting | reporting display apparatus in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a timing chart at the time of the occurrence of an overpayment error in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart at the time of the occurrence of a payout ball clogging error in the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a timing chart at the time of the error generation | occurrence | production of the lower plate full in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. 3 is a timing chart when a payout motor abnormality occurs in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart regarding the reception process of the payout control circuit at the time of power failure of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the point addition table of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention, FIG.110 (a) is a figure which shows during 2nd high probability, FIG.110 (b) shows normal inside FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table at the time of a lose super reach of the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 2 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the 1st high probability state in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 2 of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the prize ball case unit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interruption process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 3 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the count switch detection process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 3 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor drive process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko gaming machine concerning Embodiment 3 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the origin adjustment excitation data setting process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 3 of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the count switch detection process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor starting waiting process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 4 of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the motor starting initial process performed by payout CPU in the pachinko game machine concerning Embodiment 4 of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the pachinko game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, a configuration and various operations of a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

(Embodiment 1)
First, the gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described.

[Structure of pachinko machine]
With reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the structure of the gaming machine in the first embodiment will be described. 1 is a perspective view showing an appearance of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main body 2, a base door 3 that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 2, and a glass door that can be opened and closed with respect to the base door 3. 4.

[Main unit]
The main body 2 is composed of a frame-shaped member having a rectangular opening 2a (see FIG. 2). The main body 2 is formed of a material such as wood.

[Base door]
The base door 3 is configured by a plate-like member having a rectangular outer shape that is substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 2. The base door 3 is disposed in front of the main body 2 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), and by rotating the base door 3 around one side edge of the main body 2, the base door 3 The opening 2a is opened and closed.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the base door 3 is provided with a rectangular opening 3a. The opening 3 a is formed from the vicinity of the central portion of the base door 3 to the upper region, and is sized to occupy most of the base door 3.

  A speaker 11, a game board 12, a liquid crystal display device 13, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a payout unit 16, and a substrate unit 17 are attached to the base door 3.

  The speaker 11 is disposed on the upper part (near the upper end) of the base door 3. The game board 12 is disposed in front of the base door 3 (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and is disposed so as to cover the opening 3a of the base door 3.

  The game board 12 is composed of a plate-shaped resin member having light permeability. For example, acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, methacrylic resin, or the like may be used as the light-transmitting resin.

  In addition, a game area 12a in which a game ball fired from the launching device 15 rolls is formed on the front surface of the game board 12 (the surface on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The game area 12a is an area surrounded by a guide rail 41 (specifically, an outer rail 41a shown in FIG. 3 to be described later), and its outer peripheral shape is substantially circular.

  Further, a plurality of game nails (see FIG. 3 described later) are driven into the game area 12a. The configuration of the game board 12 (game area 12a) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  The liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The liquid crystal display device 13 has a display area 13a for displaying an image. The size of the display area 13 a is set so as to occupy the whole or a part of the surface of the game board 12.

  In the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13, various images such as an effect identification symbol, an effect image, and a decoration image (decoration symbol) are displayed. The player can view various images displayed on the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 via the game board 12.

  In the first embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 13 is used as the display device, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the liquid crystal display device 13, for example, a display device such as a plasma display, a rear projection display, or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display may be applied.

  A spacer 19 is provided on the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The spacer 19 is provided between the back surface of the game board 12 (surface on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) and the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 13 (surface on the front side of the pachinko game machine 1). A space serving as a flow path of the game ball rolling in the game area 12a is formed.

  The spacer 19 is made of a light transmissive material. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the spacer 19 may be partially formed of a light-transmitting material or may be formed of a non-light-transmitting material. .

  The dish unit 14 is disposed below the game board 12. The dish unit 14 includes an upper dish 21 and a lower dish 22 disposed below the upper dish 21. As shown in FIG. 2, the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22 have a payout port 21a and a payout port 22a for renting out game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls), respectively.

  When a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout opening 21a and the payout opening 22a and stored in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22, respectively. Further, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are launched into the game area 12 a by the launching device 15.

  The plate unit 14 is provided with an effect button 23. Specifically, the effect button 23 is attached on the upper plate 21. A dial operation unit (jog dial) 24 is attached to the periphery of the effect button 23 so as to be rotatable with respect to the effect button 23.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a predetermined performance function that is performed using at least one of the performance buttons 23 and the dial operation unit 24, and displays the liquid crystal display device 13 when performing a predetermined performance. An image prompting the user to operate at least one of the effect button 23 and the dial operation unit 24 is displayed in the region 13a.

  The launcher 15 is disposed in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 3. The launching device 15 includes a launching handle 25 that can be operated by a player, and a panel body 26 that engages with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14. The firing handle 25 is disposed on the front side of the panel body 26 and is rotatably supported by the panel body 26.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a solenoid actuator (driving device) that controls the launching operation of the game ball is provided on the back side of the panel body 26. Similarly, although not shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a touch sensor is provided at the peripheral edge of the firing handle 25, and a firing volume is provided inside the firing handle 25. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 25, and changes the power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the player's hand contacts the touch sensor of the launch handle 25, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. That is, it is detected that the player has gripped the firing handle 25. Then, when it is detected that the player has grasped the firing handle 25, the game ball can be launched by the solenoid actuator.

  When the player holds the firing handle 25 and rotates it clockwise (when viewed from the player side), the resistance of the firing volume changes according to the turning angle of the firing handle 25. Then, electric power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are sequentially fired, and the fired game balls are guided to the guide rail 41 (see FIG. 3 described later) and discharged to the game area 12a of the game board 12.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a firing stop button is provided on the side of the firing handle 25. The launch stop button is a button provided to stop the launch of the game ball by the solenoid actuator. Even when the shooting handle 25 is gripped and rotated by the player, the player stops pressing the shooting stop button to stop the shooting of the game ball.

  The dispensing unit 16 and the substrate unit 17 are arranged on the back side of the base door 3. A game ball is supplied to the payout unit 16 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout unit 16 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied from the storage unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22 based on the establishment of the payout condition.

  The board unit 17 has various control boards. The various control boards are provided with a main control circuit 70, a sub control circuit 200, a payout control circuit 300, and the like which will be described later (see FIG. 33 which will be described later).

[Glass door]
The glass door 4 is composed of a plate-like member having a substantially square surface. The glass door 4 is disposed on the front side of the game board 12 and has a size that covers the game board 12. On the front surface of the glass door 4, a speaker cover 29 is provided in an upper region facing the speaker 11.

  In the central portion of the glass door 4, an opening having a size that exposes at least the game area 12 a is formed in an area facing the game area 12 a of the game board 12. The opening of the glass door 4 is attached with a protective glass 28 having a light transmission property, thereby closing the opening.

  Therefore, when the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the protective glass 28 is disposed so as to face at least the game area 12 a of the game board 12.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the front surface of the game board 12, a guide rail 41, a ball passage detector 43, a first start port 44, a second start port 45 (start region), and an ordinary electric accessory 46 And are provided. In addition, on the front face of the game board 12, there are a plurality of general winning ports 51 and 52, a first big winning device 54 (variable winning device), a second big winning device 53 (variable winning device), an out port 55, and a plurality. Game nails 56 are provided.

  Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, a special symbol display device 61 (identification information display means, special symbol display means) and a normal symbol display are provided above the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 disposed substantially at the center. A device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are provided.

  In the first embodiment, a notification LED (Light Emitting Diode) that is turned on when the result of the special symbol stop display is “big hit”, a round number display LED that shows the number of rounds in the big hit game, and the like are provided. Also good.

[Various components of game area]
The guide rail 41 includes an outer rail 41a extending in an arc shape that partitions the game area 12a, and an inner rail 41b extending in an arc shape disposed on the inner side (inner peripheral side) of the outer rail 41a. Is done.

  The game area 12a is formed inside the outer rail 41a. The outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b are disposed so as to face each other in the vicinity of the left end portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side, whereby a launching device is provided between the outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b. A guide path 41c for guiding the game ball launched by 15 to the upper part of the game area 12a is formed.

  In addition, a ball discharge port 41d is formed at the distal end portion of the inner rail 41b located at the upper left portion of the game area 12a by the distal end portion of the inner rail 41b and a part of the outer rail 41a facing the inner rail 41b. A ball return prevention piece 42 is provided at the tip of the inner rail 41b so as to block the ball discharge port 41d.

  The ball return prevention piece 42 prevents the game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d to the game area 12a from entering the guide path 41c again through the ball discharge port 41d.

  The game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d flows down from the upper part to the lower part of the game area 12a. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 12a such as the plurality of game nails 56, the first start opening 44, the second start opening 45, etc., and changes the traveling direction of the game area 12a. It flows down from the top to the bottom.

  A display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 12a. An obstacle 13b is provided at the upper end of the display area 13a. By providing the obstacle 13b, the game ball does not pass over an area overlapping the display area 13a in the game area 12a.

  The ball passage detector 43 is disposed in the vicinity of the right end of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The ball passage detector 43 is provided with a passing ball switch 43a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passage detector 43. In addition, when a game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not it is “winning”, and based on the result of the lottery, a normal symbol variation display is started.

  The first start port 44 is disposed below the display area 13 a, and the second start port 45 is disposed below the first start port 44. The 1st starting opening 44 and the 2nd starting opening 45 are comprised by the member which can receive a game ball.

  Hereinafter, a game ball entering or passing through the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 is referred to as “winning”. When the game balls win the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out respectively. In the first embodiment, three game balls are paid out when a winning is made at the first starting port 44, and two game balls are paid out when a winning is made at the second starting port 45. A game ball to be paid out is called a prize ball.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first start port 44, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is “big hit” or “small hit”, and the special symbol changes based on the result of the lottery. Display starts. When a game ball enters the second start opening 45, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is a “big hit” or “small hit”, and a special symbol variation display is started based on the lottery result. Is done. In the first embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 44, the probability of winning the “small hit” is zero. That is, even if the ball enters the first starting port 44, the “small hit” is not won. Further, in the first embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start opening 45, it wins the “small hit” with a higher probability than the probability of winning the “big hit”. That is, when entering the second start opening 45, it is easier to win the “small hit” than the “big hit”.
In the first embodiment, as described above, the probability of winning a “small hit” when a game ball enters the first start port 44 is zero, but the probability is not limited to zero. This probability may be lower than the probability of winning the “small hit” when a game ball enters the second start opening 45. As described above, even when a game ball enters the first start opening 44, it is possible to win the “small hit”, thereby expanding the range of the game. For example, it is possible to shift to a set game, which will be described later, from other than the “time saving game state”, which will be described later, and the range of games can be expanded.

  The first start port 44 is provided with a first start port winning ball switch 44a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball won in the first start port 44. The second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball won in the second starting port 45. The game balls won in the first start port 44 and the second start port 45 pass through a recovery port (not shown) provided in the game board 12 and are conveyed to a game ball recovery unit (not shown). Is done.

  The ordinary electric accessory 46 is provided at the second start opening 45. The ordinary electric accessory 46 includes a pair of blade-like members rotatably attached to both sides of the second start opening 45, and an ordinary electric agent solenoid 46a (described later) that drives the pair of blade-like members. 33).

  This ordinary electric accessory 46 is driven by an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, and expands a pair of wing-like members to make it easy to win a game ball in the second start opening 45, and a pair of wing-like members. Either one of the closed states in which the members are closed and the game balls cannot be won in the second start opening 45 is generated.

  In the first embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in the closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade-shaped members is not a form that makes it impossible to win a prize, but a form that makes it difficult to win a game ball. It may be.

  The general winning opening 51 is arranged near the lower left part of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side. The general winning opening 52 is disposed below the ball passage detector 43 and is disposed near the lower right portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side.

  The general winning opening 51 and the general winning opening 52 are configured by members capable of receiving game balls. Hereinafter, it is also referred to as “winning” that the game ball enters or passes through the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 51 or the general winning opening 52, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, when winning a prize in the general winning slot 51 or the general winning slot 52, there are ten prize balls, respectively.

  The general winning opening 51 is provided with a general winning ball switch 51a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball won in the general winning opening 51. Further, the general winning opening 52 is provided with a general winning ball switch 52a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball won in the general winning opening 52.

  The first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53 are arranged below the ball passage detector 43 and between the first starting port 44 and the general winning port 52. The first big prize device 54 and the second big prize device 53 are arranged in the vertical direction along the flow path of the game ball, and the second big prize device 53 is arranged above the first big prize device 54. The

  The first big prize device 54 is a so-called attacker-type opening / closing device, and includes a shutter 54a that can be opened and closed, and a solenoid actuator (a first big prize opening solenoid 54b in FIG. 33 described later) that drives the shutter.

  The first big winning device 54 receives a game ball when the corresponding shutter 54a is open (open state: first state), and the shutter 54a is closed (closed state: second state). At that time, the game ball is not accepted.

  Hereinafter, it is also referred to as “winning” that the game ball enters or passes through the first big winning device 54. When a game ball wins the first big winning device 54, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, when a game ball wins the first big winning device 54, there are 15 prize balls.

  Further, the first grand prize winning device 54 is provided with a count switch 54c (see FIG. 33 described later) for counting game balls won in the first grand prize winning device 54.

  The second grand prize device 53 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the second grand prize device of the pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 4A shows a state in which the game ball does not win the V winning opening, and FIG. 4B shows a state in which the game ball wins the V winning opening. The second grand prize winning device 53 has a blade member 53a that can be opened and closed. When the blade member 53a is in an open state, the second big prize winning device 53 receives a game ball and the blade member 53a is in a closed state (FIG. 3). Do not accept game balls. That is, there is a possibility that a game ball will enter the second big prize device 53 when the blade member 53a is open, and a possibility that a game ball will enter the second big prize device 53 when the blade member 53a is closed. Absent.

  Hereinafter, it is also referred to as “winning” that the game ball enters the second large winning device 53. When a game ball wins the second big winning device 53, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the first embodiment, even when a game ball wins the second large winning device 53, there are 15 prize balls.

  Further, a V winning opening 57 is provided inside the second large winning device 53. The second big prize device 53 has a movable member 57 a that can be opened and closed to open and close the V prize opening 57. When the V winning opening 57 is in an open state, the V winning opening 57 receives a game ball, and when the V winning opening 57 is in a closed state, the V winning opening 57 does not receive a game ball. A game ball entering the V winning opening 57 is called a “V winning”. Further, when the game ball wins the V winning opening 57, it becomes “per V”.

  The timing when the movable member 57a is opened is related to the timing when the blade member 53a is opened. For example, both the blade member 53a and the movable member 57a are normally closed. When the blade member 53a is in the open state, the movable member 57a is open at the same time or a little later, and the movable member 57a may be closed before the blade member 53a is closed. For example, the time during which the blade member 53a is in the open state may be twice the time during which the movable member 57a is in the open state.

  In addition, the second grand prize device 53 is provided with a count switch 53c (see FIG. 33 described later) for counting game balls won in the second grand prize device 53. Further, the V winning opening 57 is provided with a V winning opening winning ball switch 57c (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball won in the V winning opening 57. The second starting port 45 is provided with a second starting port winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later) for detecting a game ball won in the second starting port 45. Further, the second large winning device 53 has a V winning opening solenoid 57b for operating the movable member 57a.

  The out port 55 is provided at the lowermost part of the game area 12a. This out port 55 is a game that has not won any of the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, the general winning port 51, the general winning port 52, the first large winning device 54, and the second large winning device 53. Accept the sphere.

  When the arrangement of various components in the game area 12a of the first embodiment is arranged as shown in FIG. 3, when a game ball is thrown into the area on the right side of the game area 12a by the player (when it is hit right), A game ball is guided to the vicinity of the second start port 45 below the first start port 44 by the game nail 56 or the like.

  In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first start opening 44. As described above, in the first embodiment, when winning the first start port 44, the “small hit” is not won. Further, in the first embodiment, when winning the second start opening 45, it is easier to win “small hit” than “big hit”.

  Therefore, in the “short-time gaming state”, which will be described later, in which winning to the second starting port 45 is relatively easy, by making a right turn, the possibility of winning to the first starting port 44 is reduced. It is possible to increase the possibility of winning at the start opening 45 and to make it easy to win a “small hit”.

[Special symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the special symbol display device 61 is disposed in the approximate center of the upper portion of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The special symbol display device 61 is a display device that variably displays a special symbol (variable display and stop display) in a special symbol game. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, a special symbol display device 61 is configured by a device that displays special symbols as symbols composed of numbers, symbols, and the like.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to this, You may comprise the special symbol display apparatus 61 by several LED, for example. In this case, a display pattern configured by turning on / off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

  The special symbol display device 61 performs a variable display of the special symbol (identification information) when the game ball wins the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 (special symbol starting winning). Then, the special symbol display device 61 performs the special symbol stop display after performing the variable symbol special symbol display for a predetermined time.

Hereinafter, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball wins the first start opening 44 is referred to as a first special symbol. The special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball wins the second start opening 45 is referred to as a second special symbol. Note that whether the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be determined based on the displayed color. That is, the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is displayed in a different color when it is the first special symbol and when it is the second special symbol. For example, when the first special symbol is displayed, it is displayed in red, and when the second special symbol is displayed, it is displayed in green. This makes it possible to distinguish which special symbol is displayed.
In the first embodiment, the special symbol display device 61 has one digit. For example, the special symbol display device 61 has two digits, the left digit (ten's place) is the first special symbol, and the right digit (one digit). Can display the second special symbol, so that the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol can be distinguished from each other without using different colors. it can.

  In the special symbol display device 61, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (“big hit” mode), the gaming state is advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state. It shifts to the big hit gaming state which is a state. That is, in the special symbol display device 61, the “special jackpot” means that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the big hit gaming state. In the special symbol display device 61, when the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in the “small hit” mode, the blade member 53a is in an open state. Note that, as described above, even if the first start opening 44 is won, the “small hit” is not won.

  In the big hit gaming state, the first big winning device 54 is in an open state. Specifically, in the first embodiment, the game ball wins at the first start opening 44 or the second start opening 45, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the special symbol display device 61. If it is, the first big winning device 54 is opened.

  The open state of the first big winning device 54 is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or until a predetermined period has elapsed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states, and the opening time of the first big winning device 54 is not constant and varies depending on each type. When the elapsed state of the open state of the first grand prize-winning device 54 satisfies any of these conditions, the big prize opening that was in the open state is closed.

  Hereinafter, a game in which the first grand prize winning device 54 is in a state where it is easy to accept a game ball (open state) is referred to as a round game. During the round game, the first big winning device 54 is closed.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

  That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the special symbol display device 61, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the gaming state is shifted or maintained depending on the result.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start opening 44 during the display of the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is variable. The display (holding ball) is put on hold.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be held (so-called “the number of held balls (number of held balls)”) is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the game ball wins the second start opening 45 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) Is put on hold.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable displays (holding number) of the second special symbol to be held is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in the first embodiment, the total number of variable symbols to be held is 8 at the maximum.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variation display of one special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the other special symbol. . In addition, this invention is not limited to this, When the reserved ball of the 1st special symbol and the reserved ball of the 2nd special symbol coexist, you may make it perform the change display of a special symbol in the order kept. Note that the second special symbol may not be put on hold.

[Normal symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol display device 62 is disposed in the approximate center of the upper portion of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. In the first embodiment, the normal symbol display device 62 is arranged on the right side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

  The normal symbol display device 62 is a display device that variably displays normal symbols (variation display and stop display) in a normal symbol game. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol display device 62 is configured by two LEDs (normal symbol display LEDs) arranged in the vertical direction. In the normal symbol display device 62, a display pattern constituted by turning on / off each normal symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

  The normal symbol display device 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol by turning on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs alternately when the game ball passes the ball passage detector 43. Then, the normal symbol display device 62 performs the normal symbol stop display after performing the normal symbol variation display for a predetermined time.

  In the normal symbol display device 62, when the stopped normal symbol is in a predetermined mode (a “win” mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of “losing”), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state. In the first embodiment, when the normal symbol is in the “win” mode, the operation in which the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the closed state again is performed three times in succession. Moreover, the time of an open state is 1.5 second.

  Further, the lottery in the normal symbol game has a high probability in the “short-time gaming state”, and has a low probability in other cases. In the first embodiment, when the probability is low, the player is not elected, and when the probability is high, the player is all elected. In the lottery in this case, if the probability is low, a random number value is acquired but may not be won. If the probability is low, the lottery itself may not be performed.

  That is, the normal symbol game is a game in which the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 62, and then the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the normal electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

  If the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43 during the normal symbol variation display, the normal symbol variable display is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol that is currently in the variable display is stopped and displayed, the variable symbol of the normal symbol for which variable display has been suspended is started. In the first embodiment, the number of variable symbols of the normal symbol to be held (that is, the “holding number”) is defined as 4 times at maximum.

[Normal symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol hold display device 63 has a display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.
It is arrange | positioned in the approximate center of the upper part. In the first embodiment, the normal symbol hold display device 63 is disposed below the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62.

  The normal symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of hold of variable display of normal symbols. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol hold display device 63 is configured by four LEDs (normal symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the normal symbol hold display device 63 displays the number of normal symbols that are variably displayed by turning on / off each normal symbol hold display LED.

  Specifically, when the number of holdings of the variable symbol display is 1, the normal symbol holding LED located on the leftmost side when viewed from the player side (the first normal symbol holding LED from the left) Lights up, and other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off.

  When the number of normal symbol variable display hold is two, the first and second normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. When the number of normal symbol variable display hold is 3, the first to third normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. When the number of normal symbol variable display hold is 4, all the normal symbol hold display LEDs are lit.

[First special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol hold display device 64 is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side in the upper part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The first special symbol hold display device 64 is a device that displays information related to variable display of the first special symbol being held (the hold ball of the first special symbol). In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol hold display device 64 includes a first special symbol hold number display unit 64a and a first special symbol hold information display unit 64b.

  The first special symbol reservation information display unit 64b is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display device 61, and the first special symbol reservation information display unit 64a is arranged on the left side of the first special symbol reservation information display unit 64b. Is done.

  The first special symbol reserved number display section 64a has four LEDs (first special symbol reserved display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. Note that the display mode of the first special symbol reservation number display unit 64 a is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol hold display device 63.

  That is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is on hold, the first special symbol hold display LED from the first special symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side to the number of reserved pieces as viewed from the player side. Lights up.

  Moreover, the 1st special symbol hold information display part 64b displays the information regarding the hold ball of a 1st special symbol. For example, the first special symbol hold information display unit 64b displays information (identification information) about the hold ball of the first special symbol to be variably displayed next with a symbol made up of numbers, symbols, and the like.

  Note that the configuration of the first special symbol hold display device 64 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 3, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of variable display holds of the first special symbol. .

[Second special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 3, the second special symbol hold display device 65 is disposed on the right side of the normal symbol display device 62 at the upper part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 as viewed from the player side.

  The second special symbol hold display device 65 is a device that displays information relating to variable display of the second special symbol being held (the hold ball of the second special symbol). In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the second special symbol hold display device 65 includes a second special symbol hold number display unit 65a and a second special symbol hold information display unit 65b.

  The second special symbol hold information display unit 65b is arranged on the right side of the normal symbol display device 62, and the second special symbol hold information display unit 65a is arranged on the right side of the second special symbol hold information display unit 65b. Is done.

  The second special symbol reserved number display unit 65a has four LEDs (second special symbol reserved display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. Note that the display mode of the second special symbol reservation number display unit 65 a is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol hold display device 63.

  That is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is held, the second special symbol hold display LED from the second special symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side to the hold number when viewed from the player side. Lights up.

  In addition, the second special symbol hold information display unit 65b displays information related to the hold ball of the second special symbol. For example, the second special symbol hold information display unit 65b displays information (identification information) related to the hold ball of the second special symbol to be variably displayed next with a symbol made up of numbers, symbols, and the like.

  The configuration of the second special symbol hold display device 65 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 3, and can be arbitrarily configured as long as it can display at least the number of variable display hold numbers of the second special symbol. .

[Liquid Crystal Display]
The liquid crystal display device 13 is composed of liquid crystal as described above, and displays various effects in the display area 13a.

  Specifically, in the first embodiment, the effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61, except for a specific case, for example, a plurality of effect identification symbols (decorations) including numbers 1 to 8 and various characters are used. (Design) is variably displayed in the display area 13a.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol (such as a liquid crystal symbol matching line described later) are also stopped and displayed in the display area 13a.

  Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61 is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is “big hit”), the player can grasp that it is “big hit”. The effect image is displayed in the display area 13a.

  As an effect for causing the player to grasp that it is a “hit”, for example, first, a plurality of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a specific mode (for example, a mode in which the same decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction) After that, there is an effect of displaying an image for informing the “big hit”.

  In the first embodiment, an effect image related to the display contents of the first special symbol hold display device 64 and the second special symbol hold display device 65 is displayed in the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. For example, the display area 13a displays hold information (for example, the same number of holding symbols as the number of holdings) for notifying the number of holdings for variable display of special symbols. In the case where a so-called pre-reading effect, which is a well-known technique, is performed based on the information on the reserved ball of the special symbol, a notice in advance at this time may be displayed in the display area 13a.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 62 is in a predetermined form, an effect image for allowing the player to grasp the information is displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. You may provide further the function to make.

[Notification production]
As will be described in detail later, in the first embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied, a game ball is awarded to the V winning opening 57 and “per V” is notified about the gaming state. This is executed when winning a small hit that triggers this "per V". This notification is performed by displaying the effect image in the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. Thereby, the player can perform an advantageous gaming state by performing a launching operation of the game ball based on the notification. Specifically, according to the notification content, a launch operation is performed so that the game ball enters the second big prize device 53 so as to be “per V”, or the second operation is performed so as not to be “per V”. It is possible to perform a launch operation so that a game ball does not enter the grand prize winning device 53.

[Schematic configuration of dispensing unit]
Next, the payout unit 16 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the overall configuration of the payout unit 16, and is a view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the back side. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a configuration of a prize ball case unit 170 as a payout device described later.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the payout unit 16 is supplied with a game ball from a storage unit (not shown) at the upper part of the gaming machine, and a ball tank 161 as a ball storage tank for storing the supplied game ball, The ball tank lower passage 162 connected to the ball tank 161 so as to communicate with the tank 161, and the payout of the game ball, such as paying out the game ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22 can be managed. A prize ball case unit 170.

  In addition, a board unit 17 in which various control boards including a payout control circuit 300 are incorporated is arranged below the ball tank 161 and the ball tank lower passage 162 and in parallel with the prize ball case unit 170. .

  Here, the above-described storage unit (not shown) is a replenishment device as an incidental facility of a hall (game room) installed to supply game balls to the ball tank 161 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. In the payout unit 16, the game balls supplied from the storage unit are guided and stored in the prize ball case unit 170 through the ball tank 161 and the ball tank lower passage 162.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the prize ball case unit 170 includes a first start opening 44, a second start opening 45, and a general winning opening 51 as a plurality of winning openings provided in the gaming area 12a (see FIG. 3). The game ball is paid out from the ball tank 161 to a payout passage 180 (to be described later) on the condition that the game ball is won in any one of the general winning port 52, the first big prize device 54 and the second big prize device 53. is there. The payout passage 180 is disposed at the lowermost part of the prize ball case unit 170.

  The prize ball case unit 170 includes a first ball supply passage 171A, a first 15-ball collateral switch 172A as supply detection means, and a first sprocket 173A as movement means. Here, although the prize ball case unit 170 is omitted except for a part in FIG. 6, it is the same as the first ball supply passage 171A, the first 15 ball collateral switch 172A and the first sprocket 173A described above. The second ball supply passage 171B, the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B, and the second sprocket 173B as the moving means are arranged on the back side in the paper surface direction (the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1) in FIG. Yes.

  That is, the prize ball case unit 170 has a structure including two rows of the ball supply passage 171, the 15-ball collateral switch 172, and the sprocket 173.

  However, the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B are arranged with their phases shifted by 60 ° from each other. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the first ball supply passage 171A and the second ball supply passage 171B are collectively referred to as a “ball supply passage 171”, and the first 15-ball secured switch 172A and the second ball supply passage 171A. The two 15-ball collateral switches 172B are collectively referred to as “15-ball collateral switches 172”, and the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B are collectively referred to as “sprockets 173”.

  Also, the payout passage 180 actually has a two-row structure having a first payout passage 180A and a second payout passage 180B. However, in the following, unless otherwise specified, the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B are collectively referred to as “payout passage 180”.

  The ball supply passage 171 communicates with the ball tank 161 via the ball tank lower passage 162 so that game balls are replenished from the ball tank 161 via the ball tank lower passage 162. The ball supply passage 171 can store up to a prescribed number of game balls replenished from the ball tank 161 (15 in the first embodiment). Actually, since the first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B have a two-row structure, a total of 30 game balls can be accumulated in these passages.

  The 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects a game ball replenished in the ball supply passage 171. Specifically, the 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects that the game ball is replenished by detecting the ball detection shielding plate 172a by the detection sensor 172b every time the game ball is replenished (passed). To do.

  Therefore, when the number of game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 is insufficient, that is, less than 15, the ball detection shielding plate 172a is activated and moves out of the detection area of the detection sensor 172b, so that the inside of the ball supply passage 171 It is detected that the prescribed number (15 in the first embodiment) is not accumulated.

  Further, the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is turned on while detecting that a game ball is being replenished. Note that FIG. 6 shows a state in which the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is detecting a game ball replenished.

  In addition, the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is turned on while it is detected that the game ball replenished in the ball supply passage 171 passes over the 15-ball collateral switch 172. "The game ball is replenished" means that the 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects that the game ball passes through the ball supply passage 171 and that the game ball exists in the ball supply passage 171. Thus, it is guaranteed that a prescribed number of game balls exist in the ball supply passage 171 under the premise that the game balls are connected.

  The sprocket 173 is connected to a payout motor 174 as a driving means constituted by a stepping motor, and rotates in the clockwise direction in the drawing according to the drive of the payout motor 174 described later. The sprocket 173 receives the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 one by one, rotates when the payout motor 174 is driven by a predetermined number of steps, and moves to the payout passage 180 one ball at a time. It has become.

  In addition to the above, the sprocket 173 rotates when the payout motor 174 is driven by a predetermined number of steps, and as a result, the sprocket 173 rotates to accept the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passage 171 one by one. A configuration depending on the rotation of the dispensing motor 174 can also be included.

  That is, it can be expressed that the sprocket 173 rotates acceptably one ball at a time by the payout motor 174 and pays out one ball at a time. As a result of the predetermined rotation of the payout motor 174, the sprocket 173 is one ball at a time. It can be expressed as accepting and paying out one ball at a time.

  The sprocket 173 is assumed to rotate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The sprocket 173 has a plate shape and is a slide type that can move or drive in parallel and perpendicular to the payout passage 180. The shape of the sprocket 173 may be any shape as long as a predetermined number of game balls can be received and paid out.

  The payout motor 174 is common to the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B. The sprocket 173 and the payout motor 174 in the first embodiment constitute a game ball control means and a payout means capable of moving the game ball that has passed through the ball supply passage 171.

  The first payout passage 180A and the second payout passage 180B are provided with a first count switch 181A and a second count switch 181B, respectively. However, in the following, the first count switch 181A and the second count switch 181B are collectively referred to as “count switch 181” unless otherwise specified.

  The counting switch 181 detects a game ball paid out to the payout passage 180 by the sprocket 173. The counting switch 181 in the first embodiment constitutes a payout detection unit.

  In addition, a ball shutter 175 is provided in the vicinity of the uppermost part of the ball supply passage 171. When the ball shutter 175 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the figure, the ball supply passage 171 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the upper part of the ball supply passage 171 are discharged through the ball discharge passage 176. It has become. The ball removal shutter 175 is normally locked, and is used when, for example, a game ball stored in the ball tank 161 is discharged.

[Modification 1 of Embodiment 1]
Next, Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided on a game board 120 or a game board 120, which will be described below, in addition to or instead of the structure provided on the game board 12 or the game board 12 of the first embodiment. A configuration can be provided.

  FIG. 7 is a front view showing a configuration of a gaming board of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. Here, the player plays a game while facing a game area 120a of a game board 120 described later. In the description of the game board 120, “front side” means the player side (front side shown in FIG. 8), and “back side” means the side opposite to the player (back side shown in FIG. 8). Side). Further, “right” means right when viewed from the player (viewed from the front side shown in FIG. 8), and “left” means viewed from the player (front side shown in FIG. 8). Means left).

  As shown in FIG. 8, the gaming board 120 according to the first modification is arranged on the front surface side, the panel main body 500 in which the panel opening 500 a is formed, and the center fitted to the panel opening 500 a of the panel main body 500. A base plate 600 and a rear box 700 disposed on the back side of the panel body 500 are provided.

  In the panel main body 500, a game area 120a in which a game ball can roll is formed on the front surface, and in the game area 120a, a second start opening winning device 510 is provided below the panel opening 500a.

  The center base plate 600 is formed in a ring shape, and a game area 120 a continuous with the game area 120 a of the panel body 500 is formed. The center base plate 600 is provided with a second big prize device 610 in the game area 120a, and is provided with a first movable accessory 620 that can move inside the ring shape.

  In the rear box 700, a substantially square box opening 700a is formed at a position overlapping the panel opening 500a of the panel body 500, and a second movable accessory 710 is provided below the box opening 700a. In the vicinity of the four corners of the portion 700a, there are four third movable combinations (the upper left third movable combination 720, the upper right third movable combination 730, the lower left third movable combination 740, and the lower right third movable combination 750). A fourth movable accessory 760 is provided above the box opening 700a.

  Second start opening winning device 510, second big winning device 610, first movable accessory 620, second movable accessory 710, third movable accessory (upper left third movable accessory 720, upper right third movable accessory 730) The lower left third movable accessory 740, the lower right third movable accessory 750) or the fourth movable accessory 760 will be described as a configuration provided in the game board 120 of the first modification of the first embodiment. The configuration can be provided at any position of any pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments.

(Second starting opening winning device of modification 1)
FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the second start opening winning device for the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 9 (a) shows the second start opening in a state where a winning is possible. FIG. 9B is a diagram showing the winning device, and FIG. 9B is a diagram showing the second start-up winning device in a state where winning is impossible. FIG. 9 is a side view of the second start opening winning device.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the second start opening winning device 510 as a winning device is capable of entering a game ball that rolls in the game area 120a, and is an opening for a winning device formed in the panel body 500. A front ornament 511 disposed on the front side of 500b, a entrance 512 for entering a game ball rolling between the front ornament 511 and the panel body 500 and rolling in the game area 120a, and an electric chew unit 513 And comprising. The electric Chu unit 513 includes a winning detection means 514, a first movable piece 515, a second movable piece 516, in a second start port winning device box (not shown) fixed to the back of the panel body 500. Drive means 517 and a link member 518 as an interlocking member are provided.

  The winning detection means 514 can detect that the game ball that has entered the entrance 512 has passed through the predetermined area 514a. The winning detection means 514 is provided with a second start opening winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later).

  The first movable piece 515 is provided below the ball entrance 512 so as to be slidable to the front side or the back side in a second start port winning device box (not shown). The first movable piece 515 satisfies a predetermined driving condition (for example, in the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3, when the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (a “winning” mode)). Based on the first guidance possible state (state shown in FIG. 9A) that can guide the game ball to the predetermined area 514a of the winning detection means 514 and the first guidance impossible state that cannot be guided (FIG. 9). (The state shown in (b)). The predetermined drive condition may be satisfied when the special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61 shown in FIG. 3 is in a predetermined mode (a “winning” mode). In addition, the second start opening winning device 510 is an example of a winning device. Among the winning devices having the same configuration as the second starting opening winning device 510, it is normal that the game ball is detected by the winning detection means 514. In the case of the starting condition, the winning device functions as a winning opening having an ordinary electric accessory, and when the game detecting ball is detected by the winning detection means 514 is a special symbol starting condition. The winning device functions as a winning opening having a special electric accessory.

  The first movable piece 515 is connected to the guide surface 515a for guiding the game ball in the direction of the winning detection means 514 and the guide surface 515a. The first movable piece 515 extends upwardly to the front side and protrudes to the front side in the first guideable state. A receiving surface 515b for receiving a sphere.

  The second movable piece 516 is located below the ball entrance 512 and above the first movable piece 515 (upper side in FIG. 9A), on the front face of the second start port winning device box (not shown). It is slidably provided on the side or back side. The second movable piece 516 satisfies a predetermined driving condition (for example, in the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (a “winning” mode)). From the second non-guideable state (the state shown in FIG. 9B) that cannot be guided to the second guideable state (FIG. 9A) in which the game ball can be guided to the first movable piece 515. In the state shown).

  The second movable piece 516 includes a game ball abutting portion 516a that abuts on the game ball that contacts the receiving surface 515b of the first movable piece 515 and does not contact the game ball that contacts the guide surface 515a of the first movable piece 515. . That is, the distance between the lower end of the game ball contact portion 516a of the second movable piece 516 (the portion of the game ball contact portion 516a closest to the first movable piece 515) and the guide surface 515a of the first movable piece 515 is The dimensions are approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the game ball contact portion of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 10 (a) shows the game ball contact portion according to the first modification. FIG. 10B is a diagram showing the game ball contact portion of the second modification, and FIG. 10C is a diagram showing the game ball contact portion of the third modification. FIG. 10 is a view of the game ball contact portion as viewed from the side.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), the game ball contact portion 516a of Modification 1 is provided at the front side end portion of the second movable piece 516, extends downward, and the front side surface is a vertical surface. On the back side surface, an inclined surface 516a ′ is formed which is inclined from the back side to the front side toward the lower end. In this way, by forming the inclined surface 516a ′ on the back surface, for example, the second movable piece 516 can be finely moved up and down, and the second guideable state (state shown in FIG. 9A). When driving to the second non-guideable state (the state shown in FIG. 9B), it becomes easier to get over the game ball rolling on the first movable piece 515 on the back side from the game ball contact portion 516a (winning detection means 514). (It becomes easier to guide in the opposite direction to that of FIG. 9).

  As shown in FIG. 10B, the game ball contact portion 516b of Modification 2 is provided at the front side end of the second movable piece 516A, extends downward, and toward the lower end on the front side surface. An inclined surface 516b ′ that is inclined from the front surface side to the back surface side is formed, and the surface on the back surface side is a vertical surface. In this way, by forming the inclined surface 516b ′ on the front surface, for example, the second movable piece 516A can be finely moved up and down, and the second guideable state (the state shown in FIG. 9A). When driving from the first to the second incapable state (the state shown in FIG. 9B), it becomes easier to get over the game ball rolling on the first movable piece 515 on the front side of the game ball contact portion 516b (winning detection means) 514 (refer to FIG. 9).

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the game ball contact portion 516c of Modification 3 is provided at the front side end of the second movable piece 516B, extends downward, and toward the lower end on the front side surface. An inclined surface 516b ′ inclined from the front surface side to the back surface side is formed, and an inclined surface 516a ′ inclined from the back surface side to the front surface side toward the lower end is formed on the surface on the back surface side. In this way, the inclined surface 516b ′ is formed on the front surface and the inclined surface 516a ′ is formed on the rear surface, so that the above-described modified example has the effect of the inclined surface 516a ′ of the modified example 1. The effect of the second inclined surface 516b ′ is added, the return of the game ball becomes more fluid, and the effect of the game ball can be improved.

  The drive means 517 is composed of, for example, a solenoid, is provided on the back side of the second movable piece 516, and a predetermined drive condition is established for the piston 517a connected in the vicinity of the rear end of the second movable piece 516 ( For example, in the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is drawn to the back side based on a predetermined mode (when the “winning” mode), and a predetermined end condition is satisfied. (For example, in the normal symbol display device 62 shown in FIG. 3, the normal symbol displayed in a stopped state is pushed to the front side based on a predetermined mode (when “predetermined”) has passed a predetermined time). The driving means 517 may be provided behind the first movable piece 515, and the piston 517a may be connected in the vicinity of the rear end of the first movable piece 515.

  The link member 518 extends from one end to the other end, one end side is rotatably engaged with the first movable piece 515, the other end side is rotatably engaged with the second movable piece 516, and the one end side and the other end are engaged. A fulcrum 518a is provided between the two sides, and the other end and one end are rotated about the fulcrum 518a by the drive of the driving means 517.

  In this way, the first movable piece 515 and the second movable piece 516 are engaged with one end side and the other end side of the link member 518, and the link member 518 is rotated about the fulcrum 518a, whereby the first movable piece is obtained. When the piece 515 is driven from the first inducible state to the first inducible state, the second movable piece 516 is driven from the second inducible state to the second inducible state, and the first movable piece 515 plays a game. The sphere can be guided to the predetermined area 514a. Further, when the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first guideable state to the first non-guideable state, the second movable piece 516 is driven from the second guideable state to the second non-guideable state. The second movable piece 516 can block the guidance of the game ball to the predetermined area 514a by the first movable piece 515.

  Specifically, the driving means 517 pulls the piston 517a to the back side based on the fact that a predetermined driving condition is established. Then, the link member 518 rotates in a predetermined direction, the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first non-guideable state to the first guideable state, and the second movable piece 516 is moved from the second non-guideable state to the second state. It will drive to a guidance possible state and will be in the state shown in Drawing 9 (a).

  On the other hand, the driving means 517 pushes the piston 517a to the front side based on the fact that a predetermined end condition is satisfied. Then, the link member 518 rotates in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first guideable state to the first non-guideable state, and the second movable piece 516 is moved from the second guideable state. It drives to a 2nd guidance impossible state, and will be in the state shown in FIG.9 (b).

  At this time, among the game balls that are in contact with the first movable piece 515, the game balls that have flowed down to the guide surface 515a are guided to the predetermined area 514a without coming into contact with the game ball contact portion 516a of the second movable piece 516. The game ball in contact with the receiving surface 515b comes into contact with the game ball contact portion 516a of the second movable piece 516, and the guidance to the predetermined area 514a is blocked.

  According to the 2nd starting opening winning device 510 of the pachinko game machine 1 which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 as mentioned above, there exist the following effects. According to the second start opening winning device 510, when the first movable piece 515 is driven from the first guideable state to the first non-guideable state, the second movable piece 516 is moved from the second guideable state to the second guide. In order to drive to the impossible state, the first movable piece 515 guides the game ball to a predetermined area detected by the winning detection means 514 at the start of driving from the first guideable state to the first non-guideable state. Even if it is in the middle, the second movable piece 516 can be prevented from guiding the game ball guided to the first movable piece 515 to the predetermined area. Thereby, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls are won, even in a gaming machine that switches between the first guideable state and the first non-guideable state, it is possible to prevent winning beyond the predetermined number. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to accurately calculate the performance related to the prize ball of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately manage the balance of profits between the player and the game hall.

  Further, by engaging both the first movable piece 515 and the second movable piece 516 with the link member 518, for example, if one movable piece is driven by one driving means 517, the other movable piece is also driven. be able to. In addition, by using the link member 518, for example, when a second movable piece 516 is further added to a gaming machine having only the first movable piece 515 driven by the driving means 517, another driving means is not provided. The second movable piece 516 can be driven in conjunction with the first movable piece 515. This makes it possible to easily design and replace the winning device.

  In addition, since the first movable piece 515 and the second movable piece 516 are configured to be linked by the link member 518, for example, due to a malfunction, the first movable piece 515 is changed from the first guideable state to the first non-guideable state. When it stops during driving, it is conceivable that if only the first movable piece 515 is used, the game ball continues to be picked up, and this game ball is guided to a predetermined area detected by the winning detection means 514. By providing the piece 516, the second movable piece 516 can prevent the game ball from being guided to a predetermined area to some extent. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately calculate the performance of the gaming machine regarding the prize ball, and it is possible to more accurately manage the balance of profits between the player and the game hall.

(Second Grand Prize Winner of Modification 1)
FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the second big prize device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The second big prize device 610 as a variable prize device includes a front decoration set 611, a V shutter 612 as a first movable member, a right prize ball sensor 613 and a left prize ball sensor 614 as a plurality of first passage detection means. And a V-belt 615 as a second movable member, a V winning sensor 616 as a second passage detection means, and a discharge sensor 617 as a third passage detection means. In the following description, the second grand prize winning device 610 will be described as the second grand prize winning device. However, the same configuration as the second big prize winning device 610 is not limited thereto, and the first grand prize winning device is a start opening. The present invention can be applied to a starting port device, a general winning port device as a general winning port, and the like. Further, for example, when the same configuration as that of the second grand prize winning device 610 is applied to the start opening device, the first start opening winning ball switch 44a (see FIG. 33 described later) or the second start instead of the V winning sensor 616. An entrance winning ball switch 45a (see FIG. 33 described later) may be provided. For example, when a configuration similar to that of the second big prize device 610 is applied to the general prize opening device, a passing ball switch 43a (see FIG. 33 described later) may be provided instead of the V prize sensor 616.

  The front decoration set 611 is provided on the front side of the center base plate 600 and in the game area 120a. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of a front decoration set of a pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention as viewed from the back side.

  The front decoration set 611 includes a front plate 611a disposed at a position away from the front surface of the center base plate 600 (see FIG. 11), a side wall 611b extending from the center base plate 600 to the front plate 611a, and a side wall at the top. 611b is not provided, the specific area 611c where the V shutter 612 (see FIG. 11) is arranged, and the front plate 611a protrudes from the front plate 611a toward the center base plate 600 near the top, and the V shutter 612 and the right prize ball sensor 613 (see FIG. 11), and a contact member 611d provided between the contact member 611d and the contact member 611d.

  A game ball can pass between the protruding tip of the contact member 611d and the front surface of the center base plate 600. The contact member 611d can contact the game ball that has passed through the specific area 611c. Further, the contact member 611d is provided in a substantially right half range of the specific region 611c. As will be described in detail later, a right prize ball sensor 613 is provided below the right side of the specific area 611c, and a left prize ball sensor 614 is provided below the left side of the specific area 611c. That is, the contact member 611d is provided above the right prize ball sensor 613, and is not provided above the left prize ball sensor 614.

  In addition, the front decoration set 611 is a space formed by the sorting portion 611e formed by the side wall 611b and the front plate 611a and the side wall 611b below the specific area 611c, and guides the game ball that has passed through the specific area 611c. A first guide passage 611f, a second guide passage 611g, and a third guide passage 611h functioning as a guide passage.

  The first guide passage 611f, which is an example of the predetermined area, is provided between the V bell 615 and the V winning sensor 616. The first guide passage 611f is provided with a speed reduction portion 611j that can reduce the rolling speed of the game ball passing through the first guide passage 611f. Here, the speed reduction part 611j in the present embodiment is provided between the V bell 615 and the V winning sensor 616, and before the game ball that has passed through the first guide passage 611f reaches the V winning sensor 616. It is a member having a function that makes it possible to attenuate (decelerate) the rolling speed of the game ball. If it has such a function, the shape may be a rib, a curved passage, or the like. In other words, the speed reduction unit 611j is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment as long as it has a function of attenuating the rolling speed of the rolling game ball. The rolling direction of the game ball formed in the game area 120a provided with the protruding rib, the rib protruding toward the game board 12 from the front plate 611a of the front decoration set 611, or the second grand prize winning device 610 is set. It can be set as arbitrary structures, such as a structure including a curved passage (curved part) which can be guided, a windmill, and a distribution valve. By temporarily lowering the rolling speed of the game ball with such a deceleration unit 611j, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the game ball, and then a game state that is advantageous to the player can be given. Since this game ball passes through the winning sensor 616, it is possible to enhance the effect of the game ball passing through the V winning sensor 616. In the first guide passage 611f, a passage protrusion that protrudes from the front plate 611a toward the center base plate 600, extends along the first guide passage 611f, and can contact a game ball flowing down the first guide passage 611f. 611k is provided. By providing such a passage protrusion 611k, the game ball flowing down the first guide passage 611f flows down in contact with the passage protrusion 611k in the first guide passage 611f as compared with the case of simply flowing down, It moves more complicated and the performance by the game ball is improved.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the sorting unit 611 e is formed in a mountain shape that slopes down to the left and right with the approximate center in the left and right direction as the apex. The first guide passage 611f extends below one skirt (left side in FIG. 12) of the distributing portion 611e, and a V-belt 615 is disposed at an intermediate portion. The second guide passage 611g extends downward from the other hem (right side in FIG. 12) of the sorting portion 611e. One end of the third guide passage 611h is connected above the V bell 615 of the first guide passage 611f, is inclined downward, and the other end is connected to the second guide passage 611g. The front decoration set 611 is made of a transparent material, and at least a part of the game ball guided by the first guide passage 611f, the second guide passage 611g, and the third guide passage 611h can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 13: is a perspective view of the state which removed the front decoration set of the 2nd big prize apparatus of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. The V shutter 612 is slid to the front side or the back side by a solenoid actuator (a second big prize opening solenoid 53b in FIG. 33 described later). The V shutter 612 is disposed in the specific area 611c (see FIG. 11), slides to the back side, and in a state where the game ball is retracted from the front surface of the center base plate 600, a first state in which the game ball easily passes through the specific area 611c ( In a state where the game ball slides to the front side and protrudes from the front surface of the center base plate 600, the game ball is in a second state (closed state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 611c. Further, the V shutter 612 is disposed so as to be inclined downward from one side (for example, the left side in the example shown in FIG. 11) to the other side (for example, the right side in the example shown in FIG. 11) when viewed from the front side. Yes.

  The right prize ball sensor 613 and the left prize ball sensor 614 are arranged in parallel at substantially the same height in the left-right direction in the game area 120a, provided with a count switch 53c (see FIG. 33 described later), and a V-shutter 612. In the first state, it is possible to detect the passage of a game ball that has entered the second grand prize winning device 610 and to give a predetermined game value (for example, a predetermined number of payout balls) to the player. is there. As described above, the V shutter 612 is disposed so as to be inclined downward from the left side to the right side in the left-right direction, and the right prize ball sensor 613 and the left prize ball sensor 614 are arranged in parallel at substantially the same height in the left-right direction. That is, the distance between the right prize ball sensor 613 and the V shutter 612 is shorter than the distance between the left prize ball sensor 614 and the V shutter 612. In this embodiment, the V shutter 612 is disposed so as to be inclined downward from the left side to the right side in the left-right direction, and the right prize ball sensor 613 and the left prize ball sensor 614 are arranged in parallel at substantially the same height in the left-right direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the V shutter 612 is arranged substantially horizontally in the left-right direction, and the right prize ball sensor 613 is arranged at a position higher than the left prize ball sensor 614 (position closer to the V shutter 612). Also good.

  The V-velo 615 slides to the front side or the back side by a solenoid actuator (V winning opening solenoid 57b in FIG. 33 described later). The V-velo 615 is disposed below the left prize ball sensor 614, slides toward the back side, and in a state where the game ball is retracted from the front surface of the center base plate 600, the game ball easily passes through the first guide passage 611f. (Open state), slides to the front side, and in a state where it protrudes from the front surface of the center base plate 600, the game ball enters a second state (closed state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the first guide passage 611f.

  The V winning sensor 616 is arranged below the V bell 615 in the game area 120a, provided with a V winning slot winning ball switch 57c (see FIG. 33 described later), and when the V bell 615 is in the first state, Among the game balls that have passed the prize ball sensor 614, the game balls that have passed through the first guide passage 611f can be detected, and a game state that is advantageous to the player when the passage of the game balls is detected (for example, a small game state described later) It is possible to grant a hitting process (game by a later-described FIG. 27).

  The discharge sensor 617 is disposed below the right prize ball sensor 613 in the game area 120a, and the game balls passed through the right prize ball sensor 613 or the left prize ball sensor 614 when the V tongue 615 is in the second state. The game ball that has not passed through the first guide passage 611f can be detected.

  Returning to FIG. 11, a specific area 611c is formed at the top of the second grand prize winning device 610, and a V-shutter 612 is arranged in the specific area 611c. A sorting unit 611e is disposed below the specific area 611c. A right prize ball sensor 613 is arranged at the right hem of the sorting unit 611e, and a left prize ball sensor 614 is arranged at the left hem of the sorting unit 611e. That is, the distribution unit 611e can distribute the game balls that have passed through the specific area 611c to the left prize ball sensor 614 that is one first passage detection means and the right prize ball sensor 613 that is the other first passage detection means. It is.

  A first guide passage 611f leading to the V winning sensor 616 is formed below the left prize ball sensor 614, and a second guide passage 611g leading to the discharge sensor 617 is formed below the right prize ball sensor 613. . Further, the V guide 615 is disposed in the first guide passage 611f, and a third guide passage 611h connected to the second guide passage 611g is connected above the V guide 615. With such a configuration, the game ball that has passed through the left prize ball sensor 614 can pass through the first guide passage 611f when the V-velo 615 is in the first state (open state). On the other hand, when the V-velo 615 is in the second state (closed state), the game ball that has passed the left prize ball sensor 614 enters the second guide passage 611g through the third guide passage 611h and enters the second guide passage 611g. Is detected by the discharge sensor 617. The game ball that has passed through the right prize ball sensor 613 is guided to the second guide passage 611g and is detected by the discharge sensor 617 regardless of the state of the V-velo 615.

  According to the second big prize device 610 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following operational effects are obtained. According to the second grand prize-winning device 610, for example, the player can obtain a game ball that has entered the second big prize-winning device 610 when the V shutter 612 is in the first state (for example, the open state). When guided by the guide passage 611f, the second guide passage 611g, or the third guide passage 611h, at least a part of the game ball becomes visible. Since the right prize ball sensor 613, the left prize ball sensor 614, the V prize sensor 616, and the discharge sensor 617 are provided in the game area 120a, it is possible to detect a game ball rolling in the game area 120a. For this reason, the game ball can roll in the game area 120a until at least immediately before the game ball is detected by each sensor.

  Therefore, by allowing the player to visually recognize at least a part of the game ball from when the game ball enters the second grand prize device 610 until it reaches each sensor, the second grand prize is won. The visibility with respect to the game ball in the device 610 can be improved. In addition, since it is possible to roll the game area 120a until the game ball is detected by each sensor, an effect using the game ball rolling in the game area 120a is performed in the second grand prize winning device 610. It becomes possible to improve the production effect for the player.

  In addition, a first guide passage 611f, a second guide passage 611g, and a third guide passage 611h are provided in the game area 120a, and a right prize ball sensor 613, a left prize ball sensor 614, a V prize sensor 616, and a discharge sensor 617 are provided in the game. Since it is provided in the area 120a, the game area 120a can be used as a part of the second grand prize winning device 610. For example, it is possible to omit the passing path of the game ball provided on the back side of the game board as in the past. It is also possible to simplify the configuration of the variable winning device.

  In addition, when a game ball that rolls in the game area 120a passes through the V prize sensor 616, if the game ball passes through the game area 120a as it rolls, the rolling speed is too high, and the V prize sensor 616 is played. It is also considered that the passage of the ball cannot be accurately detected. In order for the V winning sensor 616 to accurately detect the passage of the game ball, it is necessary to reduce the speed of the game ball rolling in the game area 120a. The speed reduction unit 611j can be used to adjust the rolling speed of such a game ball. Therefore, it is possible to accurately detect the passage of the game ball by the passage detection means.

  Further, for example, when the game ball rolls from the upstream side to the downstream side of the V shutter 612, the game ball comes into contact with the contact member 611d on the downstream side, thereby reducing the speed of the game ball and It becomes possible to collect consciousness. In addition, the distribution unit 611e can distribute the game balls to either the left prize ball sensor 614 or the right prize ball sensor 613. The game ball that has passed through the left prize ball sensor 614 may pass through the V prize sensor 616 that can give an advantageous game state to the player, but the game ball that has passed through the right prize ball sensor 613. Passes through the discharge sensor 617 without passing through the V winning sensor 616. In other words, whether or not it is advantageous for the player is determined by the rolling of the game ball in the distribution unit 611e.

  Therefore, the game portion is improved by the distribution unit 611e, and the rolling speed of the game ball can be decreased immediately before the distribution unit 611e where the game property is improved by the contact member 611d. This makes it possible to further improve the presentation effect for the player in the second grand prize winning device 610.

In addition, since the distance between the right prize ball sensor 613 and the V shutter 612 is shorter than the distance between the left prize ball sensor 614 and the V shutter 612, among the game balls that have passed through the V shutter 612, the V shutter 612 and the left prize. The rolling speed of the game ball passing between the V shutter 612 and the right prize ball sensor 613 tends to be faster than the game ball passing between the ball sensor 614 and the right prize ball sensor 613. Although it may be difficult to detect the passing of the game ball, the right award ball sensor 613 can reliably detect the passing of the game ball by reducing the rolling speed of the game ball by the contact member 611d.
Further, since the contact member 611d is provided above the right prize ball sensor 613 and is not provided above the left prize ball sensor 614, the contact member 611d is more than a gaming machine in which contact members are provided above both prize ball sensors. Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

Further, by providing the contact member 611d only above the right prize ball sensor 613 and not above the left prize ball sensor 614, the contact member 611d allows the game to be collected while the player's awareness of the game ball is collected. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest for the person.
In addition, by providing the contact member 611d only above the right prize ball sensor 613 and not above the left prize ball sensor 614, the falling speed of the game ball passing through the left prize ball sensor 614 is not reduced. The game ball that has passed the left prize ball sensor 614 rolls quickly in the direction of the V-velo 615.
If the contact member 611d is also present above the left prize ball sensor 614, the falling speed of the game ball is excessively reduced, and the V ball 615 is arranged after the game ball passes the left prize ball sensor 614. Further, the time until the first guide passage 611f is passed becomes longer.
This is because when the opening time (the time in the first state) is provided in the V-bello 615, the release time ends because the falling speed of the game ball is reduced, and the V-bello 615 is in the closed state (second time) State), and the game ball that has passed the left prize ball sensor 614 leads to a loss of opportunity to pass through the first guide passage 611f. For this reason, according to the second grand prize winning device 610 of the first modification, the contact speed of the game ball is reduced before reaching the V bell 615 by not providing the contact member 611d above the left prize ball sensor 614. It is possible to prevent a disadvantage caused to the player due to the reduction.
And since the fall speed of a game ball is not reduced until it passes through the 1st guide path 611f by which the 2nd big prize apparatus 610 of the modification 1 was arrange | positioned as above-mentioned, the V prize sensor 616 of V On the upstream side, a speed reduction unit 611j is provided, and a mechanism for temporarily reducing the rolling speed of the game ball is provided.

  As described above, in the first guide passage 611f, after the game ball that has passed the V-velo 615 is decelerated by the deceleration unit 611j, the V winning sensor 616 can be guided so that the game ball passes. For this reason, the player's consciousness about the game ball is concentrated on the game ball whose rolling speed is temporarily reduced by the deceleration unit 611j, and thereafter, a V prize can be given that gives the player an advantageous game state. Since the game ball passes through the sensor 616, it is possible to enhance the effect on the game ball passing through the V winning sensor 616.

(First movable accessory)
FIG.14 and FIG.15 is a figure explaining the structure of the 1st movable accessory of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. FIGS. 14 and 15 are front views of the first movable accessory 620. In order to facilitate understanding of the first movable accessory 620, the decorative portion 625 provided on the forefront is only indicated by a dotted line. Show. FIG. 14 shows a state before driving the first movable accessory 620 (standby position), and FIG. 15 shows a state after driving the first movable accessory 620 (drive position).

  As shown in FIG. 14, the first movable accessory 620 includes a base member 621 attached to the center base plate 600 (see FIG. 8), a motor 622 fixed to the back side of the base member 621, and the base member 621. A gear 623 disposed on the front side of the base member 621, a movable base 624 provided on the front side of the base member 621, and a decorative portion 625 fixed to the front side of the movable base 624.

  The base member 621 is formed with a pair of engaging grooves 621a that engage with the movable base 624 and extend in a predetermined direction (in the example shown in FIG. 14, the direction of the arrow shown in FIG. 14). The motor 622 is driven and controlled by a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. The gear 623 rotates by driving the motor 622. The movable base 624 engages with a meshing portion 624a in which a plurality of teeth arranged in the same direction as the engagement groove 621a meshes with the gear 623, and a pair of engagement grooves 621a of the base member 621, and the engagement groove 621a. And a pair of engaging portions 624b that can move along. The decoration unit 625 displays, for example, characters and characters, or is provided with an LED board. The LED board can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33).

  Next, the operation of the first movable accessory 620 will be described. In the state (standby position) shown in FIG. 14, when the gear 623 rotates counterclockwise by the drive of the motor 622 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33), It is transmitted to the meshing portion 624 a of the movable base 624 that meshes with the 623. Then, in the movable base 624, the pair of engagement portions 624a are guided by the pair of engagement grooves 621a of the base member 621, and the engagement groove 621a and the engagement portion 624a extend in a direction extending in the oblique direction (in the example shown in FIG. 14). Move the slide. In addition, the decorative portion 625 fixed to the movable base 624 also slides together with the movable base 624 to be in the state (drive position) shown in FIG.

  Thereby, the effect that the decoration part 625 slides in a predetermined direction is possible. Further, by providing a pair of engaging grooves 621a of the base member 621 with which the movable base 624 is engaged, the movable base 624 can be slid and moved more stably than when only one engaging groove 621a is provided. Is possible.

(Second movable item)
FIG. 16 thru | or FIG. 19 is a figure explaining the structure of the 2nd movable accessory of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. 16 and 19 are front views as seen from the front side of the second movable accessory 710, FIG. 16 shows a state before the second movable accessory 710 is driven (initial position), and FIG. 19 shows the second movable accessory 710. The state (drive position) after driving of the accessory 710 is shown. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the second movable accessory 710 viewed from the front side. FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the second movable accessory 710 viewed from the back side. 17 and 18, in order to describe the inside of the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715, the first movable member cover 713c and the third movable member of the first movable member 713 shown in FIG. The state which removed the 3rd movable member cover 715c of 715 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the second movable accessory 710 includes a base member 711 as a first member, a motor 712, a first movable member 713, a second movable member 714, a third movable member 715, A fourth movable member 716.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the base member 711 is fixed to the rear box 700 (see FIG. 8), and a base body 711a as a first member body, and a second transmission member rotatably supported by the base body 711a. As a base transmission member 711b and a motor drive transmission member 711c (see FIG. 16) meshing with the base transmission member 711b.

  The base body 711a has a pair of left and right arc-shaped outer edges, and a pair of left and right base tooth portions 711d as a plurality of teeth protruding radially along the outer edges. A movable member receiving portion 711e that protrudes from the base tooth portion 711d in the left-right direction and supports the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 in the initial state from below. Is formed. With the movable member receiving portion 711e, when the second movable accessory 710 is in the initial state (the state before driving or in the standby state), in the movable accessory in which a large number of parts spread in the left-right direction, the load applied to the joint portion of each component is reduced. It is possible to reduce and prevent a failure due to a failure of the joint. As shown in FIG. 16, the base body 711a is formed with a base front panel 711f having a symmetric outer shape on the front side. The base front panel 711f has an upper edge shape (arc shape in the example shown in FIG. 16) and a lower edge shape (linear shape in the example shown in FIG. 16) having different shapes. Thereby, the formation body which has the diversity from which a shape differs in an outer periphery and an inner periphery can be formed.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the base transmission member 711b is composed of four gears arranged in the left-right direction, and adjacent gears mesh with each other. The motor drive transmission member 711c (see FIG. 16) is constituted by a gear, rotates by driving of the motor 712, and meshes with any of the four gears constituting the base transmission member 711b. The motor 712 is an example of a driving unit, is fixed to the base member 711, and is driven and controlled by a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the first movable member 713 includes a first movable member main body 713a whose right end is pivotally supported by the base member 711, and is rotatably supported by the first movable member main body 713a. A first transmission member 713b and a first movable member cover 713c (see FIG. 16) fixed to the first movable member main body 713a and covering the first transmission member 713b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the first movable member main body 713a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the right end side, and a first movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge. 713d. The first movable member tooth portion 713d meshes with a gear disposed at the left end of the base transmission member 711b. Thus, the motor drive transmission member 711c (see FIG. 16) is rotated by driving the motor 712, the base transmission member 711b meshing with the motor drive transmission member 711c rotates, and the first movable meshing with the base transmission member 711b. The first movable member main body 713a having the member tooth portion 713d rotates. That is, the first movable member main body 713a rotates by driving the motor 712 via the motor drive transmission member 711c and the base transmission member 711b.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the first transmission member 713 b is composed of two gears arranged in the left-right direction and meshing with each other, and the right end gear meshes with the left base tooth portion 711 d of the base member 711.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the first movable member cover 713c is formed in a shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the left half portion of the base front panel 711f.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the second movable member 714 is fixed to the second movable member main body 714a whose right end is pivotally supported by the first movable member 713 and the front side of the second movable member main body 714a. A second movable member cover 714b.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the second movable member main body 714a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the right end side, and a second movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge. 714c. The second movable member tooth portion 714c meshes with a gear disposed at the left end of the first transmission member 713b.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the second movable member cover 714b is formed in substantially the same shape as the shape of the left half portion of the base front panel 711f.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the third movable member 715 has a third movable member main body 715a pivotally supported by the base member 711 on the left end side, and is rotatably supported by the third movable member main body 715a. A third transmission member 715b and a third movable member cover 715c (see FIG. 16) fixed to the third movable member main body 715a and covering the third transmission member 715b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the third movable member main body 715a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the left end side, and a third movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge. 715d. The third movable member tooth portion 715d meshes with a gear disposed at the right end of the base transmission member 711b.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the third transmission member 715 b is composed of two gears arranged in the left-right direction and meshing with each other, and the leftmost gear meshes with the right base tooth portion 711 d of the base member 711.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the third movable member cover 715c is formed in substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the right half portion of the base front panel 711f.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the fourth movable member 716 is fixed to the fourth movable member main body 716a whose left end is pivotally supported by the third movable member 715 and the front side of the fourth movable member main body 716a. And a fourth movable member cover 716b.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the fourth movable member main body 716a has an arc-shaped outer edge on the left end side, and a fourth movable member tooth portion in which a plurality of teeth protruding in the radial direction are arranged along the outer edge. 716c. The fourth movable member tooth portion 716c meshes with a gear disposed at the right end of the third transmission member 715b.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the fourth movable member cover 716b is formed in substantially the same shape as the shape of the right half portion of the base front panel 711f.

  Next, the operation of the second movable accessory 710 will be described. When the motor 712 is rotated in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise) by the control of the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) in the state before driving (initial position) shown in FIG. The drive transmission member 711c and the base transmission member 711b rotate. At this time, among the four gears of the base transmission member 711b, the leftmost gear rotates to the left and the rightmost gear rotates to the right. Then, the first movable member 713 that meshes with the left end gear of the base transmission member 711b rotates to the right, and the third movable member 715 that meshes with the right end gear of the base transmission member 711b rotates to the left. That is, the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 rotate so as to be close to each other.

  When the first movable member 713 rotates to the right, the right gear of the first transmission member 713b that meshes with the left base tooth portion 711d rotates to the right, and the left gear that meshes with the right gear moves to the left. To turn. Further, when the third movable member 715 rotates to the left side, the left gear of the third transmission member 715b that meshes with the right base tooth portion 711d rotates to the left, and the right gear that meshes with the left gear rotates to the right To turn.

  Then, the second movable member 714 that meshes with the left gear of the first transmission member 713b rotates to the right. The fourth movable member 716 that meshes with the right gear of the third transmission member 715b rotates to the left. That is, the second movable member 714 and the fourth movable member 716 rotate so as to be close to each other. Then, the second movable accessory 710 moves to a driving position that is a position where the second movable member 714 and the fourth movable member 716 are stopped after rotating to a position where the end portions thereof face each other, as shown in FIG. It becomes a state.

  Thus, the first movable member 713 is provided with the right gear of the first transmission member 713b, and the third movable member 715 is provided with the left gear of the third transmission member 715b. Then, when the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 move, together with these, the rotation shaft (axis) of the right gear of the first transmission member 713b and the rotation shaft of the left gear of the third transmission member 715b ( The axis also moves. At this time, the left base tooth portion 711d with which the right gear of the first transmission member 713b meshes and the right base tooth portion 711d with which the left gear of the third transmission member 715b meshes are part of the base member 711. It is fixed. As a result, the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 move, and the gears of the first transmission member 713b and the third transmission member 715b rotate. That is, when the first movable member 713 and the third movable member 715 move, a driving force for rotating the gears of the first transmission member 713b and the third transmission member 715b is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the first movable member cover 713 c of the first movable member 713, the second movable member cover 714 b of the second movable member 714, the third movable member cover 715 c and the fourth movable member of the third movable member 715. The fourth movable member cover 716b 716 has a shape substantially the same as the shape of the half of the base front panel 711f of the base member 711, so that the base front panel 711f, the first movable member cover 713c, The movable body cover 714b, the third movable member cover 715c, and the fourth movable member cover 716b form a formed body having a predetermined shape (in the example shown in FIG. 19, a formed body having a hexagonal outer shape and a circular inner shape. ) Are integrally formed.

  The second movable accessory 710 includes a first movable member cover 713c of the first movable member 713, a second movable member cover 714b of the second movable member 714, a third movable member cover 715c of the third movable member 715, and a first movable member cover 715c. When the fourth movable member cover 716b of the fourth movable member 716 is moved to the driving position, the second movable member cover 714b of the second movable member 714, the fourth movable member cover 716b of the fourth movable member 716, When the end portions of each other are close to each other, a single component (in the example shown in FIG. 19, a component having a hexagonal outer shape and a circular inner shape) is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, the end portions of the second movable member cover 714b of the second movable member 714 and the fourth movable member cover 716b of the fourth movable member 716 are close to each other. Including the case where the ends of the cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b contact each other, and when the second movable member cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b exist at a short distance, the first from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the second movable member cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b are visually recognized, the second movable member cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b overlap in the front-rear direction, or the second movable member cover 714b. And the fourth movable member cover 716b are close (or in contact) in the front-rear, top-bottom, and left-right directions. Further, when the second movable member cover 714b and the fourth movable member cover 716b come close to each other, the second movable accessory 710 has a hexagonal outer shape as an example as shown in FIG. Although it has a circular inner shape, the player can visually recognize the display area 13a (see FIG. 3) through the inner side of the circular inner shape. The circular inner shape and the display in the display area 13a Are linked (for example, characters, characters, images, etc. are displayed in the area of the display area 13a visible through the inner side of the circular inner shape), and the movable member of the player and the display area You may make it improve the interest with respect to the direction performed. Further, the hexagonal outer shape and the circular inner shape are each handled as one component, and the display linked to the hexagonal outer shape is displayed in the display area 13a, and the display linked to the circular inner shape is displayed. It can also be performed in the display area 13a. In addition, the shape of the completed state of the 2nd movable accessory 710 is not limited to hexagon shape, It can be set as arbitrary shapes if it is a shape which forms cyclic | annular form, square shape, and another one structure.

  Further, when the motor 712 is rotated in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise) by the control of the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) in the driving position shown in FIG. Is rotated to the initial position shown in FIG.

  According to the second movable accessory 710 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following effects can be obtained. According to the second movable accessory 710, the driving force for rotating the first movable member 713 is generated from the motor 712. On the other hand, the driving force for rotating the second movable member 714 is such that the meshing position of the first transmission member 713b and the base tooth portion 711d of the base member 711 moves with the rotation of the first movable member main body 713a. Caused by.

  As described above, the driving force for rotating the first movable member 713 and the second movable member 714 is not simply generated from the motor 712 but also the places where the driving force is generated are different from each other. Therefore, for example, the driving mode of the first movable member 713 can be determined by the motor 712, and the driving mode of the second movable member 714 can be determined by the base member 711. For example, two movable members can be driven by one driving unit. The member can be driven in different modes.

  Accordingly, the first movable member 713 and the second movable member 714 are rotated by driving forces that are different from each other while interlocking. For this reason, it is possible to diversify the variation of the operation of the movable accessory consisting of a plurality of movable members, and to give each movable member an individual effect, and to synergistically enhance the effect. Therefore, even when a plurality of movable members are interlocked, it is possible to enhance the individual effect of each movable member and improve the interest of the player.

  Further, the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 move to the driving position, so that the base member 711, the first movable member 713, and the second movable member 714 are moved. The formed body having a predetermined shape is integrally formed by the third movable member 715 and the fourth movable member 716. As a result, the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 can be operated in a variety of ways while being interlocked, and at the drive position. Thus, it becomes possible to form a predetermined shape to obtain a completed state. Therefore, it is possible to give each movable member an individual production effect, and to synergistically enhance the production effect, and to improve the production effect as the entire movable accessory.

  Further, the end of the second movable member 714 pivotally supported by the first movable member 713 and the end of the fourth movable member 716 pivotally supported by the third movable member 715 are close to each other at the driving position. The base member 711, the first movable member 713, the second movable member 714, the third movable member 715, and the fourth movable member 716 are in a completed state in which one component is formed. Accordingly, it is possible to individually rotate the plurality of movable members to the driving position and form a structure in which all of the movable members are connected at the driving position. Therefore, it is possible to give each movable member an individual effect and synergistically enhance the effect, and further improve the effect as a whole movable accessory.

(Third movable accessory of modification 1)
FIG. 20 is a front view of the third movable accessory and the fourth movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. As viewed from the front side, the third movable accessory is the upper left third movable accessory 720 disposed at the upper left, the upper right third movable accessory 730 disposed at the upper right, and the lower left third movable movable disposed at the lower left. An accessory 740, and a lower right third movable accessory 750 arranged at the lower right. FIG. 20 shows a state before driving the upper left third movable accessory 720, the upper right third movable accessory 730, the lower left third movable accessory 740, the lower right third movable accessory 750, and the fourth movable accessory 760 (standby). Position). FIGS. 21 to 23 are diagrams illustrating the configuration of the upper left third movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the upper left third movable accessory 720 as viewed from the back side, and FIGS. 22 and 23 are rear views of the upper left third movable accessory 720. FIG. 22 shows a state (standby position) before the upper left third movable accessory 720 is driven, and FIG. 23 shows a state after the upper left third movable accessory 720 is driven (drive position). 22 and 23, the illustration of the flat cable 728 is omitted for ease of understanding, and only the outer shape of the arm member 723 is shown. Of the outer shape of the arm member 723, a back surface is provided by the base member 721. The part that cannot be seen from the side is indicated by a dotted line.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the upper left third movable accessory 720 includes a base member 721 as a first member, a motor 722, an arm member 723 as a second member, a first connecting member 724, and a rotating member. 725.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the base member 721 is fixed to the rear box 700 (see FIG. 8), and the motor 722 is attached. In addition, the base member 721 is driven by the motor 722, and a plurality of base rotation portions 721a that rotate at positions away from the rotation shaft 722a of the motor 722 by a predetermined dimension, and a plurality of protrusions in the radial direction along the arc-shaped outer edge. The base tooth part 721b in which the teeth are arranged and the position detection part 721c for detecting the state of the base rotation part 721a at the standby position are provided.

  The base rotation unit 721a has a detection piece 721a 'detected by the position detection unit 721c at the standby position. The position detection unit 721c is configured by, for example, a photosensor, and detects the detection piece 721a ′ of the base rotation unit 721a. When the detection is detected, for example, the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) to be described later 3 A standby position signal indicating that the movable accessory is in the standby position is transmitted. The position detection unit 721c is provided only at a position where the detection piece 721a 'is detected at the standby position, but may be provided at a position where the detection piece 721a' is detected at the driving position. When the position detection unit 721c provided at this position detects the detection piece 721a ′, for example, the sub-control circuit 200 described later outputs a drive position signal indicating that the third movable accessory is at the drive position. Send.

  The motor 722 is an example of a driving unit, is attached to the base member 721, and is driven and controlled by a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later.

  The arm member 723 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is pivotally supported by the base member 721 so as to be rotatable around a predetermined position 723a in the vicinity of the vertex of the substantially square shape. Further, the arm member 723 extends from the base end toward the predetermined position 723a on the base end side from the predetermined position 723a, and an engagement groove 723b in which the base rotating portion 721a of the base member 721 is slidably engaged, And a magnet 723c for attracting an abutting member 726b of a second connecting member 726, which will be described later, on the tip side from the position 723a. Further, when the base rotation portion 721a is rotated by driving the motor 722, the arm member 723 rotates while sliding on the engagement groove 723b so that the base rotation portion 721a rotates around the predetermined position 723a. Rotate. In other words, the arm member 723 is pivotally supported by the base member 721 so as to be rotatable around the predetermined position 723 a and is rotated by driving of the motor 722.

  The first connecting member 724 is pivotally supported by the arm member 723 so as to be rotatable. Further, the first connecting member 724 is fixed to the first gear 724a meshed with the base tooth portion 721b of the base member 721, and fixed to the first gear 724a, meshed with the second connecting member 726 described later, and the first gear 724a A second gear 724b having the same axis. The first connecting member 724 rotates by rotating the arm member 723 so that the contact position of the first connecting member 724 engaged with the base tooth portion 721b of the base member 721 moves. The second gear 724b is not limited to being configured to be fixed to the first gear 724a, and may be fixed to any of the first connecting members 724, or may be formed integrally with the first gear 724a. Also good.

  The rotation member 725 is pivotally supported by the arm member 723, rotates around a predetermined position 723a, and rotates around a specific position 725a that is a predetermined distance away from the predetermined position 723a. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the rotating member 725 includes a second connecting member 726, an electric decoration body 727 which is an example of a decorative member, and a flat cable 728 as a connecting member.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the second connecting member 726 is pivotally supported by the arm member 723, and rotates about the predetermined position 723 a according to the rotation of the arm member 723, and the first connecting member 726. It meshes with the member 724 and rotates around the specific position 725a as the first connecting member 724 rotates.

  The second connecting member 726 includes a second connecting member main body 726a, an abutting member 726b, an accommodating portion 726c, and a locking portion 726d. The second connecting member main body 726a is constituted by a gear and meshes with the second gear 724b of the first connecting member 724. The abutting member 726b is formed on the periphery of the second connecting member main body 726a, is formed of a ferromagnetic material, and is attracted and joined to the magnet 723c in the vicinity of the magnet 723c of the arm member 723. The second connecting member 726 is provided with a magnet 723c instead of the abutting member 726b formed of a ferromagnetic material, and the arm member 723 includes an abutting member 726b formed of a ferromagnetic material instead of the magnet 723c. It may be provided. The contact member 726b is not limited to a ferromagnetic material, and may be formed of a magnet having a polarity that attracts the magnet 723c.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the second connection member of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. The accommodating portion 726c is formed in a cylindrical shape standing on the back side of the second connecting member main body 726a, and accommodates a tape measure portion 728a of a flat cable 728 described later. The locking portion 726d is a hole formed in the second connecting member main body 726a inside the accommodating portion 726c, and one end side of a later-described tape measure portion 728a accommodated inside the accommodating portion 726c is changed from the back side to the front side. While allowing penetration, one end of the tape measure 728a is locked.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the electrical decoration body 727 is attached to the front surface side of the second connecting member 726 and includes a decorative member 727 a and an electrical decoration substrate 727 b. The decorative member 727a is formed in a predetermined shape (for example, a shape obtained by dividing a donut shape into four parts. The electric decoration board 727b is provided on the back side of the decorative member 727a, and a flat cable 728 described later is connected thereto. The decorative member 727a can emit light in a predetermined manner under the control of a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later via 728.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the flat cable 728 has one end connected to the electrical decoration body 727 via the second connecting member 726 and the other end connected to the sub-control circuit 200 (described later) via various relay boards. )It is connected to the. As shown in FIG. 24, the flat cable 728 is wound around one end side around a specific position 725a and formed into a tape measure shape so as to be elastically changeable, and the winding direction (the direction in which the second connecting member 726 rotates). ) Is provided with a tape measure 728a having an urging force to. The tape measure 728a is accommodated in the accommodating portion 726c of the second connecting member 726, and one end thereof extends from the locking portion 726d to the front side and is connected to the electric decoration board 727b (see FIG. 22).

  Next, the operation of the upper left third movable accessory 720 will be described. The sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) rotates the motor 722 from the standby position shown in FIG. 22 in a predetermined direction to a driving position by rotating the motor 722 in a predetermined direction from the standby position shown in FIG. Rotate to the state shown in FIG. The sub-control circuit 200 moves the motor 722 in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction until the detection piece 721a ′ is detected from the position detection unit 721c and the standby position signal is transmitted from the drive position to the upper left third movable accessory 720. To rotate to the standby position.

  Specifically, when the motor 722 rotates in a predetermined direction under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) in the standby position shown in FIG. The moving part 721a rotates while sliding on the engaging groove 723b of the arm member 723, and the arm member 723 rotates about the predetermined position 723a accordingly.

  Then, the 1st connection member 724 which meshes with the base tooth part 721b of the base member 721 also rotates. The rotating member 725 that meshes with the first connecting member 724 rotates around the arm member 723 and the predetermined position 723a, and rotates around the predetermined position 723a around the specific position 725a. It rotates in the opposite direction. As described above, the second connecting member 726 of the rotation member 725 rotates from the standby position where rotation starts to the drive position where rotation ends, in rotation about the specific position 725a. It will be in the state shown. Note that the rotation member 725 may stop rotating immediately before the contact member 726b contacts the magnet 723c of the arm member 723 at the drive position by drive control of a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. Alternatively, the rotation may be stopped by bringing the contact member 726b into contact with the magnet 723c of the arm member 723 at the driving position. The contact member 726b can be biased by a magnetic force in the direction of the driving position by the magnet 723c in the vicinity of the driving position. At this time, the tape measure 728a (see FIG. 24) of the flat cable 728 is elastically deformed in the winding direction inside the accommodating portion 726c of the second connection member 726, so that the locking portion of the second connection member 726 is obtained. The rotating member 725 is urged toward the standby position via 726d. In the present embodiment, being energized by magnetic force means that members are attracted to each other by magnetic force, or as a result of attractive force acting on the member, the dynamic energy of the member temporarily increases (or decreases in dynamic energy). In the case of reduction). As a result, when the distance between the members is close to the distance affected by the magnetic force, the movement speed of the members is increased (lowering of the movement speed is reduced) than when these members are not affected by the magnetic force. The increase in the acceleration of the member (including the case where the decrease in the acceleration is reduced) can be considered. In addition, for example, it is considered that the member can be prevented from moving in an unintended direction due to backlash (for example, when moving from the standby position to the drive position when moving to the standby position). Can do.

  The upper right third movable accessory 730, the lower left third movable accessory 740, and the lower right third movable accessory 750 have the same configuration and operate in the same manner, although their directions are different from those of the upper left third movable accessory 720. The description is omitted.

  The upper left third movable accessory 720 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 as described above has the following operational effects. According to the upper left third movable accessory 720, the arm member 723 is rotated when the motor 722 is driven, and the arm member 723 is rotated so that the rotation member 725 is centered on the specific position 725a from the standby position. Rotate to drive position. For example, the arm member 723 or the like is provided with the magnet 723c with which the contact member 726b of the second connection member 726 contacts in the driving position, and the contact member 726b is formed of a ferromagnetic material, so that the second connection member 726 is in the standby position. In this case, the contact member 726b is not biased by maintaining a certain distance between the magnet 723c and the contact member 726b. On the other hand, when the second connecting member 726 is rotated to the drive position, the magnet 723c and the contact member 726b come close to or come into contact with each other, whereby the accessory can be urged by attractive force (magnetic force).

  Thus, the rotation member 725 is provided by providing the second connecting member 726 for rotating the movable rotation member 725 with the contact member 726b biased by a magnetic force at the drive position where the rotation ends. Even when such an accessory is driven alone, the state after the operation can be easily stabilized. Therefore, the state after the operation of the accessory can be easily stabilized by the configuration capable of fixing the operating accessory.

  Further, the tape measure 728a of the flat cable 728 is elastically deformed in the winding direction inside the accommodating portion 726c of the second connecting member 726, and the second connecting member is interposed via the locking portion 726d by the elastic force of the flat cable 728. By urging 726 in the direction of the standby position, the movable speed of the second connecting member 726 can be increased, and the second connecting member 726 is used as the storage position of the flat cable 728. Space can be achieved.

  Further, in the rotating member 725, a tape measure 728 a is formed on the flat cable 728 connected to the electric decoration body 727 attached to the second connecting member 726, and one end of the tape measure 728 a is the second connecting member 726. The second connecting member 726 is stopped by biasing the second connecting member 726 in the direction of the standby position via the locking portion 726d locked by the biasing force in the winding direction inside the housing portion 726c. When it does, it becomes possible to reduce the fine movement of the rotation member 725 resulting from a backlash.

  Further, when the second connecting member 726 is rotated to the driving position, the magnet 723c and the abutting member 726b come close to or abut with each other, so that the accessory is urged by attractive force (magnetic force). Even if the position detection sensor for detecting the state of the object is not provided, for example, even when the motor 722 rotates excessively or when the rotation is insufficient, the accessory can be arranged at an appropriate driving position.

(Third movable accessory of modification 2)
Next, a second modification of the first embodiment will be described. Modification 2 is different from Modification 1 in the configuration of the third movable accessory. In the following description of the second modification, the same components as those in the first modification are given the same reference numerals as necessary, and the description thereof is simplified or omitted. The third movable combination of the second modification differs from the third movable combination of the first modification in the configuration of the arm member and further includes a third connecting member. Further, the third movable combination of the second modification is similar to the third movable combination of the first modification, the upper left third movable combination, the upper right third movable combination, the lower left third movable combination and the lower right third combination. Although three movable combinations are provided, these have different configurations, but have the same configuration and operate in the same manner. Therefore, description thereof is omitted, and only the upper left third movable combination is described.

  25 to 27 are diagrams illustrating the configuration of the upper left third movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. 25 to 27 are front views of the upper left third movable accessory 820. FIG. 25 shows a state (standby position) before driving the upper left third movable accessory 820, and FIG. 26 shows a state (intermediate position) while the upper left third movable accessory 820 is driven. Indicates the state (drive position) after the upper left third movable accessory 820 is driven. 25 to 27, for ease of understanding, the second arm member 832 shows an outer frame with the front side cover omitted, and the first arm member 831 can be seen from the front side by the base member 721. In the non-existing portion, the outer shape is indicated by a dotted line, and an electric decoration body 727 as an example of a decorative member indicates only the outer shape by a dotted line.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the upper left third movable accessory 820 includes a base member 721 as a first member, a motor 722, an arm member 830 as a second member, a first connecting member 724, and a rotating member. 725 and a third connecting member 840. Since the base member 721, the motor 722, the first connecting member 724, and the rotating member 725 have the same configuration as that of the first modification, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The arm member 830 includes a first arm member 831 as a first arm member and a second arm member 832 as a second arm member. The first arm member 831 is formed in a substantially U-shape, and is pivotally supported by the base member 721 so as to be rotatable around a predetermined position 723a in the vicinity of the apex of the substantially U-shape. Further, the first arm member 831 extends from the base end toward the predetermined position 723a on the base end side from the predetermined position 723a, and has an engagement groove 723b in which the base rotating portion 721a of the base member 721 is slidably engaged. Prepare. The first arm member 831 has a distal end that is open on the distal end side from the predetermined position 723a, and slidably holds the second arm member 832 that slides in a direction protruding from the distal end. In addition, when the base rotating portion 721a is rotated by driving the motor 722, the first arm member 831 is rotated while sliding on the engaging groove 723b so that the predetermined position 723a is set. Rotate to the center. In other words, the arm member 830 is pivotally supported by the base member 721 so as to be rotatable around the predetermined position 723 a and is rotated by driving the motor 722.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the arm member of the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 28A is a cross-sectional view along AA ′ in FIG. 25, and FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view along BB ′ in FIG. 27.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the first arm member 831 extends in a direction in which a second arm member 832 (described later) slides and ends with the end of the rotating shaft 726 e of the second connecting member 726 that slides together with the second arm member 832. And a slide groove 831a that is slidably engaged. The slide groove 831a has a length that is approximately the same as the distance that the second arm member 832 can slide, and a height that is approximately the same as the diameter of the rotation shaft 726e of the second connecting member 726. Is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the second arm member 832 is slidably engaged with the first arm member 831 and pivotally supports the second connecting member 726 of the rotating member 725. The second arm member 832 includes a magnet 723c that pulls the abutting member 726b of the second connecting member 726, and a fourth connecting member 835 that can mesh with a third connecting member 840 described later.

  The fourth connecting member 835 faces the end surface of the third connecting member 840, and a plurality of teeth formed on the end surface of the third connecting member 840 can mesh with a surface extending in the direction in which the second arm member 832 slides. The teeth are formed.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the third connecting member of the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. The third connecting member 840 is attached to the front side of the second gear 724 b of the first connecting member 724 and rotates as the first connecting member 724 rotates. In the third connecting member 840, a plurality of teeth are formed on the disk-shaped end surface, the meshing region 841 meshing with the fourth connecting member 835, and the teeth are not formed on the disk-shaped end surface. A non-contact region 842 that does not come into contact with.

  Next, the operation of the upper left third movable accessory 820 will be described. When the motor 722 rotates in a predetermined direction under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) in the standby position where the upper left third movable accessory 820 starts rotating as shown in FIG. It rotates around the position 723a.

  Then, the 1st connection member 724 which meshes with the base tooth part 721b of the base member 721 also rotates. At this time, the third connection member 840 attached to the first connection member 724 also rotates. However, since the non-contact region 842 is close to the fourth connection member 835 of the second arm member 832, the third connection member 840 is rotated. The member 840 and the fourth connecting member 835 do not mesh with each other. The rotating member 725 that meshes with the first connecting member 724 rotates around the arm member 830 and the predetermined position 723a, and rotates around the predetermined position 723a around the specific position 725a. It rotates in the opposite direction. As described above, the second connecting member 726 of the rotating member 725 rotates from the standby position where the rotation starts to the intermediate position where the rotation ends in the rotation around the specific position 725a. It will be in the state shown. The rotation of the rotation member 725 about the specific position 725a stops when the contact member 726b contacts the magnet 723c of the second arm member 832 at this intermediate position. The rotation member 725 stops the rotation immediately before the contact member 726b contacts the magnet 723c of the second arm member 832 at the intermediate position by drive control by a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. Alternatively, the rotation may be stopped when the contact member 726b contacts the magnet 723c of the second arm member 832 at the intermediate position.

  When the upper left third movable accessory 820 is in the state shown in FIG. 26, the meshing region 841 of the third connecting member 840 is close to the fourth connecting member 835 of the second arm member 832, and the third connecting member 840 The fourth connecting member 835 meshes, and the arm member 830 rotates around the predetermined position 723a.

  Then, the third connecting member 840 rotates together with the first connecting member 724 while meshing with the fourth connecting member 835, and the second arm member 832 is slid in the direction protruding from the tip of the first arm member 831. The state shown in FIG. 27 is obtained. That is, the second arm member 832 is configured such that the third connecting member 840 meshes with the fourth connecting member 835 after the rotating member 725 including the electric decoration body 727 is rotated by the rotation of the second connecting member 726 from the standby position. Then, as the third connecting member 840 rotates, the third connecting member 840 slides in a direction extending from the distal end side of the first arm member 831. Further, the electric decoration body 727 slides in a direction in which the second arm member 832 extends from the distal end side of the first arm member 831, so that the other member (for example, a decoration member of the upper right third movable accessory) Touchable.

  According to the upper left third movable accessory 820 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the first embodiment as described above, the following operational effects are obtained. According to the upper left third movable accessory 820, the electric decoration body 727 is rotated by the rotation of the second connecting member 726 from the standby position, and then the third connecting member 840 is the fourth connecting member of the second arm member 832. By meshing with 835, the first connecting member 724 and the third connecting member 840 are rotated by the rotation of the first arm member 831, and the second arm member 832 is slid in the extending direction, and the other members It becomes possible to contact. Thus, after performing the effect of rotating the electric decoration body 727, the electric decoration body 727 is slid and moved to be able to come into contact with other members. It can be brought into contact with other members slowly. Therefore, it is possible to avoid damage to the movable accessory due to contact with other members.

In addition, a plurality of movable accessories provided with such an electric decoration body are provided (the upper left third movable accessory, the upper right third movable accessory, the lower left third movable accessory and the lower right third movable accessory), and these are linked. Since it was made to rotate, after rotating the electrical decoration body of a some movable accessory, respectively, it becomes possible to move to the direction where each 2nd arm member is extended, and to make electrical decoration bodies contact | abut. As a result, when a plurality of electrical ornaments that do not form one design when rotating, move in the extending direction of each second arm member, they contact each other to form one design. Since it becomes possible to produce an effect, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the movement of the electric ornament and improve the expression of the electric ornament.
Therefore, when the movable accessory is driven and brought into contact with another member, it is possible to improve the effect of the movable accessory while avoiding damage to the movable accessory due to contact.

  Further, when the second arm member 832 slides, the end of the rotation shaft 726e of the second connecting member 726 slides while engaging the slide groove 831a, so that the slide groove serves as a guide, and the second connection It is possible to suppress the swing of the electric decoration body 727 attached to the member 726 and move it smoothly.

(4th movable character)
FIG.30 and FIG.31 is a figure explaining the structure of the 4th movable accessory of the pachinko game machine which concerns on the modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of this invention. 30 and 31 are rear views of the fourth movable accessory 760. FIG. FIG. 30 shows a state before driving the fourth movable accessory 760 (standby position), and FIG. 31 shows a state after driving the fourth movable accessory 760 (drive position).

  As shown in FIG. 30, the fourth movable accessory 760 includes a base member 761, a motor 762, a first gear 763, a second gear 764, a relay member 765, an arm member 766, and a decoration portion 767. .

  The base member 761 is attached to the rear box 700 (see FIG. 8). The motor 762 is fixed to the front side of the base member 761 and is driven and controlled by a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33) described later. The first gear 763 is disposed on the back side of the base member 761 and rotates by driving the motor 762. The second gear 764 is disposed on the back side of the base member 761 and meshes with the first gear 763. One end of the relay member 765 is rotatably attached to the vicinity of the periphery of the second gear 764, and the other end is rotatably attached to the arm member 766.

  The arm member 766 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is pivotally supported by the base member 761 so as to be rotatable around a predetermined position 766a in the vicinity of the vertex of the substantially square shape. In addition, the arm member 766 has a proximal end side from a predetermined position 766a rotatably attached to the other end of the relay member 765, and a decorative portion 767 attached to a distal end side from the predetermined position 723a.

  The decoration portion 767 is attached to the distal end side of the arm member 766 and is formed in a predetermined shape (for example, a circular shape). For example, a character or character is displayed or an LED board is provided, and this LED board is used as a sub-control circuit. By controlling 200 (see FIG. 33), light can be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode. The decoration unit 767 includes a motor, and the decoration unit 767 is rotated by the control of the sub-control circuit 200. Further, another member is provided, and the other member is rotated on the front side of the decoration unit 767. You can also.

  Next, the operation of the fourth movable accessory 760 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 30 (standby position), the fourth movable accessory 760 is driven by the motor 762 under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 33). It is transmitted to the second gear 764 that meshes with the first gear 763. Then, one end of the relay member 765 that is rotatably attached to the vicinity of the periphery of the second gear 764 rotates, and the arm member 766 that is attached to the other end of the relay member 765 also rotates around the predetermined position 766a. . As a result, the decorative portion 767 attached to the distal end side of the arm member 766 is also rotated to be in the state (drive position) shown in FIG.

  Thereby, the effect that the decoration part 767 is rotationally moved in a predetermined direction becomes possible. Further, the arm member 766 is rotated by a relay member 765 that is rotatably attached to the vicinity of the periphery of the second gear 764 that rotates by obtaining a driving force. Thereby, for example, when there is no space in the arm member 766 for providing a gear that meshes with the second gear 764 that rotates by obtaining a driving force, or there is another member between the second gear 764 and the second gear 764. Even when the gear 764 cannot be engaged, the arm member 766 can be rotated.

  FIG. 32 is a front view of the third movable accessory and the fourth movable accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 32 shows the state after driving the upper left third movable accessory 720, the upper right third movable accessory 730, the lower left third movable accessory 740, the lower right third movable accessory 750, and the fourth movable accessory 760. Position). The upper left third movable combination 720, the upper right third movable combination 730, the lower left third movable combination 740, the lower right third movable combination 750, and the fourth movable combination 760 are sub-controlled from the state shown in FIG. Driven by drive control of the circuit 200 (see FIG. 33), the state shown in FIG. 32 is obtained.

  The upper left third movable combination 720, the upper right third movable combination 730, the lower left third movable combination 740, and the lower right third movable combination 750 are each formed into a shape obtained by dividing the donut shape into four at the driving position. A decorative member 727a of the upper left third movable accessory 720, a decorative member 737a of the upper right third movable accessory 730, a decorative member 747a of the lower left third movable accessory 740, and a decorative member 757a of the lower right third movable accessory 750. A formed body having a donut shape is integrally formed in contact with or adjacent to the decorative members adjacent to each other. Further, the fourth movable accessory 760 descends while rotating from above the circular decorative portion 767 and is arranged at the center of the formed body having a donut shape. In this way, by driving a plurality of movable actors and arranging them in an integrated or related manner in the driven state (drive position), it is possible to improve performance.

[Circuit configuration of pachinko machines]
Next, the configuration of various circuits included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main control circuit 70 that mainly controls game operations, a sub-control circuit 200 that controls performance operations according to the progress of the game, and mainly game balls. A payout control circuit 300 for performing control related to payout.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 70 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 71, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 72, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 73. The main control circuit 70 also includes a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, and a serial communication IC (Integrated Circuit) 76. As described above, in the first embodiment, the special symbol lottery process is performed when the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 is won, and this process is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as means (lottery means) for performing a lottery process for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player.

  A main ROM 72, a main RAM 73, a reset clock pulse generation circuit 74, an initial reset circuit 75, a serial communication IC 76, and the like are connected to the main CPU 71. The main ROM 72 stores various programs (see FIGS. 44 to 62) for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 71, various data tables (see FIGS. 37 and 38), and the like.

  The main CPU 71 executes various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 72. The main RAM 73 acts as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 71 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values necessary for the main CPU 71 for various processes.

  In the first embodiment, the main RAM 73 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 71, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable / writable storage medium. .

  The reset clock pulse generation circuit 74 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 milliseconds) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process to be described later. The initial reset circuit 75 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. Then, the serial communication IC 76 transmits a command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, various devices that operate according to the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70 are connected to the main control circuit 70.

  Specifically, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are connected to the main control circuit 70. Is done.

  Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol display device 61 performs operation control of variable symbol special display in the special symbol game based on the output signal. Do.

  The main control circuit 70 is connected to an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, a first big prize device solenoid 54b, a second big prize port solenoid 53b, and a V prize port solenoid 57b. Then, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a to bring the pair of blade-like members of the ordinary electric accessory 46 into an open state or a closed state.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the first big prize opening solenoid 54b and the second big prize opening solenoid 53b, respectively, so that the first big prize winning device 54 and the second big prize winning device 53 are opened or closed. To do.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the V winning opening solenoid 57b so that the V winning opening 57 is opened or closed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various switches and receives output signals from the various switches. Specifically, the main control circuit 70 includes count switches 53c, 54c, general winning ball switches 51a, 52a, a passing ball switch 43a, a first starting port winning ball switch 44a, and a second starting port winning ball switch 45a, V. The winning opening winning ball switch 57c and the backup clear switch 121 are connected.

  The count switch 54 c counts the game balls that have won the first big winning device 54, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The count switch 53c counts the game balls won in the second grand prize winning device 53, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70.

  The general winning ball switch 51 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins in the general winning port 51, and the general winning ball switch 52 a wins a game ball in the general winning port 52. In this case, a predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 70.

  The passing ball switch 43 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the ball passing detector 43. The first start port winning ball switch 44 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins the first start port 44.

  The second start opening winning ball switch 45 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball wins the second starting opening 45. Further, the backup clear switch 121 outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 when the backup data is cleared according to the operation of the manager of the game store or the like at the time of power interruption. .

  Further, a payout control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 70. Here, the main control circuit 70 determines the number of prize balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out via a prize ball case unit 170 described later on condition that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied.

  The main control circuit 70 for determining the number of winning balls constitutes a payout amount determining means. Note that a predetermined payout condition is that a game ball has won a prize at each of the above-mentioned various starting holes and various winning holes.

  Further, the main control circuit 70 transmits information including the number of prize balls determined as described above to the payout control circuit 300 as a prize ball control command. Therefore, the main control circuit 70 constitutes a signal transmission unit.

[Discharge control circuit]
The payout control circuit 300 includes a payout CPU 301, a ROM 302, and a RAM 303. The ROM 302 stores, for example, various programs (see FIGS. 83 to 90) for controlling a game ball payout operation by the prize ball case unit 170.

  The payout CPU 301 executes various processes in accordance with programs stored in the ROM 302. The RAM 303 functions as a temporary storage area when the payout CPU 301 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values necessary for the payout CPU 301 for various processes.

  In the first embodiment, the RAM 303 is used as the temporary storage area of the payout CPU 301. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable / writable storage medium.

  The payout control circuit 300 is connected with a prize ball case unit 170 for paying out game balls. Specifically, the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B, the payout motor 174, and the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B are connected to the payout control circuit 300, respectively.

  The first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B detect the game balls replenished in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B, and output a predetermined output signal indicating the result. Output to 300.

  The payout motor 174 is driven in accordance with a control signal from the payout CPU 301. The first and second counting switches 181A and 181B detect the game balls paid out to the first and second payout passages 180A and 180B by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, respectively, and indicate the results. A predetermined output signal is output to the payout control circuit 300.

  The payout control circuit 300 is connected to a payout state notification display device 178 and a lower pan full switch 179. As will be described in detail later, the payout state notification display device 178 is a display device for notifying the type of abnormality when an abnormality has occurred with respect to the payout of the game ball, and constitutes notification means.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the payout state notification display device 178 includes a 7-segment display, and is provided, for example, at a predetermined location on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that only the manager of the hall can see.

  When the game ball stored in the lower tray 22 becomes full, the lower tray full tank switch 179 detects this and outputs the result to the payout control circuit 300. When a signal indicating that the lower pan is full is input from the lower pan full switch 179, the payout control circuit 300 notifies the main control circuit 70 of the lower pan when the signal indicating that the lower pan is full is input. A signal indicating that the tank is full is output.

  Thus, the main control circuit 70 transmits an effect control command to the sub control circuit 200, and the sub control circuit 200 indicates that the lower plate 22 is full through the speaker 11, the lamp 18, the LED, and the liquid crystal display device 13. To let you know.

  Furthermore, the payout control circuit 300 is connected to a launching device 15 that launches a game ball, an external terminal board 140, and a card unit 150. In addition, a data display 141 is connected to the external terminal board 140, and a lending operation unit 151 is connected to the card unit 150.

  Here, the card unit 150 determines the number of rented balls, which is the number of game balls to be paid out via a request case unit 170 described later on condition that a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The card unit 150 that determines the number of rented balls constitutes a payout amount determining unit. The predetermined payout condition is that the lending operation unit 151 described above is operated.

  The payout control circuit 300 supplies power to the solenoid actuator of the launching device 15 according to the turning angle when the launching handle 25 is gripped by the player and is turned in the clockwise direction. Thereby, the launching device 15 performs control to launch the game ball.

  The external terminal board 140 is used to transmit data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in the hall (game hall). The data display 141 is installed, for example, as an incidental facility for a hall in the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and has a function for calling a hall attendant and a function for displaying the number of hits.

  When operated by the player, the lending operation unit 151 outputs a signal requesting lending of game balls to the card unit 150. When the card unit 150 receives a signal requesting lending of game balls from the lending operation unit 151, the card unit 150 transmits a lending ball control signal including information on the determined lending ball number to the payout control circuit 300. Accordingly, the card unit 150 constitutes a signal transmission unit.

  The payout control circuit 300 receives a winning ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and a lending ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 150, and transmits a predetermined signal to the winning ball case unit 170.

  Thereby, the prize ball case unit 170 pays out a game ball. As described above, the payout control circuit 300 that receives the winning ball control command and the lending ball control signal constitutes a signal receiving means.

  In the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 includes first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B, and first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B. The first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B and the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B are provided as functions of the payout CPU 301.

  The first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B are respectively obtained from initial values (“1950 times” in the first embodiment) set in the collateral ball monitoring initial setting process (see S309 and S312 in FIG. 83) described later. While the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B detect a game ball, the counter is decremented by “1” every time a predetermined time (“1 ms” in the first embodiment) elapses.

  In the first embodiment, countdown counters are used as the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B. However, countup counters may be used.

  Accordingly, the payout CPU 301 is provided on condition that the payout of the game ball is started by the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B and that the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B detect the game ball. The initial value (“1950 times in the first embodiment)” is incremented every time a predetermined time (“1 ms” in the first embodiment) elapses, that is, every time a system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) described later is performed. 1 "is subtracted, that is, updated.

  The payout CPU 301 that performs such updating constitutes a second updating means. The values updated by the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B can be set to values in a narrower range than the values updated by the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B described later. At the same time, it corresponds to the time during which the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B are detecting a game ball, and constitutes a second value.

  The first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B are predetermined from initial values (“2000 ms” in the first embodiment) set in the collateral ball monitoring initial setting process (see S309 and S312 in FIG. 83) described later. This is a timer to which “1” is subtracted every time (1 ms in the first embodiment) elapses. In the first embodiment, countdown timers are used as the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B. However, countup timers may be used.

  Therefore, the payout CPU 301 sets the initial value (“2000 ms” in the first embodiment) to a predetermined time (“1” in the first embodiment) on the condition that the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B start paying out the game balls. Every time 1 ms ") elapses, that is, every time a system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) described later is performed," 1 "is subtracted, that is, updated.

  Here, the initial value (“2000 ms” in the first embodiment) set in the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B described above is the time when the collateral of 15 game balls is assumed to be completed, that is, It is set to a time sufficient to pay out a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of game balls from the ball tank 161. The payout CPU 301 that performs such updating constitutes a first updating means. The values updated by the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B constitute a first value.

[Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 200 is connected to the serial communication IC 76 of the main control circuit 70. Then, the sub-control circuit 200 controls display on the liquid crystal display device 13, control related to sound generated from the speaker 11, control of the lamp 18 including a decoration lamp, etc. in accordance with various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70. I do.

  That is, the sub-control circuit 200 executes various effects according to the progress of the game based on the command from the main control circuit 70. In the first embodiment, a signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 70. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a signal can be transmitted from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 70. It may be provided with various configurations.

  The sub-control circuit 200 is also connected to an effect button switch 23 a that is connected to the effect button 23 and outputs a signal when the effect button 23 is operated. Thereby, the sub control circuit 200 can also perform production control such as a mini game using the production button 23, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, a sound control circuit 206, and a lamp control circuit 207. To the sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 205, an audio control circuit 206, and a lamp control circuit 207 are connected.

  The program ROM 202 stores various programs (see FIGS. 63 to 80) and various data tables (see FIGS. 39 to 43) for controlling the presentation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201. Then, the sub CPU 201 executes various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the entire sub control circuit 200 in accordance with various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

  In the first embodiment, the main ROM 72 and the program ROM 202 are applied as storage means for storing programs, various tables, and the like, but the present invention is not limited to this. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another aspect may be used as long as it is a computer-readable storage medium provided with a control means. For example, storage such as a hard disk device, a CDROM and a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, etc. Media may be applied.

  In addition, each program may be recorded on a separate storage medium. Furthermore, the program may be recorded in advance on a recording medium, or may be downloaded from the outside after power-on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like.

  The work RAM 203 acts as a temporary storage area when the sub CPU 201 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values necessary for the sub CPU 201 for various processes. In the first embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable / writable storage medium.

  The display control circuit 205 performs control to display an image related to the effect on the liquid crystal display device 13. Although not shown, the display control circuit 205 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP (Video Display Processor)), an image data ROM, a frame buffer, a D / A (Digital to Analog) converter, and the like.

  The image data ROM stores data for generating various image data. The frame buffer temporarily stores image data. The D / A converter converts image data (digital electric signal) into an image signal (analog electric signal).

The display control circuit 205 performs various processes for displaying an image on the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the display control circuit 205 temporarily stores image data such as decorative design image data, background image data, and presentation image data indicating a decorative design (production identification design) based on an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Is stored in the frame buffer.

  Then, the display control circuit 205 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal, and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 13 at a predetermined timing. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The audio control circuit 206 includes a sound source IC that performs control related to audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying an audio signal, and the like.

  The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 11. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM based on the sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  The sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the read audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies it to the AMP. In addition, the AMP amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speaker 11.

  The lamp control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a lamp data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp lighting patterns are stored, and the like. The drive circuit selects one lamp lighting pattern from a plurality of lamp lighting patterns stored in the lamp data ROM based on the lamp lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201.

  Then, the selected lamp lighting pattern is read from the lamp data ROM, the read sound data is converted into a predetermined lamp control signal, and the lamp 18 including the decoration lamp is turned on and off.

[Type of gaming state]
First, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine.

  In the first embodiment, the types of gaming states controlled and managed by the main CPU 71 include “big hit gaming state”, “small hit gaming state”, and “short-time gaming state”.

  The “hit game state” is a game state in which “hit game” is performed, and is a game state in which the shutter 54a of the first big prize winning device 54 opens and closes. That is, the “big hit game” is a game in which the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 opens and closes and a round game is performed a plurality of times. The “hit game” is performed by winning “hit” in the lottery performed by entering the first start port 44 or the second start port 45.

  When a game ball enters the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, each wins a “big hit” with a probability of 1/200 (see FIG. 34A). When winning a “hit”, it becomes a “hit game state”. As shown in FIG. 34 (c), when the “big hit” is won by entering the first starting port 44, 12 special drawings (1) -1 to 12 (1) -12 are displayed. Are classified into any one of the special figure types. Further, the special figure type when winning the “big hit” by entering the second starting port 45 is only the special figure (2) -1.

  The winning content of special figure (1) -1 and special figure (1) -2 is "short when there is a ball". The “big hit game” in this case has five round games. That is, an opening / closing operation is performed in which the shutter 54a is opened five times. The opening time of the shutter 54a per time is 27.996 seconds (see FIG. 34 (d)). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, the shutter 54a is closed when it is detected that ten game balls have entered the first grand prize winning device 54 (see FIG. 34A). 15 payouts per game ball entering the first grand prize device 54 are paid out.

  The expected value of Special Figure (1) -1 is 1%. That is, the probability that the hit type is the special figure (1) -1 when the big hit game is determined is 1%. The expected value of special figure (1) -2 is 44%. In addition, after the transition from the normal game and the “big hit game” of the special figure (1) -1 and the special figure (1) -2 are performed, the “short-time game” is performed. Here, the maximum number of times that the “short game” is played is 100 times. Although the details will be described later, the number of times that the “short-time game” is performed corresponds to the number of times that the special symbol variation display is executed. The presence / absence of “short-time game” after “big hit game” that has not shifted from “normal game” will be described later.

  Further, the hit content of special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7 is “short time when no balls appear”. The “big hit game” in this case has five round games. That is, an opening / closing operation is performed in which the shutter 54a is opened five times. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the opening time per one time of the shutter 54a is 0.102 seconds and the opening time is short, so that a game ball is placed in the first big winning device 54 in this “big hit game”. The possibility of entering is low. Therefore, it is unlikely that a game ball will enter the first big prize device 54 in this “hit game”, and the game ball is hardly paid out.

  The expected value of each of special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7 is 1%. In addition, after the transition from the normal game and the special game (1) -3 to the special game (1) -7 are performed, the “short-time game” is performed. Here, the maximum number of times that the “short game” is played is 100 times.

  In addition, the winning content of the special figure (1) -8 to the special figure (1) -12 is “normal without a ball”. The “big hit game” in this case has five round games. That is, an opening / closing operation is performed in which the shutter 54a is opened five times. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the opening time per one time of the shutter 54a is 0.102 seconds and the opening time is short, so that a game ball is placed in the first big winning device 54 in this “big hit game”. The possibility of entering is low. Therefore, it is unlikely that a game ball will enter the first big prize device 54 in this “hit game”, and the game ball is hardly paid out.

  The expected value of special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -11 is 12%, and the expected value of special figure (1) -12 is 2%. In addition, after the transition from the normal game and the special game (1) -8 through the special game (1) -12 are performed, the “short-time game” is not performed and the “normal game state” is obtained. Become.

  The winning content of Special Figure (2) -1 is “There is a ball”. The “big hit game” in this case has five round games. That is, an opening / closing operation is performed in which the shutter 54a is opened five times. The opening time of each shutter 54a is 27.996 seconds. However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, the shutter 54a is closed when it is detected that ten game balls have entered the first grand prize winning device 54 (see FIG. 34A). 15 payouts per game ball entering the first grand prize device 54 are paid out.

  The expected value of Special Figure (2) -1 is 100%. In other words, when the big hit game is determined by entering the second starting port 45, the special figure (2) -1 is always obtained. After the “big hit game” of the special figure (2) -1 is performed, the “time saving game” is performed. Here, the maximum number of times that the “short game” is played is 100 times.

  The “small hit game state” is a game state in which “small hit game” is performed, and is a game state in which the blade member 53a of the second big prize winning device 53 opens and closes. The “small hit game” is performed by winning “small hit” by a lottery performed when a game ball enters the second start opening 45. As described above, even if the ball enters the first start port 44, the “small hit” is not won.

  When a game ball enters the second start opening 45, it wins “small hit” with a probability of 199/200 (see FIG. 34 (a)). When “Small Bonus” is won, it becomes “Small Game State”. As shown in FIG. 34 (c), when “small hit” is won by entering the second starting port 45, the small hit (2) -1 to the small hit (2) -4 4 Sorted into one of the special figure types.

  The hit content of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2 is “16R per V”. In this case, the “small hit game” performs an opening / closing operation in which the blade member 53a is opened three times. The opening time of each blade member 53a is 1.5 seconds for the small hit (2) -1, and 1.2 seconds for the small hit (2) -2 (see FIG. 34 (d)). ). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, if it is detected that four game balls have entered the second grand prize winning device 53, the blade member 53a is closed and does not open (FIG. 34 (a)). reference). Further, when it is detected in the second grand prize winning device 53 that four game balls have been entered, even if the number of times of opening of the blade member 53a is not three, the blade member 53a is closed and does not open. . 15 payouts per game ball entering the second grand prize device 53 are made.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 57 of the second big winning device 53 in the “small hit game” of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2, it becomes “per V”. Sixteen rounds of “big hit game” will be played. However, in this case, since the opening / closing operation of the blade member 53a that triggered the entry to the V winning opening 57 is the first round, the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 after entering the V winning opening 57 Opens and closes 15 times. As described above, a game started by entering the V winning opening 57 is also referred to as a “hit game”. In this “big hit game”, the opening time of the shutter 54a per time is 27.996 seconds. However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, the shutter 54a is closed when it is detected that ten game balls have entered the first grand prize winning device 54. Then, 15 payouts per game ball entering the first grand prize device 54 are paid out.

  The expected value of small hits (2) -1 is 16%. That is, when the small hit game is determined, the probability of being a small hit (2) -1 is 16%. The expected value of small hit (2) -2 is 17%. In addition, after the “big hit game” of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2 is performed, the “short-time game” is performed. Here, the maximum number of times that the “short game” is played is 100 times. In addition, there is a case where the “short-time game” is not performed after the “big hit game” of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2, which will be described later.

  The hit contents of the small hit (2) -3 and the small hit (2) -4 are “2R per V”. In this case, the “small hit game” performs an opening / closing operation in which the blade member 53a is opened three times. The opening time of each blade member 53a is 1.5 seconds for the small hit (2) -3 and 1.2 seconds for the small hit (2) -4 (see FIG. 34 (d)). ). However, even if the opening time is shorter than this, if it is detected that four game balls have entered the second grand prize winning device 53, the blade member 53a is closed and does not open (FIG. 34 (a)). reference). 15 payouts per game ball entering the second grand prize device 53 are made.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the V winning opening 57 of the second big winning device 53 in the “small hit game” of the small hit (2) -3 and the small hit (2) -4, it becomes “per V”. Two rounds of “big hit game” will be held. However, in this case, since the ball entering the V winning opening 57 is the first round, after the ball entering the V winning opening 57, the shutter 54a of the first big winning device 54 is opened and closed once. As described above, a game started by entering the V winning opening 57 is also referred to as a “hit game”. This “big hit game” is different in the number of rounds from the “big hit game” of small hit (2) -1 and small hit (2) -2, but the opening time and the number of payouts are the same.

  The expected value of small hit (2) -3 is 33%. The expected value of small hit (2) -4 is 34%. In addition, after the “big hit game” of the small hit (2) -3 and the small hit (2) -4 is performed, the “time saving game” is performed. Here, the maximum number of times that the “short game” is played is 100 times.

“Time-short game state” is a game state in which “time-short game” is performed, and is a game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol is relatively high. That is, the “short-time gaming state” is a gaming state in which the ordinary electric accessory 46 provided in the second starting port 45 is likely to be in an open state (a gaming state in which a second starting port winning is likely to occur), This is an advantageous gaming state. The “short-time gaming state” is ended when the special symbol change display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment), when “per V” or when “big hit” is won. .
In the “short time gaming state”, not only the winning probability of the normal symbol is relatively high, but also the lottery time in the normal symbol game may be relatively short. Further, the opening time in the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory 46 may be relatively long.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), in the “short-time gaming state”, the winning probability of the normal symbol is high and is 256/256. In the first embodiment, the normal symbol lottery is performed with a high probability of 256/256 in the “short-time gaming state”. However, the normal symbol lottery is not performed and the lottery may always be won. Further, except for the “short-time gaming state”, the winning probability of the normal symbol is low, and 0/256, that is, the normal symbol is not won. In addition to the “short-time gaming state”, in the first embodiment, the normal symbol lottery is performed with a low probability of 0/256. However, the normal symbol lottery is not performed, and it may always be lost.

  Note that the “normal game state” is a game state in which “normal game” is performed, and is a game state that is not any of “big hit game state”, “small hit game state”, and “short-time game state”.

  Transition operations between the various gaming states described above are controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as a means for controlling the transition operation between various game states.

[Main control state transition]
The transition between the various game states described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the main control of the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when a game is started in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is normally performed in the “normal game state”. Here, each time the first start opening 44 is won, a special symbol lottery process for the first start opening 44 is performed. However, as described above, since the normal symbol is not won in the “normal game state”, the normal electric accessory 46 is not opened and the second start opening 45 is not won.

  If a “hit” is won when winning at the first start opening 44, the game shifts to “hit game state”. At this time, if the winning content is special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -12, the game shifts to “normal gaming state” after “big hit gaming state” (non-time-short big hit).

  In the “normal game state”, if the winning content is special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -7 when winning the first big opening 44 and winning “big hit”, After the “gaming state”, it shifts to the “time-short game state” (time-short hit). Specifically, when a game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, a normal symbol lottery process is performed. In the “short-time gaming state”, the normal symbol lottery is won with high probability, so that when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, the ordinary electric accessory 46 is opened. If the game ball wins the second start opening 45 when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in the open state, a special symbol lottery process for the second start opening 45 is performed.

  In the “short-time gaming state”, it is preferable for the player to pass the ball through the ball passage detector 43, so the player preferably performs “right-handed”. For this reason, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may perform an effect of prompting the player to “right-hand” with a display, a voice, or the like.

  If the “small hit” is won when winning the second start opening 45, the state shifts to the “small hit gaming state” and the opening / closing operation of the blade member 53a is performed. When the blade member 53a is in the open state, if the player wins the second grand prize winning device 53 and wins the V prize winning port 57, the state shifts to the “big hit gaming state”. Note that the number of round games varies depending on the winning content at this time. In the case of the small hit (2) -1 and the small hit (2) -2, the hit content is “16R per V”, and the blade member 53a in the second big prize winning device 53 when “per V” is reached. The open state is defined as one round, and 16 rounds of “big hit game” are executed including this round. Further, in the case of small hit (2) -3 and small hit (2) -4, the winning content is “2R per V”, and the blade in the second big prize winning device 53 when “per V” is reached. The member 53a is in an open state as one round, and this round includes two rounds. In general, the larger the number of rounds, the greater the number of game balls to be paid out, so for a player, “per hit” in “small hit” of “16R per V” It can be said that it is more advantageous than “per hit V” in “small hit” of 2R per hit.

  As will be described in detail later, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a round of “big hit game” that shifts to “per hit V” when winning “small hit” Inform about numbers. Accordingly, the player is paid out in the “hit game state” that shifts after “per hit V” by changing the shooting operation of the game ball such as so-called “stop hitting” along the notification content. Game balls can be increased.

  Here, in the case of a “time saving big hit” in the “normal gaming state”, the “time saving gaming state” and the “big hit gaming state” are alternately shifted a predetermined number of times. In the first embodiment, the “big hit gaming state” after the “normal gaming state”, the so-called “big hit gaming state” after the first hit, and the “short-time gaming state” and the “hit gaming state” are alternately repeated a predetermined number of times. Transition. In other words, “normal gaming state” → “hit gaming state” → “time saving gaming state” → “hit gaming state” → “time saving gaming state” → “hit gaming state” → “time saving gaming state” → “hit gaming state” → Transitions are made in the order of “normal game state”. However, in the transition of these gaming states, for example, when “small hit” is won in the “short-time gaming state”, the “small hit gaming state” is entered, but this “small hit gaming state” is omitted. ing. Note that the “big hit gaming state” other than the initial “big hit gaming state” is not necessarily triggered by “per V”. In other words, the “big hit gaming state” by “big hit” in the special figure (2) -1 shown in FIG. 34 is included, and for example, there is a possibility of shifting to the “big hit gaming state” by this “big hit” three times.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the time-hit big hit is made, in principle, four “hit-hit games” and three “time-hit games” are performed. Regardless of the winning content of the “Small Win” in the third “Short-Time Game State”, the “Short-Game Game State” is followed by the “Normal Game State” instead of the “Short-Time Game State” regardless of the winning content. . In addition, regardless of the winning content of the “small hit” in the first and second “short time gaming state”, after the “big hit gaming state”, the “short time gaming state” is followed.

  In the special symbol lottery of the second start opening 45, there is a case where “big hit” is won without winning “small hit”, but in that case, the game is shifted to “big hit gaming state”.

  Here, in the “short-time gaming state”, the player is likely to be “right-handed”, and is unlikely to win the first start port 44. However, when winning at the first start opening 44 and winning the “big hit”, the number of rounds and the opening time are determined according to the content of the win, and the “big hit game” is performed. In the first and second “Short-Time Game State” winnings of “Big Hit”, even if the winning content is Special Figure (1) -8 to Special Figure (1) -12, Will be in “short-time gaming state”. In addition, in the third “time saving game state”, when winning the first start opening 44 and winning “big hit”, regardless of the content of any win, after the “big hit gaming state”, “time reduction It is not “gaming state” but “normal gaming state”.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the set game is played when the time-saving big hit is made in the “normal game state”. However, while the “time-short game” is played 100 times in the “time-short game state”, “V If “win” is not made, the “time-saving gaming state” is shifted to the “normal gaming state”. However, in the first embodiment, it can be set by adjusting the opening timing of the movable member 57a of the V winning opening 57 when a game ball enters the second big winning device 53. Therefore, when the player performs a normal launch operation, there is a low possibility that “per V” will not be performed while the “short-time game” is performed 100 times. For example, the probability of entering the V winning opening 57 when entering the second grand prize winning device 53 may be about 2/3.
Specifically, the movable member 57a may perform an opening / closing operation until the blade member 53a of the second grand prize winning device 53 starts to open and closes. Then, by adjusting the timing at which the movable member 57a starts the opening operation, the opening time, and the like, the probability of entering the V winning opening 57 when entering the second large winning device 53 can be adjusted. . Thereby, this probability may be about 2/3. For example, the time during which the movable member 57a is open may be set to about 2/3 of the time during which the blade member 53a is open.

[Sub-control state transition]
The transition between the various game states described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a state transition diagram of sub-control of a pachinko gaming machine.

  Here, since the “big hit” in the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -2 triggers the transition to the “big hit gaming state” in which a game ball can be expected to be paid out, the display area 13a is displayed at this time. The displayed decorative pattern may be, for example, three identical numbers arranged. Thereby, it can be seen that the player also shifts to an advantageous gaming state. For this reason, the special bonus (1) -1 to special bonus (1) -2 “big hit” may be referred to as “symbol matching big hit”.

In addition, since the “big hit” in the special figure (1) -3 to the special figure (1) -12 triggers the transition to the “big hit game state” in which the game ball cannot be paid out, it is displayed in the display area 13a at this time. The decorative pattern to be displayed may be a sequence of different numbers. For this reason, the “big hit” in the special figure (1) -3 to the special figure (1) -12 may be referred to as “a big hit with no symbols”.
Note that the decorative symbol displayed in the display area 13a may be an aspect in which three symbols of the right symbol, the middle symbol, and the left symbol are arranged, and the special symbol (1) -3 to the special symbol (1) -12. In “big hit”, the right symbol and the left symbol may be the same symbol, and a special symbol may be displayed for the middle symbol. There may be a plurality of types of special symbols that are special symbols, and the effect of “big hit” may be different depending on the displayed middle symbols. And what is necessary is just to assume that the rush expectation degree to a "short-time game state" changes with the difference of these productions. In this case, if each of the special figures (1) -3 to (1) -12 is made different in the selection rate of the plurality of types of medium symbols, the short-term rushing expectation degree is made different. Good. For example, the middle symbol is a symbol that draws a fortune, and the fortune that comes out may suggest a shift to a short-time game.

  As described above, the first embodiment has a “normal game state”, a “hit game state”, and a “time-short game state”. As shown in FIG. 36, the “normal game state” and the “hit game state” can be transferred to each other, and the “hit game state” and the “short-time game state” can be transferred to each other. There is also a “small hit gaming state”, which is omitted here.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the “normal gaming state” includes “first high probability state”, “second high probability state”, “third high probability state”, and “fourth high probability state”. It is. The “normal gaming state” includes “normal gaming state (sub)” which is a state other than “first high probability state” to “fourth high probability state”. As described above, in the first embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, notification is made regarding the number of rounds of “big hit game” that is shifted to “per hit V” when “small hit” is won. . It is necessary to determine a notification mode such as whether to perform the notification or the number of notifications. And the alerting | reporting aspect determined in each of these "1st high probability state"-"4th high probability state" and "normal game state (sub)" differs.

  First, each of the “first high probability state” to the “fourth high probability state” will be described.

  In the “first high probability state”, when winning the “big hit” of the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -7 and moving to the set game, the three “ In all “short-time gaming state”, the number of rounds of “big hit game” to be transferred when “per win” is won when “small hit” is won. In other words, when a game ball wins the V winning opening 57, it is notified which of 16 rounds of “big hit game” or two rounds of “big hit game” is executed. It should be noted that when the set game ends and shifts to the “normal game state”, the “first high probability state” is entered. In addition, if you win the “big hit” in Special Figure (1) -8 to Special Figure (1) -12 and move to a single “Big Hit Game State” instead of a set game, ”Is ended and the“ normal gaming state ”is entered, the“ first high probability state ”is maintained.

  The “first high probability state” includes “normal gaming state” other than “third high probability state” and “fourth high probability state”, that is, “second high probability state” and “normal gaming state (sub)”. When the accumulated points reach 100 points according to the performance in the pachinko game (for example, according to the result of the mini game), the game shifts. Then, when 20 games are consumed in the “first high probability state”, the state shifts to the “second high probability state”. Specifically, in the “first high probability state”, when the special symbol variation display is performed 20 times, the state shifts to the “second high probability state”.

  The “second high probability state” is a state in which it is easy to shift to the “first high probability state”. In other words, the “second high probability state” is a gaming state in which points that trigger the transition to the “first high probability state” are easier to accumulate than other gaming states. In addition, if you win the “big hit” in Special Figure (1) -8 to Special Figure (1) -12 and move to a single “big hit gaming state” instead of a set game, When “” is finished and the state shifts to the “normal gaming state”, the state becomes the “first high probability state”.

  As described above, when 20 games are consumed in the “first high probability state”, the state shifts to the “second high probability state”. Further, when 10 games are consumed in the “second high probability state”, the game state shifts to a “normal gaming state (sub)” other than the “first high probability state” to the “fourth high probability state”.

In “normal gaming state” other than “first high probability state”, “third high probability state” and “fourth high probability state”, that is, “second high probability state” and “normal gaming state (sub)”, When winning the “big hit” in FIG. (1) -1 and shifting to a set game, all three “short-time game states” executed in the set game will receive “ The number of rounds of “big hit game” to be transferred when “per V” is notified. In addition, when winning the “big hit” in the special figure (1) -2 to the special figure (1) -7 and shifting to the set game, the number of rounds to be notified is determined by lottery. This lottery will be described later. It should be noted that when the set game ends and shifts to the “normal game state”, the “first high probability state” is entered. In addition, if you win the “big hit” in Special Figure (1) -8 to Special Figure (1) -12 and move to a single “Big Hit Game State” instead of a set game, When “” is finished and the state shifts to the “normal gaming state”, the state becomes the “first high probability state”.

  The “third high probability state” is a gaming state (ceiling state) for activating a so-called ceiling function. The ceiling function is to give a privilege advantageous to the player on condition that the disadvantageous state continues for the player. Specifically, in the “third high probability state”, when the “big hit” of the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -7 is won and the set game is started, the game is executed in the set game. In all three “time-short game states”, the number of “big hit games” rounds to be transferred when “per win” is won when “small hit” is won. After this set game is finished, the state shifts to the “first high probability state”. Furthermore, in the “third high probability state”, the “big hit” of the special figure (1) -8 to the special figure (1) -12 is won, and it is shifted to the “big hit game state” only once instead of the set game. In this case, when the “big hit gaming state” ends and the state shifts to the “normal gaming state”, the “third high probability state” is maintained. The “third high probability state” is maintained until winning the “big hit” in the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -7 and shifting to the set game.

  As described above, the “third high probability state” is a gaming state for activating the ceiling function. When a state where a “hit” is not reached even if a game ball enters the first start port 44 continues, the state shifts to a “third high probability state”. In the first embodiment, even if a game ball enters the first start port 44, the state where the game is not a “hit” is 111 games, 222 games, 333 games, 444 games, 555 games, 666 games, 777 games, and 888 games. When the 999 game is continued, the sub CPU 201 performs the ceiling lottery every time, and when winning, the process shifts to the “third high probability state”. Details of the ceiling lottery will be described later.

  Even after the transition to the “third high probability state” which is the ceiling state, the state where the “big hit” in the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -7 is not won is 111 games, 222 games, When the 333 game, the 444 game, the 555 game, the 666 game, the 777 game, the 888 game, and the 999 game are continued, the sub CPU 201 may perform a lottery on the ceiling each time. And when winning, what is necessary is just to be able to accumulate | store and memorize | store a "3rd high probability state". That is, when a plurality of “third high probability states” are stored, the “big hit” in the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -7 is won and executed three times in the set game. In all of the “Short-Time Game State”, when the “Small Bonus” is won, the “Big Hit Game” round number notification that is transferred when “Per V” is transferred, and the “3rd High Probability State” is stored. It may be possible to do as many times as possible. That is, when the “third high probability state” is accumulated and stored, the “third high probability state” is stored again and the “third high probability state” is transferred again after the set game is completed.

  In addition, after the transition to the “third high probability state” which is the ceiling state, the number of games that are not won the “big hit” in the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -7 is counted, and the notification is made. When the transition from the “third high probability state” to the “normal game state” is performed, when the counting of the number of games serving as the reference for the ceiling lottery is started again, after the transition to the “third high probability state”, The number of games may be counted by adding the number of games.

  The “fourth high probability state” is for giving a privilege (all day navigation) advantageous to the player all day. Specifically, in the “fourth high probability state”, when the special game (1) -1 to the special game (1) -7 win the “big hit” and shift to the set game, the game is executed in the set game. In all three “time-short game states”, the number of “big hit games” rounds to be transferred when “per win” is won when “small hit” is won.

  In the “fourth high probability state”, the “fourth high probability state” is maintained when the set game is ended and when the “big hit gaming state” that does not shift to the “short-time gaming state” is ended. Is done. As described above, when the state shifts to the “fourth high probability state”, the “fourth high probability state” is maintained. As long as the work RAM 203 is not cleared, the “fourth high probability state” is maintained. In this way, in the “fourth high probability state”, notification is made in all three “time-short game states” executed in the set game, and the “fourth high probability state” remains until the work RAM 203 is cleared. Therefore, the notification in the set game continues until the store is closed. Therefore, the notification in the “fourth high probability state” is referred to as “all day navigation”.

The work RAM 203 is cleared by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while pressing the backup switch. The work RAM 203 is not cleared simply by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, due to some error, the work RAM 203 is not cleared even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off, and the “fourth high probability state” is maintained. Normally, the work RAM 203 is not cleared during the business hours of the hall.
Here, when the work RAM 203 is cleared, the RAM clear flag is set. If the first hit after the RAM clear flag is set is “big hit” in the special figure (1) -12, the probability is 1/1. Wins the “fourth high probability state” and shifts to the “fourth high probability state”. In addition, the RAM clear flag is turned OFF regardless of the first hit after the RAM clear flag is set. If the subsequent hit becomes the “big hit” in the special figure (1) -12, the “fourth high probability state” is won with a probability of 1/10, and the state shifts to the “fourth high probability state”.
As described above, in order to shift to the “fourth high probability state”, it is a condition that the work RAM 203 is cleared. However, the work RAM 203 is not cleared and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is simply turned off from the power source. It may be conditional on being turned on. In other words, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, if the first hit is the “big hit” of the special figure (1) -12, the “fourth high probability state” is won with a probability of 1/1, It is good also as shifting to "the 4th high probability state". Note that the power ON flag may be set when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned ON. Then, regardless of the first hit after the power ON flag is set, the power ON flag is turned OFF. If the hit after that is a “big hit” in the special figure (1) -12, win the “fourth high probability state” with a probability of 1/10 and move to the “fourth high probability state” It is good. In this case, the “fourth high probability state” may be maintained until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. In the special figure (1) -12, when the “big hit” is selected, the “fourth high probability state” is selected with the probability of 1/1 or the probability of 1/10. The type of winning and the probability of winning can be set as appropriate.

  Next, the transition between the “normal game state” and the “hit game state” will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the “normal game state”, when “winning a symbol match” (first big hit state) is won, and when “winning not a symbol match” (first big hit state) is won, Transition to the “hit game state”. In addition, when winning “Pattern Match”, the game shifts to a “round hit game state” of 5 rounds in which game balls can be expected to be paid out. It shifts to the round “big hit game state” (second big hit state).

  From the “normal gaming state” other than the “fourth high probability state”, that is, from the “first high probability state” to the “third high probability state” and the “normal gaming state (sub)”, the special figure (1) -1 ~ Special figure (1) If it is a “big hit” of 7-7, the set game is executed, and after this set game is finished, it shifts to the “first high probability state”.

  Further, from “normal gaming state” other than “third high probability state” and “fourth high probability state”, that is, “first high probability state”, “second high probability state” and “normal gaming state (sub)”. , Special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -12 "big hit", when it shifts to "big hit gaming state", it will be a single "big hit gaming state" without time saving, this "big hit gaming state" After ending, the process shifts to the “first high probability state”. In addition, when the “third big probability state” is changed to the “big hit game state” with the “big hit” in the special figure (1) -8 to the special figure (1) -12, the single big hit game state without time saving After the “big hit gaming state” is completed, the state again shifts to the “third high probability state”.

  When the state shifts from the “fourth high probability state” to the “big hit gaming state”, after the set game ends or the single “big hit gaming state” without time saving ends, the state shifts to the “fourth high probability state” again.

  Next, the transition between the “big hit gaming state” and the “short time gaming state” will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, during a set game after “big hit” by winning at the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, or after “per hit V” in the “small hit game state” In the case of a set game, the game shifts from the “big hit game state” to the “time-short game state”.

  Further, the transition from the “short-time gaming state” to the “big hit gaming state” occurs when “per-V” is made in the “short-time gaming state”. At this time, if the 16-round “big hit game” is won, the game shifts to the third big hit state, and if the “round-hit game” is won in 2 rounds, the game goes to the fourth big win state. Furthermore, in the “short-time gaming state”, when the “big hit” is won by entering the first starting port 44 or the second starting port 45 instead of “per-V”, the “big hit gaming” Transition to "state". In this case, it shifts to the first big hit state.

[Configuration of data table stored in main ROM]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 72 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main variation time determination table]
First, the main variation time determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 are diagrams showing examples of the main variation time determination tables 1 and 2 of the pachinko gaming machine.

  The main variation time determination table 1 is referred to when a loss or “small hit” is won in a special symbol game. This main variation time determination table 1 defines the relationship among gaming state, reach determination random number range, effect selection random number range, variation pattern, variation pattern command, and variation time.

  In the main variation time determination table 1, the gaming state is identified as a “short-time gaming state” (with a short time) and a non- “short-time gaming state” (without a short time). Furthermore, the special figure type is divided into five special figures (1) Loss, small hit (2) -1 to small hit (2) -4.

  The reach determination random number range defines whether or not the selected content is reach when the special figure type is special figure (1) lose. The range of reach variation time for determining reach variation time and the range of reach determination random numbers for not determining reach variation time are defined. The reach determination random number value is extracted from a reach determination counter (not shown) and stored in the main RAM 73 when a game ball wins the first and second start ports 44 and 45 in each gaming state. The reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter of the first embodiment is set to 0-250.

  As shown in FIG. 37, for example, when the special figure (1) is lost and the gaming state at that time is not the short-time gaming state, the reach determination random number range for determining the reach variation time is 0 to 250. Take the range. Further, it is determined that the reach occurs when the reach determination random number range is any of 0 to 25, and the variation pattern is determined according to the value of the effect selection random number in the range of 0 to 99. . When the variation pattern is determined, the variation time for reach (20000 ms, 30000 ms, 40000 ms) and the production contents (“losing normal reach”, “losing super reach A” and “losing super reach B”) are determined. Each reach includes a plurality of types of reach contents, and the subsequent reach contents are determined by the sub-control circuit 200.

  In addition, when the special figure (1) is lost and the gaming state at that time is the short-time gaming state, the variation time (50000 ms) is set to be relatively long. This is to make it difficult for the player to draw the first special symbol which is disadvantageous to the player. Note that the lottery of the second special symbol has priority over the lottery of the first special symbol. In addition, in the case of a specification that does not hold the second special symbol, this data does not need to be provided, so this data is not provided.

  Here, in the case of the small hit (2) -1 to the small hit (2) -4 and the game state at that time is not the short-time game state, after the “short-time game” is performed 100 times, the second special symbol of This is due to the pending portion and this is unlikely to occur. In this case, when “per V” is achieved, it is preferable that a resurgence effect is performed such that, for example, “short-time game” is performed again.

  The effect selection random number range defines the reach selection random number range corresponding to the reach determination random number range, the variation time, and the effect contents. The random number value for effect selection is extracted from an effect selection counter (not shown) when the game ball wins the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 in each gaming state. The random number value for effect selection extracted from the main effect selection counter in the first embodiment is set to 0-99.

  For example, when the special figure (1) is lost and the gaming state at that time is not the short-time gaming state, the reach determination random number range for determining the reach variation time ranges from 0 to 250. Further, it is determined that the normal variation is performed when the reach determination random number range is any of 26 to 250, and the variation pattern is determined according to the value of the effect selection random number that takes a range of 0 to 99. The By determining the variation pattern, the variation time (10000 ms, 5000 ms) and the production contents (“normal variation A” and “normal variation B”) are determined. Subsequent production contents are determined by the sub-control circuit 200.

  The variation pattern is data representing the production contents. For example, the fluctuation pattern 02H represents a loss normal reach. The variation pattern command is data representing variation time and production contents, whether winning or losing, and is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub-control circuit 200. When the variation pattern command is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200, a parameter for specifying the gaming state is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main variation time determination table 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main variation time determination table 2 is referred to when a big hit is won in a special symbol game. The main variation pattern determination table 2 defines the relationship among gaming state, jackpot type, random number range for effect selection, variation pattern, variation pattern command, and variation time.

In the main variation time determination table 2, the gaming state is the same as the main variation time determination table 1, "with short time" indicates that the game is in short time when the big hit is won, and "without short time" is won with the big hit. It shows that it is not a short-time gaming state. The special figure type is divided into 13 special figures (1) -1 to (1) -12 and special figure (2) -1.
For example, if the special game (1) -2 is a big hit and the game state at that time is not a short-time game state, the content of the big hit type is short when there is a ball (the game ball may be paid out in the big-hit game state). The transition pattern is determined according to the value of the random number for effect selection that takes a range of 0 to 99. By determining the variation pattern, the variation time (20100 ms, 30100 ms, 40100 ms) and the production contents (“per normal reach”, “per super reach A”, and “per super reach B”) are determined. Each reach includes a plurality of types of reach contents, and the subsequent reach contents are determined by the sub-control circuit 200.

  As shown in FIG. 38, the special figure (1) -1 and the special figure (1) -2 are reach effects regardless of whether the jackpot is in the short-time gaming state or not in the short-time gaming state. However, in the case of special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -12, an effect without a ball is performed. Special figure (1) -1 and special figure (1) -2 are "design-matched big hits", while special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -12 are "big hits that do not have any symbols".

[Configuration of data table stored in sub-ROM]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the program ROM 72 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Ceiling lottery table]
First, the ceiling lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a ceiling lottery table for a pachinko gaming machine.

  The ceiling lottery table is used in the above-described ceiling lottery. The sub-control circuit 200 counts the number of special symbol games (special symbol variable display count) when a game ball enters the first start port 44 and becomes a “hit” after the set game is over. When the game is shifted to the set game, the count up to now is reset, and the number of special symbol games is counted again after the set game ends. When the counted number of special symbol games reaches 111 times, 222 times, 333 times, 444 times, 555 times, 666 times, 777 times, 888 times and 999 times, a ceiling lottery is performed.

  Here, the range of random numbers in the ceiling lottery is 0-9. First, when the counted number of special symbol games reaches 111 times, the winning random number value is 0-1. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 20%. When the counted number of special symbol games reaches 222, the winning random number is 0-2. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 30%. When the counted number of special symbol games reaches 333 times, the winning random number is 0-3. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 40%. When the counted number of special symbol games has reached 444, the winning random number is 0-4. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 50%. When the counted number of special symbol games has reached 555, the winning random number is 0-5. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 60%. When the counted number of special symbol games has reached 666 times, the winning random number is 0-6. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 70%. When the counted number of special symbol games has reached 777, the winning random number is 0-7. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 80%. When the counted number of special symbol games has reached 888, the winning random number is 0-8. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 90%. When the counted number of special symbol games has reached 999, the winning random number is 0-9. Therefore, the probability of winning the ceiling lottery is 100%.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the probability that a lottery will be won increases as the state of not winning a “big hit” continues. And when the number of special symbol games that do not win the “big hit” reaches 999 times, the top lottery is always won. When the ceiling lottery is won, the state shifts to the “third high probability state”.

[Point addition table]
The point addition table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of a point addition table for a pachinko gaming machine.

  As described above, “normal gaming state” other than “first high probability state”, “third high probability state”, and “fourth high probability state”, that is, “second high probability state” and “normal gaming state (sub ) ", Points are accumulated according to the performance, and when 100 points are accumulated, the state shifts to the" first high probability state "(FIG. 36). In “First High Probability State”, winning “Big Hit” (“Pattern Match Big Bonus”) of Special Figure (1) -1 and Special Figure (1) -2 won “Per V” in “Short-Time Game State” Notification (navigation) of the number of rounds of “big hit game” to be transferred is performed in all three “time-short game states”. Further, in the “first high probability state”, the “big hit” of the special figure (1) -3 and the special figure (1) -7 (the “big hit not having the symbols” is shifted to the “short-time gaming state”. Even if you have won the “big hit”), the notification of the number of rounds of “big hit game” (navigation) that will be transferred if “per hit V” in the “short time gaming state” is performed in all three “short time gaming state” Is called. Therefore, it can be said that it is advantageous for the player to shift to the “first high probability state”. In the following, “navigation” simply refers to notification of the number of rounds of “big hit game” that shifts to the case of “per V”.

As described above, the “second high probability state” is a gaming state in which points are easily accumulated, and different point addition tables are used in the “second high probability state” and in other games. FIG. 40A is a table used in the “second high probability state”. FIG. 40 (a)
As shown in FIG. 4, when the variation pattern command sent from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 has an effect corresponding to “83H00H”, “83H01H”, “83H02H”, “83H03H”, and “83H04H” The value of the addition points varies depending on the lottery, but some points are added. That is, in the “second high probability state”, points are always added if they are lost. The point determination random number range is 0 to 9, and the points to be added differ depending on the acquired random number value.

  The production content corresponding to “83H00H” is “normal variation A”, the production content corresponding to “83H01H” is “normal variation B”, and the production content corresponding to “83H02H” is “losing normal reach”. Yes, the production content corresponding to “83H03H” is “Lose Super Reach A”, and the production content corresponding to “83H04H” is “Lose Super Reach B” (see FIG. 37). In these effects, a point addition effect may be performed so that the player can recognize that the points are added. In “Lose Super Reach B”, navigation can be acquired with a probability of 1/10.

  FIG. 40B is a table used during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 40 (b), when an effect corresponding to the variation pattern command “83H00H”, “83H01H”, “83H02H”, “83H03H”, and “83H04H” is made, the value of the addition point is determined by lottery. Is determined, but points may not be added. The point determination random number range is 0 to 9 as in the “second high probability state”. As can be seen from FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b), points are more likely to accumulate in the “second high probability state” than in the normal state.

[No time out Navi lottery table]
With reference to FIG. 41, a description will be given of the short navigation short-running lottery table. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of a short-time navigator short-time navigation lottery table for pachinko gaming machines.

  As described above, when the winning content is “no time when no ball is played”, the short navigation time when no ball is played is performed, and the number of times of navigation is determined according to the lottery. When the winning content is “short when there is no ball”, the special figure types are special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. As shown in FIG. 41, the range of random values is 0-9. In special figure (1) -3, one navigation is given when the acquired random number value is “9”, and no navigation is given with other random value. In special figure (1) -4, one navigation is given when the acquired random number value is “7-9”, and no navigation is given with other random number values. In the special figure (1) -5, two navigations are given when the obtained random number value is “7-9”, one navigation is given when the random number value is “2-6”, and other disturbances. Navi is not given by the numerical value. In special figure (1) -6, when the acquired random number value is “5-9”, two navigations are given, and when it is “0-4”, one navigation is given. In the special figure (1) -7, when the acquired random number value is “9”, three navigations are given, and when it is “0-8”, two navigations are given. When navigation is given, a navigation acquisition effect is executed. Further, the number of times of navigation provided is updated (for example, added) and stored in the work RAM 203, for example.

[Big hit time navigation lottery table]
The jackpot navigation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of a big hit navigation lottery table for pachinko gaming machines.

  In “normal game state”, “first high probability state”, “third high probability state”, and “fourth high probability state” are selected as “shortage when there is a ball” and decided to move to set game In such a case, navigation is performed for all of the three “time-saving gaming states” (see S1127 in FIG. 72, S1164 in FIG. 74, and S1174 in FIG. 75). In the special figure (1) -1, navigation is performed for all three “time-short gaming states” regardless of the gaming state. However, when the special figure (1) -2 is won in the “normal gaming state” other than the above gaming state, the sub-control circuit 200 draws the number of times of navigation during the set game. The big hit time navigation lottery table is used for this lottery.

  The number of navigations to be won in the jackpot navigation lottery and their winning probabilities vary depending on the selected character. The character is selected from the characters 1 to 3 by the player. For example, by operating the effect button 23 from the time of winning the “big hit” to the start of the one-round game. If a character is not selected before the one-round game is started, an initially set character is selected.

  The character is a character image displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. There are a plurality of types of character images (three types in the first embodiment), and the player can select one of the characters, and can enjoy an effect according to the selected character.

  In the big hit navigation lottery, the range of random values is 0-9. As shown in FIG. 42, when character 1 is selected, it is “stable type” and does not obtain three navigations, but can obtain one or two navigations and cannot obtain navigation. There is no case. When character 2 is selected, it is “normal type” and navigation may not be obtained, but navigation can be obtained on average for each of 1 to 3 characters. Further, when the character 3 is selected, it is “one-shot reversal type”. When the navigation is obtained, the number is always three, but the navigation cannot be obtained with a probability of 1/2 or more. The player may select a character from these according to his / her preference. However, in each character, the number of navigations and the winning rate are set so that no substantial advantage or disadvantage occurs regardless of which character is selected. In the first embodiment, there are three characters, but other numbers may be used. By increasing the number of characters, the player's choice of characters is broadened, and there is a high possibility that the interest in games will be improved.

[Navi lottery table at the end of set game]
The set game end navigation lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a navigation lottery table at the end of a set game of a pachinko gaming machine.

  As described above, during the set game, three “time-short game states” are included. That is, it is possible to execute navigation up to three times at the maximum. However, navigation is not possible when “big hit” by a special symbol game is won instead of “big hit” by “per V”. In such a case, the player cannot be in an advantageous situation by his / her own operation. Therefore, in the first embodiment, as a relief measure in such a case, navigation is given by lottery according to the number of “big hits” by the special symbol game during the set game.

  In the sub control circuit 200, when the set game is ended, a navigation lottery at the end of the set game is performed according to the number of “big hits” by the special symbol game in the set game.

  In the set game end navigation lottery, the range of random values is 0-9. As shown in FIG. 43, the number of “big hits” by the special symbol game is drawn for each of 0, 1, 2, and 3, and the number of navigations to be given is determined. As the number of “big hits” by the special symbol game increases, the number of navigations given tends to increase. In the first embodiment, the number of “hit” by the special symbol game during the set game is used as a reference, but for example, the number of “big hit” by the special symbol game over consecutive set games is used as a reference. It is good also as drawing a number. That is, the number of navigations based on the number of times that a “hit” is made by a lottery performed by entering a game ball into the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 during a plurality of consecutive set games. It is good also as lottery.

  The number of navigations to be given may be drawn in lots based on, for example, the total number of rounds in all “hit game states” instead of the number of “hit” games in the special symbol game during the set game. . What is necessary is just to draw lots of the number of navigation provided according to the game state in a set game. For example, the number of navigations to be given based on the type and order of the “big hit game” in the set game may be drawn by lottery. For example, the lottery rate for the number of navigations to be given may be different between the order per 2R, the order per 2R, and the order per 16R, and the order per 2R, per 16R, and per 16R. .

  In addition, during a set game, a maximum of 3 “per V” is possible, but if the results are all per 2R, the number of game balls paid out is small, so the result is not very favorable for the player. Absent. Therefore, in such a case, the number of navigations for the set game after the next time may be added (see S1210 in FIG. 77). The number to be added may be one time, for example. In addition, the number of navigations may be added in the same way when the number of 2Rs is three consecutive times over different set games instead of three times of 2R in one set game. In addition, in the case of different set games, the number of consecutive 2Rs is not set to 3 times, and if the number of times 2R continues more than that, navigation may be added. Further, in a plurality of consecutive set games, when 2R is a certain number or more, navigation may be added. In this way, some kind of relief may be given to a game ball whose number of payouts is small in a set game.

  Although the number of navigations to be given has been described, the number of navigations to be given may be displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 as an effect in, for example, “big hit gaming state”.

[Description of main control circuit operation]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control main processing]
First, with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, main control main processing by the control of the main CPU 71 will be described. 44 and 45 are flowcharts showing an example of main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine.

  In S11, a watchdog timer disable setting process is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the watchdog timer to disabled. If this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  In S12, input / output port setting processing is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs input / output port setting processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S13.

  In S13, a process for determining whether or not a power interruption detection state is present is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is HI (high level). If the power interruption detection signal is HI, it is determined that the power interruption is detected, and the process proceeds to S13. If the power interruption detection signal is not HI, it is determined that the power interruption is not detected, and the process proceeds to S14. If the power interruption detection signal is HI, it is determined that the power interruption is detected, and the process proceeds to S13 again, and this is repeated until it is determined that the electric power interruption is not detected.

  In S14, a sub-control reception acceptance wait process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 200 receives a signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  In S15, a RAM write permission process is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing for permitting writing to the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S16.

  In S16, a process for determining whether or not the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 33) is on is performed. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 33) is on, it moves the process to S24, and if it determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not on, it shifts to S17. Move processing.

  In S17, processing for determining whether or not there is a power interruption detection flag is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S18 when it is determined that there is a power interruption detection flag, and shifts the process to S24 when it is not determined that there is a power interruption detection flag.

  In S18, processing for calculating a work damage check value is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of checking the work area for damage and calculating a work damage check value. If this process ends, the process moves to S19.

  In S19, processing for determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value is performed. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S20. If the main CPU 71 does not determine that the work damage check value is a normal value, the main CPU 71 proceeds to S24. Move.

  In S20, a process for setting 7FFEH to the stack pointer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  In S21, initial setting processing of the work area at the time of power recovery is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. If this process ends, the process moves to S22.

  In S22, processing for transmitting a command at the time of power recovery is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing for transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption to the sub-control circuit 200. When this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S23, CPU peripheral device initial setting processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 71. When this process ends, the address before power interruption, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area is restored.

  In S24, processing for setting 8000H to the stack pointer is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting 8000H to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S25.

  In S25, processing for acquiring an initial value of a random number related to jackpot determination is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to jackpot determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S26.

  In S26, all work area clear processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing all work areas. When this process ends, the process moves to S27 (FIG. 45).

  In S27, processing for setting an initial value of a random number related to jackpot determination is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting an initial value of a random number related to jackpot determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S28.

  In S28, initial setting processing of a work area at the time of initialization of the RAM is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs initial setting of the work area when the main RAM 73 is initialized. If this process ends, the process moves to S29.

  In S29, a process of transmitting a command at initialization of the RAM is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a command for initializing the main RAM 73 to the sub-control circuit 200. Further, in the sub control circuit 200, initialization is performed based on the received command. If this process ends, the process moves to S30.

  In S30, CPU peripheral device initial setting processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 71. If this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, an interrupt prohibition process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process for prohibiting the interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  In S32, initial value random number update processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, an interrupt permission process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process for permitting an interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S34, an effect random number update process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  In S35, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 71 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 73. If the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S36, and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If not, the process moves to S31.

  In S36, a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In S37, timer update processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 measures a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 70 and the sub-control circuit 200, and a large open time for measuring the first big prize device 54 and the second big prize device 53. A process of updating various timers such as a winning device opening time timer is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  In S38, a special symbol control process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 71 extracts a winning determination random number value and a winning symbol determination random number value in accordance with detection signals from the first starting port winning ball switch 44 a and the second starting port winning ball switch 45 a and stores them in the main ROM 72. Referring to the hit determination table, it is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery (big hit or small win) has been won, and the result of determination is stored in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  In S39, a normal symbol control process is performed. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts a random number value according to the detection signal from the passing ball switch 43a, refers to the normal symbol winning table stored in the main ROM 72, and determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won. A process of determining and storing the result of the determination in the main RAM 73 is performed. Note that when the normal symbol lottery is won, the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in an open state, so that the game ball can easily enter the second start opening 45. If this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, a symbol display device control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 changes the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 73 in S38 and S39 and the result of the normal symbol control process. A process of storing a control signal for driving in the main RAM 73 is performed. The main CPU 71 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays and stops the special symbol based on the received control signal. Based on the received control signal, the normal symbol display device 62 displays the normal symbol as a variable display and a stop display. If this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  In S41, game information data generation processing is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing for generating data relating to game information signals to be transmitted to the platform computer or the hall computer and storing the data in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S42.

  In S42, symbol reservation number data generation processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 detects the first start-port winning ball switch 44a, the second start-port winning ball switch 45a, and the passing ball switch that are detected in a switch input process (S235 in FIG. 59) in a timer interrupt process described later. Based on the detection signal from 43a and the update result of the reserved number data stored in the main RAM 73 that is updated in accordance with the execution of the variable symbol special symbol and normal symbol display, the display about the special symbol and the normal symbol regarding the hold The process which memorize | stores the control signal for performing in main RAM73 is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  In S43, port output processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 73 from each port in the above steps. Specifically, an LED power source for turning on the LED (common signal), a solenoid power source for driving the first big prize opening solenoid 54b, the second big prize opening solenoid 53b, and the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a are supplied. If this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  In S44, a winning opening related command control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process for controlling a winning opening related command. When this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  In S45, a payout process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the game balls have won the general winning ports 51 and 52, the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, the first large winning device 54 and the second large winning device 53. When a check is made and there is a winning, a payout request command corresponding to each is sent to the payout control circuit 300. If this process ends, the process moves to S31.

[Special symbol control processing]
The subroutine (special symbol control process) executed in S38 of FIG. 45 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 46, numerical values (00H to 10H) written in the vicinity of S52 to S62 indicate control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in a storage area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. Yes. In accordance with the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73, the main CPU 71 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value, and the special symbol game proceeds.

  First, in S51, processing for loading a control state flag is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S52.

  In S52 to S62, which will be described later, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and allows one of the processes in S52 to S62 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 71 executes processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined in accordance with a waiting time timer set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the process ends without executing the process in each step, and another subroutine is executed. Of course, the system timer interrupt process is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  In S52, a special symbol memory check process is executed. Details of this processing will be described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S53.

  In S53, a special symbol variation time management process is executed. Although details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management and a predetermined variation time has elapsed in the previous special symbol variation. When the special symbol fluctuation is stopped, the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management is set in the control state flag, and the waiting time after determination (for example, 600 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. In other words, after the waiting time after the determination has elapsed, the process of S54 is set to be executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S54.

  In S54, a special symbol display time management process is executed. Although details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management, and if the waiting time after determination has passed, Or a small hit). In the case of small hit, the main CPU 71 sets a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the small hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the small hit start interval elapses, the process of S55 is set to be executed.

  In the case of a big hit, the main CPU 71 sets a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the big hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit start interval elapses, the process of S58 is set to be executed.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a win. That is, it sets so that the process of S62 may be performed.

  In S55, a small hit start interval management process is executed. Although details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management and the time corresponding to the small hit start interval has elapsed. The main RAM 73 stores data for opening the second big prize device 53 read from the main ROM 72. Then, in the process of S43 in FIG. 45, the main CPU 71 reads out data for opening the second big prize winning device 53 stored in the main RAM 73, and outputs a signal for opening the second big prize winning device 53 as the first. Supplied to the two largest winning opening solenoid 53b. In this way, the main CPU 71 and the like perform opening / closing control of the second big prize winning device 53. That is, the “small hit gaming state” is executed.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (04H) indicating that a small hit is being made in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 1.5 seconds or 1.2 seconds) of the second big winning device 53 to the second value. Set in the big prize device opening time timer. In addition, it sets so that the process of S56 may be performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S56.

  In S56, small hitting / medium processing is executed. Although details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets the big prize opening opening process (07H) or the small winning end post-process (05H) in the control state flag according to the conditions. If this process ends, the process moves to S57.

  In S57, a process after the end of the small hit is executed. Although details of this process will be described later, in this process, it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may enter the V winning opening 57 in the second large winning device 53 after the blade member 53a is closed. . In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the special symbol game end process (10H) to the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S58.

  In S58, a big hit start interval management process is executed. Although details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the main CPU 71 has a main state when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the jackpot start interval management and the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval has elapsed. Data for opening the first big winning device 54 read from the ROM 72 is stored in the main RAM 73. Then, the main CPU 71 reads the data for opening the first big prize winning device 54 stored in the main RAM 73 in the process of S43 in FIG. It is supplied to the 1st prize winning opening solenoid 54b. In this way, the main CPU 71 and the like perform opening / closing control of the first grand prize winning device 54. That is, the “hit game state” is executed.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (07H) indicating the big prize opening process to the control state flag, and sets the upper opening time limit (for example, 27.996 seconds or 0.102 seconds) to the big prize opening time timer. set. That is, it is set to execute the process of S59. If this process ends, the process moves to S59.

  In S59, a special winning opening release process is executed. Although details of this process will be described later, in this process, when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating that the big prize opening is open, the big prize winning prize counter is “10” or more. It is determined whether or not the condition that the upper limit opening time has elapsed (the big winning opening opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. The main CPU 71 updates a variable positioned in the main RAM 73 in order to close the first big winning device 54 when any one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not a condition that the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum winning opening open number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 71 sets a value (09H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag when it is the final round, and a value (08H) indicating the waiting time management before reopening for the big prize when it is not the final round. Is set in the control status flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S60.

  In S60, a special winning opening reopening waiting time management process is executed. Although details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating management of a special winning opening reopening waiting time and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. In addition, the special winning opening opening number counter is updated so as to increase by “1”. The main CPU 71 sets a value (07H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 71 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.996 seconds or 0.102 seconds) in the big prize opening time timer, that is, sets to execute the process of S59. If completed, the process proceeds to S59.

  In S61, a hit end interval process is executed. Although details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (09H) indicating a hit end interval, and the special symbol game when the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. A value (10H) indicating the end is set in the control state flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S62. If this process ends, the process moves to S62.

  In S62, a special symbol game end process is executed. Although details of this process will be described later, in this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check when the control state flag is a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. . That is, it is set to execute the process of S52. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in order of “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, and “10H” when the result of the hit determination is a loss, so that S52 shown in FIG. , S53, S54, and S62 are executed at a predetermined timing.

  Further, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag in the order of “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “06H” when the result of the hit determination is a big hit when it is not the big hit or the small hit gaming state. Thus, the processing of S52, S53, S54, and S58 shown in FIG. 46 is executed at a predetermined timing, and control to the big hit gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag in order of “07H” and “08H”, thereby performing the processes of S59 and S60 shown in FIG. It will be executed at the timing of, and a jackpot game will be executed. When the big hit game ending condition is satisfied, “07H”, “09H”, and “10H” are set in this order to execute the processing of S59, S61, and S62 shown in FIG. 46 at a predetermined timing. The jackpot game will end.

  The main CPU 71 sets the control state flag in the order of “00H”, “01H”, “02H”, “03H” when the result of the hit determination is a small hit when the game is not in the big hit or the small hit gaming state. As a result, the processing of S52, S53, S54, and S55 shown in FIG. 46 is executed at a predetermined timing, and the control to the small hit gaming state is executed. Furthermore, when the control to the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flag to “04H” to execute the process of S56 shown in FIG. 46 at a predetermined timing. The jackpot game will be executed. If the end condition of the small hit game is satisfied, “05H” and “10H” are set in this order to execute the processing of S57 and S62 shown in FIG. Will end.

  By the way, the special symbol control process branches the process according to the status as described above. Although not described in detail, the normal symbol control process is also branched according to the status.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
The subroutine (special symbol memory check process) executed in S52 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 47, in S71, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S72. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 does not determine that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 71 ends the present subroutine.

  In S72, a process for determining the presence or absence of start memory is performed. Here, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol being changed is stored as the start memory in the first special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 73, and the four special symbol games held on hold are stored. Is stored as a start memory in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). Similarly, for the special symbol game of the second special symbol, when the special symbol game of the second special symbol is held four times, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is the main information. The information of the four special symbol games stored and reserved in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the RAM 73 is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area. It is stored in the area (4) as a start memory. Therefore, a maximum of 8 holds is possible.

  In the process of determining whether or not there is a start memory in S72, the main CPU 71 determines that there is no special symbol game start memory, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). ) Or when it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S73. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that there is a start-up memory, the process proceeds to S74.

  In S73, a demonstration display process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 73. Furthermore, the state that the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start memory area or the second special symbol start memory area in which the random number for hit determination is stored) is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If it is, the value that permits execution of the demo display is set as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting demo display command data when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command data stored in this way is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200 as a demo display command. As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 performs control to display the demonstration display in the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S74, a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is the earliest hold is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the earliest hold is the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol from the data in the first special symbol start storage region and the data in the second special symbol start storage region. Determine. If it is determined that the earliest hold is not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S75. If it is determined that the earliest hold is the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S76.

  In S <b> 75, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating the fluctuation of the second special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S77.

  In S <b> 76, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (01 </ b> H) indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S77.

  In S77, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S78.

  In S78, a special symbol memory transfer process is executed. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 71 converts each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), A process of shifting (storing) from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) is executed, and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol Each data of the symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4) is shifted (stored) from the second special symbol start memory area (0) to the second special symbol start memory area (3). Execute the process. If this process ends, the process moves to S79.

  In S79, a hit determination process is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 refers to the hit determination table stored in the main ROM 72, is extracted at the time of starting winning, and is first displayed in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Reference is made to the random number value for hit determination in the special symbol start storage area set to and the hit determination table. Then, when the hit determination random number value matches the hit determination value, the main CPU 71 determines that it is a big hit or a small hit. That is, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to enter the “big hit gaming state” and whether to enter the “small hit gaming state”. In addition, when it is not “big hit” and “small hit”, it is determined that the game is lost. If this process ends, the process moves to S80.

  In S80, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol determination process. In this processing, the main CPU 71 determines a big hit symbol when the hit determination result is a big hit, and determines a small hit symbol when the hit determination result is a small hit, and is neither a big hit nor a small hit. In the case, that is, in the case of losing, processing for determining a losing symbol is performed. Details of the special symbol determination process will be described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S81.

  In S81, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 selects the main variation time determination table for determining the special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the processing of S80 and the result of the hit determination determined in the processing of S79. To do. Specifically, when the big win is won, the main variation time determination table 2 of FIG. 38 is selected, and otherwise the main variation time determination table 1 of FIG. 37 is selected. Further, the main CPU 71 generates a variation pattern based on the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination random number counter, the effect selection random number value extracted from the effect selection random number counter, and the selected main variation time determination table. It is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 61 based on such data indicating the variation pattern.

  The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, the special symbol display device 61 variably displays the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a variation pattern command to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 executes an effect display according to the received variation pattern command. If this process ends, the process moves to S82.

  In S82, special symbol variation time setting processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets a fluctuation time corresponding to the decided fluctuation pattern in the waiting time timer, and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for the current fluctuation display. If this process ends, the process moves to S83.

  In S83, processing for setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 73 is performed. The special symbol effect start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. The sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 starts the presentation based on the received special symbol presentation start command. If this process ends, the process moves to S84.

  In S84, the main CPU 71 executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variable display. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Special symbol determination processing]
The subroutine (special symbol determination process) executed in S80 of FIG. 47 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S91, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit as a result of the hit determination (S79). If it is determined that the game is a big hit, the process proceeds to S92. If it is not determined that it is a big hit, the process proceeds to S97.

  In S92, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the variation state number is (01H). If it is determined that the variation state number is (01H), the process proceeds to S93. If it is not determined that the variation state number is (01H), the process proceeds to S95.

  In S93, a process of determining a big hit symbol of the first special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determining random number value extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the hit determination table. If this process ends, the process moves to S94.

  In S94, the big special symbol data set and the big special symbol command set for the first special symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command for the big hit symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. As a result, under the control of the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the display area 13a in the big hit stop display mode. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S95, a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determining random value extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the hit determination table. If this process ends, the process moves to S96.

  In S96, the big special symbol data set and the big special symbol command set of the second special symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the big special symbol data of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a big special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. As a result, under the control of the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the display area 13a in the big hit stop display mode. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S97, when the main CPU 71 determines that a small hit is obtained as a result of the hit determination (S79), the process proceeds to S98. If it is not determined that it is a small hit, the process proceeds to S100.

  In S98, a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol according to the random number value extracted from the small hit symbol determination counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S99. In the first embodiment, only the second special symbol is won for “small hit”.

  In S99, the data set of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the command set of the small hit symbol are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the small hit symbol data of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. Also, the main CPU 71 sets the small special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. . As a result, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the display area 13a in the small hit stop display mode. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S100, a lost symbol data set and a lost symbol command set are performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays the special symbol and stops and displays the special symbol in a manner based on the lost symbol data. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a lost symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the display area 13a in a manner of losing display. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Special symbol change time management processing]
The subroutine (special symbol variation time management process) executed in S53 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S101, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management, and determines that the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. If YES in step S102, the process proceeds to step S102. If it is not determined that the value is 01H indicating the special symbol variation time management, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S102, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S103. If it is not determined that the waiting time timer is “0”, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S103, a process of setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag is executed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S104.

  In S104, a symbol stop command is set. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) symbol stop command data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The symbol stop command data is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S105.

  In S105, after the determination, processing for setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time is executed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing for storing the post-confirmation waiting time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 73. The waiting time may be about 100 ms. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Special symbol display time management process]
The subroutine (special symbol display time management process) executed in S54 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S111, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating a special symbol display time management process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process proceeds to S112. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S112, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0” when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. judge. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S113. When the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S113, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If it is a big hit, the process proceeds to S119. If it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to S114.

  In S114, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the small hit. If it is a small hit, the process proceeds to S115. If it is not a small hit, the process proceeds to S124.

  In S <b> 115, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the small hitting start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S116.

  In S <b> 116, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value of a waiting time timer as a hit start interval corresponding to the small hit in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. Note that the waiting time may be, for example, 5000 ms. If this process ends, the process moves to S117.

  In S <b> 117, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special symbol effect stop command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the special symbol effect stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S118.

  In S <b> 118, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a small hitting start command corresponding to the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this processing, the small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the big hit or the small hit start. . When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S 119, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S120.

  In S <b> 120, the main CPU 71 performs processing for turning off (clearing) the time reduction flag in the main RAM 73. In the “hit game state”, “time saving game” is not performed. On the other hand, the counter for the number of consecutive times is not cleared. If this process ends, the process moves to S121.

  In S <b> 121, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value of a waiting time timer as a jackpot start interval time corresponding to a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The waiting time may be set to 5000 ms, for example. If this process ends, the process moves to S122.

  In S <b> 122, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. This special symbol effect stop command is determined with reference to the opening pattern table shown in FIG. 34 (d), and is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 200. The sub CPU 201 recognizes the stop of the special symbol effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S123.

  In S123, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this process, the big hit start command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the big hit start. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S <b> 124, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (10H) indicating a special symbol game end process in a predetermined area serving as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S125.

  In S <b> 125, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. This special symbol effect stop command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the stop of the special symbol effect. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Small hit start interval management processing]
The subroutine (small hit start interval management process) executed in S55 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.
In the following description, the “Large Winner Opening Counter” in S133, S134, S144, and S145 is a “Large Winner Opening Counter” used at the time of a small hit, and S151, S173, S174, S178, S187, The “Large Winner Opening Counter” in S203 is a “Large Winner Opening Counter” used for a big hit.

  First, in S131, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hitting start interval management process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hit start interval management process, the process proceeds to S132. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the small hitting start interval management process, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S132, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the small hit start interval management process is “0”, that is, whether or not the small hit start interval time has been consumed. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S133. When the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S <b> 133, processing is performed to set a large winning opening opening number counter upper limit value related to the number of opening of the second large winning device 53 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In the first embodiment, the upper limit value is limited to 3 (see FIG. 34 (d)). If this process ends, the process moves to S134.

  In S134, the main CPU 71 adds 1 to the special winning opening opening number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S135.

  In S <b> 135, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting an opening / closing pattern for each number of times of opening corresponding to the type of the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 in accordance with the opening pattern table shown in FIG. 34 (d). In the first embodiment, the opening time for each opening number is set similarly. If this process ends, the process moves to S136.

  In S <b> 136, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the display command data during the big prize opening opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 for the second big prize device 53. The display command data during opening of the special winning opening is supplied as a display command during opening of the special winning opening to the sub-control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S137.

  In S <b> 137, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the small hitting process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S138.

  In S <b> 138, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing a big prize opening prize counter related to the number of prizes received by the second big prize winning device 53. If this process ends, the process moves to S139.

  In S <b> 139, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 for the opening time of the second big winning device 53. The waiting time may be set to 1200 ms or 1500 ms, for example. If this process ends, the process moves to S140.

  In S <b> 140, the main CPU 71 sets, in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, a movable member operating flag indicating whether or not the movable member 57 a is open due to the operation of the movable member 57 a of the V winning opening 57. Process. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Small hit processing]
The subroutine executed in S56 in FIG. 46 (small hitting process) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S141, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a small hitting process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the small hitting process, the process proceeds to S142. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the middle hit process, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S <b> 142, it is determined whether or not the second prize winning unit 53 has a prize winning counter of 4 or more. Here, before the second big winning device 53 is opened four times, four game balls may enter and the big winning counter may count four or more. That is, as in the case of one round in the case of a big win, each time the second big winning device 53 is opened once, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening counted by the big winning counter is determined. On the other hand, the total number of game balls that enter the big prize opening counted by the big prize counter is determined for each small hit regardless of the number of times the second big prize winning device 53 is opened. The main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S <b> 148 when the big prize opening counter is 4 or more. If the big prize counter is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S143.

  In S143, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the middle hit process is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the waiting time timer has become 0 and the opening time or closing time of the second big winning device 53 has ended. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S144. If the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S147.

  In S144, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening opening number counter is greater than or equal to the large winning opening opening number upper limit set in S133. In other words, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening counter has reached the number of times of opening the second big winning device 53 set in S133. The main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S <b> 148 when the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the large winning opening opening number upper limit. If the big prize opening number counter is not equal to or larger than the upper limit for the big opening number, the process proceeds to S145.

  In S145, if this time is closed, the main CPU 71 adds 1 to the special winning opening opening number counter. That is, when the special winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or greater than the upper winning opening opening number upper limit, the “small hit gaming state” is continued, and the second big winning device 53 in the closed state is later opened, and again In order to determine the number of times the second big prize device 53 of the big prize opening number counter is opened, 1 is added to the big number opening number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S146.

  In S 146, the main CPU 71 sets the next open / close mode data and open / close timer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. That is, the opening / closing mode data and the opening / closing timer of the second big winning device 53 that is in the open state or the closed state are set here again. If this process ends, the process moves to S147.

  In S 147, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag related to winning in the V winning opening 57. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S150. If there is no V winning flag, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S148, when the main CPU 71 determines in S142 that the big prize counter is 4 or more for the second big prize device 53, or in S144, the big prize opening number counter is set in S133. If it is determined that the number of times of release is equal to or greater than the upper limit, the waiting time timer corresponding to the middle hit process is cleared. If this process ends, the process moves to S149.

  In S149, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S150. If there is no V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S156.

  In S150, the main CPU 71 sets the special winning opening opening process (07H) in the control state flag. That is, in S149, when the main CPU 71 determines that there is a V winning flag, preparation for “big hit game” started from “per V” is started. If this process ends, the process moves to S151.

In S151, a process of setting the special winning opening opening number counter to 2 is performed. As described above, in this process, the “big hit game” started from “per V” is the first round when the second big prize device which is entered into the V prize opening 57 is opened, and the subsequent “big hit game”. Is a process that occurs when the second grand prize-winning device is released in the second round. If this process ends, the process moves to S152.
In S <b> 152, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a big winning opening opening number counter upper limit value related to the first big winning device 54 of the main RAM 73. In this case, the big winning opening opening number counter upper limit value is set to “2” or “16”, depending on the content of the small hits that triggered the V. If this process ends, the process moves to S153.

  In S <b> 153, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a timer value as a start interval time per V in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. This time may be the same as the interval between rounds, for example, 5000 ms. If this process ends, the process moves to S154.

  In S154, the main CPU 71 performs processing for turning off the V winning flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S155.

  In S <b> 155, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a start command per V in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S <b> 156, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (05 </ b> H) indicating a process after the end of the small hit to the control state flag of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S157.

  In S157, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a timer value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 as the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit. For example, this time may be set to 5000 ms. This process is a process necessary to confirm that there is no game ball that may enter the V winning port 57 in the second large winning device 53 after the blade member 53a is closed. is there. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Post-processing after small hits]
The subroutine (post-processing after the end of small hits) executed in S57 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S161, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the post-small end process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the post-small hit end process, the process proceeds to S162. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the processing after the small hit, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S162, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the timer value of the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the remaining monitoring time at the end of the small hit is consumed. When the timer value is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S164. If the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S163.

  In S163, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. The determination of whether or not there is a V winning flag is made at this timing. For example, even if an illegal act in which the V winning flag is intentionally made is performed at other timings, the determination of the V winning flag is not made. Not done. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S150 of FIG. If there is no V winning flag, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S <b> 164, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a small hit command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S165.

  In S165, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (10H) indicating a special symbol game end process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Big hit start interval management processing]
The subroutine (big hit start interval management process) executed in S58 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the big hit start interval management process, in S171, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process, the process proceeds to S172. On the other hand, if it is not determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the big hit start interval management process (06H), this subroutine is terminated.

  In S172, when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the big hit start interval management process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the big hit start interval management process is “0”. To do. Further, when the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the processing of S173, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 ends the present subroutine.

  In S <b> 173, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a big winning opening opening number counter upper limit value related to the first big winning device 54 of the main RAM 73. In the first embodiment, all the “big hit games” with special symbols are 5 rounds, and therefore, the upper limit value of the number of times of winning the prize winning opening counter is set to “5”. If this process ends, the process moves to S174.

  In S 174, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S175.

  In S175, the main CPU 60 refers to the opening pattern table of FIG. 34 (d), and performs a process of setting an open / close pattern for each round according to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In the first embodiment, the opening / closing pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol is set to be different. As this opening / closing pattern, two patterns with a big winning opening opening time of 27.996 seconds or 0.102 seconds are set. However, the open / close pattern corresponding to each round is set in the same way. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S <b> 176, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting (storing) the display command data during the big prize opening opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special winning opening open display command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S177.

  In S177, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S178.

  In S <b> 178, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the big prize opening prize counter in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S179.

  In S <b> 179, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 73. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Large winning opening process]
The subroutine executed in S59 of FIG. 46 (large winning opening opening process) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 55, in the big prize opening process, in S181, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the big prize opening process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the big prize opening process, the process proceeds to S182. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the big prize opening process, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S182, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more. In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S185 and does not decide that the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more. In step S183, the process proceeds to step S183.

  In S183, a special winning opening opening / closing process is performed according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of opening and closing the first big winning device 54 in accordance with the open / close pattern for each round set in S175. Specifically, according to the open / close pattern for each round, a process of waiting for time and closing and opening the first big winning device 54 is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S184.

  In S184, it is determined whether or not the waiting time timer as the big prize opening time timer is “0”. When the main CPU 71 determines that the waiting time timer of the predetermined area functioning as the big prize opening opening time timer in the main RAM 73 is “0”, the process shifts to S185 and the waiting time timer is “0”. If it is not determined, the subroutine is terminated. That is, if it is determined that the big prize opening prize counter is “10” or more, or if it is decided that the big prize opening time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S185, where the big prize opening prize counter Is not determined to be “10” or more, and if it is not determined that the big prize opening time timer is “0”, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S186, processing for setting the big prize closing data is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 updates the variables located in the main RAM 73 based on the data read from the main ROM 72 in order to close the special winning opening. The variables stored in this way will cause the first big prize opening solenoid 54b to be closed by the process of S43 of FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S187.

  In S187, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the large winning opening opening number upper limit. In this processing, the main CPU 71 compares the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 73 with the large winning opening opening number upper limit or more, and the main winning opening opening number counter indicates the large winning opening open number upper limit value. It is determined whether it is above. If it is determined that the value is greater than or equal to the upper limit value for the number of times that the winning a prize opening is open, the process proceeds to S191.

  In S188, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer in the main RAM 73 as the interval time between rounds and the remaining sphere monitoring time. If this process ends, the process moves to S189.

  In S189, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (08H) indicating a waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73 as a control state flag. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S190.

  In S <b> 190, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the display command data between rounds in the main RAM 73. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S <b> 191, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a waiting time timer as a jackpot end interval time and a remaining time monitoring time in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S192.

  In S192, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (09H) indicating a big hit end interval process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S193.

  In S <b> 193, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting interval end display command data per special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Waiting time management process before reopening of big prize opening]
The subroutine executed in S60 of FIG. 46 (waiting time management process before reopening of big winning opening) will be described with reference to FIG.

  56. As shown in FIG. 56, in the main CPU 71, in S201, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control status flag is a value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening as shown in FIG. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the control status flag is a value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening, the process proceeds to S202. When it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S202, the main CPU 71 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer as the interval time between rounds is “0” when the control state flag is a value (08H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening. Judge whether or not. Further, when the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 proceeds to the process of S203, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 ends the present subroutine.

  In S <b> 203, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the special winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S204.

  In S <b> 204, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) the display command data during the big prize opening opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this case, the display command data during opening of the special winning opening is data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The special winning opening open command data is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special winning opening open display command. This special winning opening opening display command includes an instruction to the sub CPU 201 to perform round counter +1. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S205.

  In S <b> 205, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process proceeds to S206.

  In S <b> 206, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S207.

  In step S <b> 207, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a waiting time timer as a special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 73. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Big hit end interval processing]
The subroutine (big hit end interval process) executed in S61 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S211, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (09H) indicating a big hit end interval process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the big hit end interval process (09H), the process proceeds to S212. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value indicating the big hit end interval process (09H), this subroutine is ended.

  In S212, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the hit end interval is “0” when the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (09H) indicating the big hit end interval process. To do. That is, it is determined whether the jackpot end interval time has been consumed and the value of the waiting time timer has become “0”. Further, when the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S213, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 ends the present subroutine.

  In S213, the main CPU 71 sets a value (10H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 73 in the control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S214.

  In S214, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a short-time win is made. The main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S215 when the short-time winning is made. If it is not a short-time winning, the process moves to S219.

  In S <b> 215, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time-sequential continuous counter is 0. The main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S <b> 216 when the time-sequential continuous counter is 0. If the time-continuous counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S217. The time-short continuous counter is provided for counting the number of “time-short game state” during the set game. When the time-short continuous counter is 0, for example, it indicates that it is a “big hit” from the “normal game state”, so-called “first win”, and “time-short game” has not yet been performed in the set game. This shows that the first “short game” will be held.

  In S216, the main CPU 71 sets “time saving game state” and sets the time saving continuous counter to 1. In addition, 0 is set in the time reduction counter. The time-shortage counter is for counting the number of “time-short games”, and a maximum of 100 “time-short games” is possible in the “time-short game state”. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S217, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time-sequential continuous counter is 4. In other words, “big hit” including “first win” is performed four times, and it is determined whether or not it is the third “time-short game state” during the set game. When the hourly time continuous counter is 4, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S219. When the time-short continuous counter is not 4, the process proceeds to S218.

  In S218, the main CPU 71 sets “time saving game state” and adds 1 to the time saving continuous counter. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S219, the main CPU 71 sets “normal gaming state”. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Special symbol game end processing]
The subroutine (special symbol game end processing) executed in S62 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S221, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (10H) indicating a special symbol game end process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the process proceeds to S222. If it is not determined that the control state flag is not a value (10H) indicating the special symbol game end process, this subroutine is ended.

  In S222, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a V winning flag. If there is a V winning flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S223. If there is no V winning flag, the process proceeds to S224.

  In S223, the V winning flag is turned off. If this process ends, the process moves to S224.

  In S224, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time reduction counter is 1 or more. When the hourly number counter is 1 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S225. When the time reduction counter is not 1 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S228. After the “big hit” from the “normal game state”, 0 is set in the hour / minute counter in S216. Therefore, in S224, the hour / times counter counts the number of “hour / short game” times 0. Move processing to.

  In S225, the main CPU 71 adds 1 to the time reduction counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S226.

  In S226, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the time reduction counter is 100 or more. If the main CPU 71 determines that the hourly number counter is 100 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S227. If the main CPU 71 determines that the time-count counter is not 100 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S228. In S226, for example, it is determined that the time-count counter is 100 or more, and if “per V” is not reached during the “time-short game” 100 times, the process proceeds to S227.

  In S227, the time-count counter and the time-continuous counter are cleared and the time flag is turned off (cleared). If this process ends, the process moves to S228.

  In S228, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 73 as a control state flag. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[System timer interrupt processing]
Even when the main CPU 71 is executing the main process, the main CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute the system timer interrupt process. The system timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  In S231, a register saving process is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing for saving registers. If this process ends, the process moves to S232.

  In S232, timer update processing is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S233.

  In S233, the clear data is set to the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets clear data in the watchdog output data. Further, the main CPU 71 transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 75 (see FIG. 33). The initial reset circuit 75 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 msec) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 75 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 75 is cleared, the main CPU 71 A system reset signal is output. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 75, the main CPU 71 enters a system reset state. If this process ends, the process moves to S234.

  In S234, random number update processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 71 updates random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number counter, a reach determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect selection random number counter. Note that the jackpot determination random number counter and the reach determination random number counter are not fair if the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Updates are made. If this process ends, the process moves to S235.

  In S235, switch input processing is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not there is an input to the switch. For example, the main CPU 71 includes the count switch 54c and the count switch 53c provided in the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53, the general winning ball switches 51a and 52a provided in the general winning ports 51 and 52, and the like. , A passing ball switch 43a provided in the ball passage detector 43, a first starting port winning ball switch 44a and a second starting port winning ball switch 45a provided in the first start port 44 and the second start port 45, By receiving a detection signal from the V winning opening winning ball switch 57c provided in the V winning opening 57, it is determined whether each switch has detected a game ball. When the main CPU 71 determines that it has been detected, the main CPU 71 updates a prize winning counter ball counter, a general winning prize ball counter, a starting prize ball counter, a V prize ball counter, and the like according to the detection. Details of the switch input processing will be described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S236.

  In S236, a movable member control process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 controls the movable member 57a. Details of this control will be described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S237.

  In S237, a register restoration process is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register to the address before the interrupt processing. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Switch input processing]
The switch input process in S235 shown in FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S241, a prize ball related switch check process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there are inputs from the count switches 54c and 53c, the general winning ball switches 51a and 52a, the first starting port winning ball switch 44a and the second starting port winning ball switch 45a, in other words, the game ball. Whether or not is detected is determined. When the main CPU 71 determines that there is an input from the count switches 54c and 53c, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the big prize winning ball counter, and the general winning ball switches 51a and 52a are input. If it is determined, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter is performed, and if it is determined that there is an input from the first starting opening prize ball switch 44a and the second starting opening prize ball switch 45a, A process of adding 1 to the value of the starting opening prize ball counter is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S242.

  In S242, a special symbol related switch check process is performed. The special symbol related switch check process will be described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S243.

  In S243, normal symbol related switch check processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input from the passing ball switch 43a, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected. 4), and if it is determined that the upper limit is reached, this subroutine is terminated. When it is not determined that the upper limit is reached, a hit determination random number value is extracted from the hit determination random number counter of the normal symbol game, and a hit determination random number value is extracted from the hit determination random number counter. The process of storing in the normal symbol storage area is performed. If this process ends, if this process ends, the process moves to S244.

  In S244, a V switch check process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input from the V winning opening winning ball switch 57c, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected. If it is determined that there is an input, the main CPU 71 sets a V winning flag. Process to turn on. When this processing is completed, in the first embodiment, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is on only at the “small hit”, and at other times, even if the V winning flag is on. It is cleared in the special symbol game end process 00H (see FIG. 46). If this process ends, the process moves to S245.

  In S245, an abnormality-related switch check process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the abnormality-related switch, for example, whether or not it is detected that the open / close switch of the glass door 11 is opened and the glass door 11 is opened. Further, for example, it is determined whether or not a signal from the count switch 54c is detected in a state where the signal indicating that the first big prize winning device 54 is operating is not transmitted. When an abnormality is detected, a process for notifying the abnormality is performed, and when no abnormality is detected, this subroutine is terminated as it is.

[Special design related switch check processing]
The special symbol related switch check process of S242 shown in FIG. 60 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S251, a process for determining whether or not a start winning to the first start port 44 is detected is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input from the first start opening winning ball switch 44a. If it is determined that there is an input from the first start port winning ball switch 44a, the process proceeds to S252. If it is not determined that there is an input from the first start port winning ball switch 44a, the process proceeds to S257.

  In S252, processing for determining whether or not the start memory of the first special symbol is 4 or more is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the start storage of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the reserved number is 4 or more, the present subroutine is terminated. If it is determined that the reserved number is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S253.

  In S253, 1 is added to the start memory of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the number of reserved symbols in the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S254.

  In S254, various random value acquisition processing is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts the jackpot determination random number value of the special symbol game from the jackpot determination random number counter (so-called special symbol lottery), and further extracts the reach determination random number value from the reach determination random number counter. The effect selection random number value is extracted from the effect selection random number counter and stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 73. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the first special symbol start storage area (0). The determination result based on the hit determination random number stored in is derived and displayed by a special symbol, and various random number values acquired by starting winning during the variation of the special symbol are the first special symbol starting storage area (1). To the first special symbol start storage area (4). If this process ends, the process moves to S255.

  In S255, a winning effect determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to win a prize based on random lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S256.

  In S <b> 256, the main CPU 71 sets the first start port winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The first start opening prize command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 200 confirms that the first start opening prize has been received or the winning lottery result is determined. Will come to recognize. The data of the first start opening prize command includes data for executing an effect such as changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed in the effect display, for example, when it is determined that the winning effect is determined in the process of S255. . As a result, a so-called “prefetching effect”, which is a well-known technique, is performed such that the effect is executed based on the startup storage information before the change is executed. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S257, processing for determining whether or not a start winning to the second start opening 45 is detected is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input from the second start opening winning ball switch 45a. If it is determined that there is an input from the second start port winning ball switch 45a, the process proceeds to S258, and if it is not determined that there is an input from the second start port winning ball switch 45a, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S258, a process for determining whether the start memory of the second special symbol is 4 or more is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the second special symbol is started and stored, that is, whether or not the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the reserved number is 4 or more, the present subroutine is terminated. If it is determined that the reserved number is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S259.

  In S259, a process of adding 1 to the start memory of the second special symbol is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the number of reserved symbols in the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 73. When this process ends, the process of S260 is moved.

  In S260, various random value acquisition processing is performed. In this processing, the main CPU 71 extracts a jackpot determination random number for the special symbol game from the jackpot determination random number counter (so-called special symbol lottery), and further extracts a reach determination random number value from the reach determination random number counter. The effect selection random number value is extracted from the effect selection random number counter and stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 73. In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the second special symbol start storage area (0). The determination result based on the jackpot determination random number stored in is derived and displayed by a special symbol, and various random number values acquired by winning a start during the variation of the special symbol are the second special symbol start storage area (1) to The second special symbol start storage area (4) is stored in order. If this process ends, the process moves to S261.

  In S261, a winning effect determination process is performed. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a winning effect is to be performed. When it is determined that the winning effect is to be achieved, winning effect command data for executing the winning effect, for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved ball displayed for the effect is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The winning effect command data is supplied as a winning effect command to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the contents of the winning effect. As a result, a so-called “prefetching effect” in which an effect is executed based on the start-up memory information before the change is executed becomes possible. If this process ends, the process moves to S262.

  In S <b> 262, the main CPU 71 sets the second start port winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The second start opening prize command is supplied to the sub control circuit 200 under the control of the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 200 has received the second start opening prize and whether or not the winning lottery result has been determined. Will come to recognize. The data of the second start opening winning command includes data for executing the winning effect, for example, changing the display mode of the reserved ball to be displayed when the winning effect is determined in the process of S261. . As a result, a so-called “prefetching effect” in which an effect is executed based on the start-up memory information before the change is executed becomes possible. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In the present embodiment, although not shown, various commands set in the main RAM 73 of the main control circuit 70 are supplied to the sub-control circuit 200 in each process of the main control circuit 70.

[Moving member control processing]
The movable member control process of S236 shown in FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in S271, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the small hitting process. If it is determined that the control status flag is a value (04H) indicating the small hitting process, the process proceeds to S272. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the small hitting process, the process proceeds to S274.

  In S272, a process of determining whether or not there is a moving flag indicating that the movable member 57a is operating is performed. In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that there is a moving flag, the main CPU 71 ends this subroutine, and when it determines that there is no moving flag, the process proceeds to S273.

  In S273, the movable member 57a is started to operate and the movable flag is turned on. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S274, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the post-small hit end process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the post-small hit end process, the process proceeds to S275. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the post-hit end post-processing, the process proceeds to S277.

  In S275, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the small ball end time residual ball monitoring time is zero. If the main CPU 71 determines that the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 0, the process proceeds to S276. When it is determined that the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is not 0, this subroutine is terminated. In Embodiment 1, the remaining ball monitoring time at the end of the small hit is 5000 msec, and “V winning” is effective until 5000 msec elapses, so that the movable member can also move.

  In S276, the main CPU 71 stops the operation of the movable member 57a and turns off the movable flag. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished. In the first embodiment, when the small hitting end residual ball monitoring time of 5000 msec elapses, the movable flag is turned off, and the “small hit gaming state” ends.

  In S277, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special winning opening opening process. If it is determined that the control status flag is a value (07H) indicating the big prize opening process, the process proceeds to S278. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the big prize opening process, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S278, the main CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a movable flag. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that there is no moving flag, the main CPU 71 ends the present subroutine. If it determines that there is a moving flag, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S279. If the “small winning” is “V winning”, since the movable flag is on, the process proceeds to S279, and if it is merely “big winning”, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S279, the main CPU 71 performs a process of stopping the operation of the movable member 57a and turning off the movable flag. That is, in the “hit game”, the movable member 57a does not need to operate. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Description of sub-control circuit operation]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 80.

[Sub control main process]
The sub control main process will be described with reference to FIG. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands from the main control circuit 70 and performs various processes such as a display process. Among these processes, the control process according to the present invention will be described below.

  In step S1011, initialization processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs an initialization setting process in response to power-on. For example, the power ON flag is turned on. If this process ends, the process moves to S1012. This initialization process can also be performed according to the power on / off operation.

  In S1012, random number update processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the random number stored in the work RAM 203. If this process ends, the process moves to S1013.

  In S1013, command analysis processing is performed. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 70 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 210. This process will be described later. If this process ends, the process moves to S1014.

  In S1014, an effect control process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs effect control of the mini game using the effect button 23 and the like. Moreover, you may perform prefetch hold | maintain effect control regarding a hold ball, etc. by the above-mentioned so-called prefetch effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S1014.

  In S1015, display control processing is performed. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for display on the liquid crystal display device 13 to the display control circuit 205. In the display control circuit 205, the VDP (not shown) performs various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, effect image data based on data for displaying the effect image under the control of the sub CPU 201. Are read out from the image data ROM, superimposed and displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. If this process ends, the process moves to S1016.

  In S1016, a sound / lamp control process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 executes a sound control process for controlling sound generated from the speaker 11 and a lamp control process for controlling light emission of various lamps (not shown). When this process ends, the process is transferred again to the random number update process (S1012).

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even when the sub control main process shown in FIG. 63 is being executed, the sub control main process may be interrupted and the timer interrupt process may be executed. The timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  In S1021, processing for saving the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S1022.

  In S1022, timer update processing is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating a timer stored in the work RAM 210. Specifically, processing for updating a timer such as a round effect is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S1023.

  In S1023, an effect button switch input detection process is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of detecting whether or not the effect button switch 23a is input by operating the effect button 23. For example, an operation of the effect button 23 for selecting a character during the big hit game is detected. If this process ends, the process moves to S1024. The effect button switch input detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but other interrupts may be used. The lottery pattern of the navigation may be changed depending on the selected character. For example, the average number of navigation services provided may be changed depending on the selected character.

  In S1024, processing for restoring the register is performed. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for restoring the value saved in S1021 to each register. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even when the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 63 is being executed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and the command interrupt process may be executed. The command interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  In S1031, processing for saving the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S1032.

  In step S1032, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for storing the received command in the buffer. If this process ends, the process moves to S1033.

  In S1033, a process for restoring the register is performed. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the value saved in S1031 to each register. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Command analysis processing]
A subroutine (command analysis process) executed in S1013 of FIG. 63 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. FIG.

  In S1041, it is determined whether or not a command has been received. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is stored in a predetermined buffer, and if it is determined that there is a received command, the process proceeds to S1042, and the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a received command. If not, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S1042, it is determined whether or not the received command is a special symbol effect start command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a special symbol effect start command, it moves the process to S1043. If it does not determine that it is a special symbol effect start command, it moves the process to S1044.

  In step S1043, the sub CPU 201 performs a special symbol effect start command reception process. The special symbol effect start command includes data relating to the gaming state, the variation pattern, the special symbol, the remaining short times, the so-called navigation lottery, and the like. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1044, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the received command is a symbol stop command. If it is determined that the command is a symbol stop command, the process proceeds to S1045. If it is not determined that the command is a special symbol effect stop command, the process proceeds to S1046.

  In step S <b> 1045, the sub CPU 201 performs a symbol stop command reception process. For example, processing such as stopping the decorative symbol in synchronization with the stop of the special symbol under the control of the main control circuit 70 is performed. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1046, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the received command is a big hit start command. If it is determined that the command is a jackpot start command, the process proceeds to S1047. If it is not determined that the command is a jackpot start command, the process proceeds to S1048.

  In step S1047, the sub CPU 201 performs a big hit start command reception process. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1047, for example, in response to the jackpot start command, a mini-game or the like involving the operation of the effect button 23 by the player is executed before the “hit game” is started. Details will be described later.

  In step S1048, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the received command is a small hit start command. If it is determined that the command is a small hit start command, the process proceeds to S1049. If it is not determined that the command is a small hit start command, the process proceeds to S1050.

  In step S <b> 1049, the sub CPU 201 performs a small hitting start command reception process. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1050, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the received command is a start command per V. If it is determined that the command is per V, the process proceeds to S1051, and if it is not determined that the command is per V, the process proceeds to S1052.

  In step S1051, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for receiving a start command per V. In step S1051, for example, navigation subtraction processing is performed by executing navigation. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1052, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the received command is a small hit end command. If it is determined that the command is a small hit end command, the process proceeds to S1053, and if it is not determined that the command is a small hit end command, the process proceeds to S1054.

  In step S <b> 1053, the sub CPU 201 performs processing when a small hit end command is received. In S1053, for example, an effect according to whether or not the result when the navigation effect is executed is “per V” is performed. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S <b> 1054, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining whether or not the received command is a display command for opening a special prize opening. If it is determined that it is a display command for opening a big winning opening, the process proceeds to S1055, and if it is not determined that it is a display command for opening a large winning opening, the process proceeds to S1056.

  In step S <b> 1055, the sub CPU 201 performs processing upon reception of a display command for displaying a special winning opening. In S1055, for example, a process of displaying the result of the mini game displayed in S1047 is performed. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1056, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the received command is an inter-round display command. If it is determined that the command is an inter-round display command, the process proceeds to S1057. If it is not determined that the command is an inter-round display command, the process proceeds to S1058.

  In step S1057, the sub CPU 201 performs processing during reception of a round-to-round display command. The inter-round display command includes data related to effects between rounds. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S <b> 1058, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine whether the received command is an interval end display command per special symbol. If it is determined that it is an interval end display command per special symbol, the process proceeds to S1059. If it is not determined that it is an interval end display command per special symbol, the process proceeds to S1060.

  In step S1059, the sub CPU 201 performs a special symbol interval end display command reception process. In S1059, when the “time saving gaming state” in the set game reaches a predetermined number of times, processing such as so-called navigation lottery is performed. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1060, the sub CPU 201 performs processing upon reception of other commands. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Process when receiving special symbol effect start command]
The subroutine (special symbol effect start command reception process) executed in S1043 of FIG. 66 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 1061, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is “normal gaming state” or “time saving gaming state”. The “normal gaming state” means “normal gaming state (sub-subordinate state)” other than “first high probability state”, “second high probability state”, “third high probability state”, and “fourth high probability state”. ) ". If the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is “normal gaming state” or “time saving gaming state”, the process proceeds to S1062. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is “normal gaming state” or “time saving gaming state”, the process proceeds to S1063.

  In S <b> 1062, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining an effect in the “normal gaming state” or the “short-time gaming state”. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1063, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is the “first high probability state”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the “first high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1064. That is, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the first high probability state flag is on, the process proceeds to S1064. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the “first high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1065.

  In step S1064, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining an effect during the first high probability state. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1065, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is the “second high probability state”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the “second high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1066. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the “second high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1067.

  In step S1066, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining an effect during the second high probability state. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1067, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is the “third high probability state”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is the “third high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1068. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is the “third high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1069.

  In step S1068, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining an effect during the third high probability state. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1069, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining an effect during the fourth high probability state. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[During normal gaming state (sub) / time reduction effect determination processing]
68 will be described with reference to FIG. 69. The subroutine executed in S1062 of FIG. 68 (normal gaming state (sub) medium / short time effect determination process) will be described. The “normal gaming state” means “normal gaming state (sub-subordinate state)” other than “first high probability state”, “second high probability state”, “third high probability state”, and “fourth high probability state”. ) ".

  In S1071, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, when the variation pattern command is “83H00H” to “83H06H”, it is lost. Of these, the fluctuation pattern commands “83H02H” to “83H04H” are lost reach. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1072. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1084.

  In S1072, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the stop symbol and the effect content based on the variation pattern command. If this process ends, the process moves to S1073.

  In step S1073, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the above point addition effect is executed as described above with reference to FIG. If the sub CPU 201 determines to execute the point addition effect, the process proceeds to S1074. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the point addition effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to S1077.

  In step S <b> 1074, the sub CPU 201 adds points to a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. If this process ends, the process moves to S1075.

  In S1075, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the accumulated points are 100 points or more. The sub CPU 201 confirms and determines points accumulated in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the point is 100 points or more, the process proceeds to S1076. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the point is 100 points or more, the process proceeds to S1077.

  In S1076, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability flag and clears the accumulated points. Therefore, when the next game is performed, the state is shifted to the “first high probability state”. If this process ends, the process moves to S1077.

  In step S1077, the sub CPU 201 determines whether to execute a navigation acquisition effect. If it is determined that the sub CPU 201 executes the navigation acquisition effect, the process proceeds to S1078. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the navigation acquisition effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to S1079. Here, as described above, when the lost super reach B of the navigation acquisition effect content shown in FIG. 37 is selected, a lottery in which navigation is given with a probability of 1/10 in the “first high probability state” is performed. Therefore, if it is determined that the lose super reach B is selected and the navigation is given, in S1077, the sub CPU 201 determines to execute the navigation acquisition effect.

  In step S <b> 1078, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of navigation times (pieces) stored in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 to set a navigation acquisition effect. If this process ends, the process moves to a S1079.

  In S1079, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the game number counter. Note that the game number counter counts the number of times that the special symbol variation display is executed (the number of special symbol games). If this process ends, the process moves to S1080.

  In S1080, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of special symbol games counted as a reference for executing the ceiling lottery is the number of games for which a predetermined ceiling lottery as shown in FIG. 39 is performed. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of special symbol games is the number of times that the ceiling lottery is performed, the process proceeds to S1081. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of special symbol games is the number of times that the ceiling lottery is performed, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S1081, the sub CPU 201 executes a ceiling lottery process. Specifically, the ceiling lottery is executed based on the ceiling lottery table shown in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S1082.

  In S1082, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ceiling lottery executed in S1081 has been won. If it is determined that the sub CPU 201 has won the lottery, the process proceeds to S1083. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery has been won, the present subroutine is terminated.

  In step S1083, the sub CPU 201 sets a third high probability state flag, and clears the number of special symbol games counted as a reference for executing the ceiling lottery. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1084, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the lottery result is “small hit”. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, when the variation pattern command is “83H07H” to “83H14H”, it is “small hit”. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is “small hit”, the process proceeds to S1085. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is lost, the process proceeds to S1094.

  In step S1085, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the time is short (“short time gaming state”). If it is determined that the sub CPU 201 is in the “time saving gaming state”, the process proceeds to S1087. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the game is in the “short time gaming state”, the process proceeds to S1086.

  In S1086, the sub CPU 201 sets a special effect. In this case, since the “small hit” is won in spite of not being in the “short time gaming state”, the so-called resurgence effect described above may be performed. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1087, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the navigation suppression flag is off and the stored number of navigations is 1 or more. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the navigation suppression flag is off and the stored number of navigations is 1 or more, the process proceeds to S1089. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the navigation suppression flag is off and the stored number of navigations is 1 or more, the sub CPU 201 advances the processing to S1088.

  Here, the navigation suppression flag is a flag that is set when there is a possibility that the player is performing a so-called “combat strategy”. Specifically, as described above, the probability of entering the V winning opening 57 when entering the second grand prize winning device 53 is about 2/3. Further, in the first embodiment, the nail is arranged so that the winning rate to the second big winning device 53 is about 1/3 if it is normal right-handed, and the probability of “per V” is about 1/4. Therefore, it can be said that the expected degree of “per V” during the “short-time game” is played 50 times is 99.9%. Some skilled players perform “strategy” to operate the launch handle 25 so that the second starting port 45 does not win the game ball and the second starting port 45 won the game ball. Yes. By this “strategy hit”, a prize ball for winning a prize to the ball passage detector 43 can be obtained, and the number of game balls on hand can be increased. In order to suppress such capture, the navigation suppression flag is set when the “short time game” is performed for the 50th time or later. When the navigation suppression flag is set, navigation may be suppressed by preventing navigation from being executed even when navigation is provided or by subtracting the number of navigations. Moreover, it is good also as performing the production | presentation which urges | hangs to stop "strategy" instead of performing navigation.

  In S1088, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect corresponding to the case where there is no navigation. As an effect corresponding to the case where there is no navigation, for example, a common effect different from navigation may be stored in the program ROM 202. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

In S1089, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the time-saving game is 50 times. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the time-saving game is 50 times, it moves the process to S1090. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the time-saving game is 50 times, the process proceeds to S1091. Here, since it is extremely unlikely that the above-mentioned “capture” is not performed and “short-time game” has passed 50 times, the above-described determination is performed in S1089.
Also, even if you are not an expert, you can win more than 50 times per “V” because the special figure type has been won in small hits (2) -3 or small hits (2) -4 in a state where navigation is given. In this case, in order to avoid the “short-time gaming state” from ending without “per-V”, the navigation is suppressed when it is not “per-V” more than 50 times. Yes. At this time, it is determined whether or not navigation is provided, and the number of wins for the small hit (2) -1 or small hit (2) -2 in the meantime is confirmed. For example, the number of wins is 10 or less. In this case, it is possible to determine that it is not “per V” despite launching according to the navigation, and not giving a penalty when judging the strategy, instead of the strategy. Here, as a penalty, for example, all the stored navigation times may be deleted. Note that this determination criterion may be arbitrarily designed. Conversely, if the number of wins for the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2 is more than 10 times, it is determined that a strategy is being made and a penalty is given. Good.

  In step S1090, the sub CPU 201 sets a navigation suppression flag and sets an effect corresponding to the case where there is no navigation. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1091, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is a small hit (2) -1 or a small hit (2) -2. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2, the process moves to S1092. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2, the process proceeds to S1093.

  In S1092, the sub CPU 201 sets the launch navigation effect. The launch navigation effect is an effect that prompts the player to launch a game ball. The contents of this effect will be described later (see FIG. 81). When this launch navigation effect is performed, if it is “per V”, the counted number of navigations is subtracted. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1093, the sub CPU 201 sets a firing suppression navigation effect. The launch suppression navigation effect is an effect that causes the player to suppress the launch of the game ball. The contents of this effect will also be described later (see FIG. 82). When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1094, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (2) -1. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (2) -1, the process proceeds to S1095. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the figure is the special figure (2) -1, the process proceeds to S1096.

  In step S <b> 1095, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect depending on whether or not the “time saving gaming state” is set. For example, if it is not “short-time gaming state”, a so-called revival effect may be set. In the “short-time gaming state”, a special effect that is not a revival effect may be set. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1096, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the time is short (“short time gaming state”). Specifically, if it is determined that the sub CPU 201 is in the “time saving gaming state”, the process proceeds to S1097. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is in the “time saving gaming state”, the process proceeds to S1098.

  In step S <b> 1097, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect corresponding to the special figure type of special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -12. As shown in FIG. 38, this effect corresponds to the variation pattern commands “83H29H” to “83H40H”. Since this effect is related to the big hit in the short time, it may be an effect that shows that it is irregular. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1098, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -1. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern command is “83H15H”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1, the process proceeds to S1099. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1, the process proceeds to S1100.

  In step S1099, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative symbol is “777”, adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets a premium reach effect. In the first embodiment, the number of navigations is incremented by 3, but for example, all navigation flags may be set. In the set game, the navigation flag may be turned off until the “short time game” reaches a predetermined number of times, so that the number of times of navigation does not increase more than necessary. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1100, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -2. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern command is “83H16H” to “83H18H”. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of “short when there is a ball”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -2, it moves the process to S1101. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -2, the process proceeds to S1102.

  In step S <b> 1101, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach content and the decorative design by lottery according to the variation pattern command, and sets the effect. With reference to the jackpot navigation lottery table shown in FIG. 42, the jackpot navigation lottery is performed according to the character selected by the player. The navigation lottery timing will be described later. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1102, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern command is “83H19H” to “83H23H”. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of “short time when no balls appear”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure types are special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the process proceeds to S1103. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure types are special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the process proceeds to S1104.

  In step S <b> 1103, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach content and the decorative design by lottery according to the variation pattern command, and sets the effect. For example, an effect that informs that it is in the “time saving gaming state” at any timing is set. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1104, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure types are special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -11. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation pattern command is “83H24H” to “83H27H”. In other words, it is determined whether or not the “usually no ball appearance” big hit. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure types are special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -11, the process proceeds to S1105. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -11, that is, if it is determined that the special figure type is (1) -12, the process proceeds to S1106. Move.

  In step S <b> 1105, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach content and the decorative design by lottery according to the variation pattern command, and sets the effect. Further, the first high probability state flag is set. For example, it is set so as to display the contents of the effect informing the transition from the “normal gaming state” to the “first high probability state”. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

In step S1106, the sub CPU 201 determines whether there is a RAM clear flag. If the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a RAM clear flag, it moves the process to S1109. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the RAM clear flag exists, the process advances to step S1107. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the RAM clear flag is present, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery with a probability of 1/2, and the process proceeds to S1109 only when winning, and the process proceeds to S1107 when not winning. It is good as well. Thereby, the transition to the “fourth high probability state” becomes more difficult. Further, when the processing of S1106 is performed, the RAM clear flag may be turned off.
As described above, when the power ON flag is used as the condition for shifting to the “fourth high probability state” instead of the RAM clear flag, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the power ON flag exists in S1106. You can do that.

  In step S <b> 1107, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery process (fourth high probability state transition lottery) for shifting to the “fourth high probability state” described above. For example, the winning probability may be 1/10. If this process ends, the process moves to S1108.

  In S1108, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a lottery for shifting to the “fourth high probability state” has been won. If it is determined that the sub CPU 201 has won, the process proceeds to S1109. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it has won, the process moves to S1110.

  In step S <b> 1109, the sub CPU 201 sets a fourth high probability state flag and sets an effect indicating that a lottery for shifting to the “fourth high probability state” is won. For example, an image that gives an “all day navigation ticket” may be displayed. In addition, it is good also as not performing a 4th high probability state transfer lottery. In other words, it is possible to shift to the “fourth high probability state” only when the special figure (1) -12 is won with the RAM clear flag set. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1110, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect indicating that the lottery for shifting to the “fourth high probability state” has not been won. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Direction determination process during the first high probability state]
The subroutine (first high-probability state effect determination process) executed in S1064 of FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1121, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the sub CPU 201 has lost the lottery result. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1122. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is lost, the process proceeds to S1126.

  In S <b> 1122, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining a stop symbol and effect content based on the variation pattern command. Unlike the “normal gaming state” and the “second high probability state” in the “first high probability state”, no points are added. If this process ends, the process moves to S1123.

  In S1123, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of first high probability games. Note that the first high probability medium number of games, which is the number of games in the “first high probability state”, is stored in the work RAM 203. If this process ends, the process moves to S1124.

  In S1124, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of first high-probability games is 20. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of first high-probability games is 20, the process proceeds to S1125. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of first high probability games is 20, the present subroutine is terminated. In the first embodiment, the game is set to shift to the “second high probability state” when the number of games in the “first high probability state” reaches 20. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the number of games in the “first high probability state” is 20, the lottery may be performed so that the “first high probability state” falls into the “normal game state”.

  In S1125, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability state end effect and sets the second high probability state flag. Thus, after the “first high probability state” is completed, the “second high probability state” is obtained. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1126, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of “short when there is a ball”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2, the process proceeds to S1127. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2, the process proceeds to S1128. Here, the special figure (2) does not fluctuate. When it is determined that the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2, the game is in the “hit game state”, and then the “short-time game state” is entered. When the game has been performed a predetermined number of times (100 times), the state shifts to the “normal game state”.

  In S1127, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decoration symbol is “777” corresponding to the special figure (1) -1 or the special figure (1) -2, adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and 3 times in the set game. In both cases, the production is set as all navigations where navigation production is performed. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1128, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure types are special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of “short time when no balls appear”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure types are special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the process proceeds to S1129. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure types are special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the process proceeds to S1130.

  In S1129, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets a special effect as all the navigations described above. At this time, since there is no big hit, there is an effect that does not suggest a “big hit”. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1130, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability state continuation effect and clears the first high probability game count. In other words, if the special figure type is special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -12, that is, if it is a big hit of “normally without a ball”, the “first high probability state” is entered again. In addition, as an effect in this case, content suggesting that the “first high probability state” is continued is displayed. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Production decision processing during the second high probability state]
The subroutine (second high-probability state effect determination process) executed in S1066 of FIG. 68 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1141, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the sub CPU 201 has lost the lottery result. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1142. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1149.

  In step S1142, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining a stop symbol and effect content based on the variation pattern command. If this process ends, the process moves to S1143.

  In step S1143, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for adding points. This point addition is performed by referring to the point addition table shown in FIG. 40A and adding points according to the selected variation pattern. In the “second high probability state”, if the lottery result in S1141 is lost, points are always added. If this process ends, the process moves to S1144.

  In step S1144, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the accumulated points are 100 points or more. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the point is 100 points or more, the process proceeds to S1145. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the point is 100 points or more, the process proceeds to S1146.

  In step S1145, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability state flag and turns off the second high probability state flag. In addition, clear points. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished. Here, the points are cleared in the first embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, “−100” may be added without clearing the points to leave “0” or more points. Is possible.

  In S1146, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of games with the second high probability. Note that the second high-probability medium number of games, which is the number of games in the “second high-probability state”, is stored in the work RAM 203. If this process ends, the process moves to S1147.

  In S <b> 1147, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the second high probability game number is 10. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of games with the second high probability is 10, the process proceeds to S1148. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of second high-probability games is 10, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S1148, the sub CPU 201 sets the second high probability state end effect and turns off the second high probability state flag. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished. Thereby, after the “second high probability state” is completed, the state shifts to the “first high probability state”.

  In step S1149, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure types are special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not a big hit with a short time. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure types are special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -7, the process proceeds to S1150. This subroutine ends. The sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -7, that is, special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -12. The process moves to S1151. In the case of the special figure (1) -12, the process may be shifted to S1107.

  In S1150, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol and effect content based on the variation pattern command. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1151, the sub CPU 201 sets the first high probability state entry effect and sets the first high probability state flag. Specifically, the effect may be such that the transition to the first high probability state can be recognized. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Production decision processing during the third high probability state]
The subroutine executed in S1068 in FIG. 68 (third high-probability state effect determination process) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1161, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1162. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1163.

  In step S1162, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol and effect content based on the variation pattern command. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1163, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of “short when there is a ball”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2, the process proceeds to S1164. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2, the process proceeds to S1166. Note that the special figure (2) does not fluctuate.

  In step S1164, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative symbol is “777”, adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets the effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S1165.

  In S1165, the sub CPU 201 turns off the third high probability state flag. This subroutine ends. In this way, when a big hit with “short time” occurs, all the navigation states in which navigation is performed in the game at all times in the set game are entered. On the other hand, the ceiling state ends.

  In step S1166, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure types are special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of “short time when no balls appear”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure types are special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the process proceeds to S1167. When the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the special figure type is special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1). -12 is determined, and the process proceeds to S1169.

  In S1167, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of times of navigation and sets a special effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S1168.

  In S1168, the sub CPU 201 turns off the third high probability state flag. This subroutine ends. Here again, when a big hit with “short time” is reached, the entire navigation state in which navigation is performed in all the short time games in the set game is entered, while the ceiling state ends. The ceiling state may be terminated only when the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2.

  In S1169, the sub CPU 201 sets the third high probability state continuation effect. Here, it is determined to be a big hit without “short time”, and the ceiling state does not end. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Determination processing during the fourth high probability state]
The subroutine executed in S1069 of FIG. 68 (the fourth high-probability state effect determination process) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1171, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery result is lost. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1172. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the lottery result is a loss, the process proceeds to S1173.

  In S1172, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining a stop symbol and effect content based on the variation pattern command. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished. It should be noted that the “fourth high probability state” is cleared by performing initialization processing such as RAM clear and power OFF. Otherwise it will not be cleared.

  In S1173, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of “short when there is a ball”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2, the process proceeds to S1174. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2, the process proceeds to S1175. Here, the special figure (2) does not fluctuate.

  In step S <b> 1174, the sub CPU 201 determines that the decorative symbol is “777”, adds 3 to the number of times of navigation, and sets an effect. That is, a big hit with “short time” results in so-called all navigation, and this state does not end. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S <b> 1175, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure types are special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of “short time when no balls appear”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure types are special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the process proceeds to S1176. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -3 to special figure (1) -7, the process proceeds to S1177.

  In S1176, the sub CPU 201 adds 3 to the number of times of navigation and sets a special effect. Again, the entire navigation state does not end. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1177, the sub CPU 201 sets the fourth high probability state continuation effect. In this way, in the case of a big hit without “short time”, the “fourth high probability state” does not end. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Process when receiving jackpot start command]
The subroutine executed at S1047 in FIG. 66 (processing for receiving a big hit start command) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1181, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the gaming state is a hit in the “normal gaming state” or the “second high probability state”. Here, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of all the navigations. Here, the “normal gaming state” means “other than“ first high probability state ”,“ second high probability state ”,“ third high probability state ”, and“ fourth high probability state ”as described above. “Normal gaming state (sub)”. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the gaming state is a hit in the “normal gaming state” or the “second high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1182. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the gaming state is a hit in the “normal gaming state” or the “second high probability state”, the process moves to S1190 because it is a win for all navigation.

  In step S <b> 1182, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hit is a win given after a short time. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the time is given, the process proceeds to S1183. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the time is given, the process proceeds to S1189.

  In step S1183, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for obtaining a random value for navigation lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S1184.

  In step S <b> 1184, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hit is a “winning ball” hit. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in special figure (1) -1 or special figure (1) -2. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hit is a hit with “out of ball”, the process proceeds to S1185. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the hit is a hit with “out of ball”, the process proceeds to S1186.

  In S 1185, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect corresponding to the character selected by the player using the effect button 23. If no character is selected, an effect corresponding to the initially set character is set. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1186, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of executing a navigation lottery for acquiring a random number value by using a short navigation timeless lottery table as shown in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S1187.

  In S1187, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of adding the number of navigations based on the result of the navigation lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S1188.

  In S1188, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect based on the number of remaining navigations. For example, it may be an effect that draws a fortune drawn with the remaining number of times of navigation. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S <b> 1189, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect indicating that there is no time saving. For example, it may be a notification effect that draws a fortune written with a content that suggests shifting to the “first high probability state”. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S <b> 1190, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit in a short time. Here, the big hits in the short-term are either “5 round big hits by special figure (1) and special figure (2) or“ per V ”from small hits by special figure (2). Since a start command per V described later is transmitted, the big hit start command is not transmitted. Even in the case of per V, not a start command per V but a big hit start command may be transmitted. In that case, it is desirable to include the data indicating how the big hit was made in the big hit start command so that the big hit can be specified in the sub-board. Therefore, if the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a big hit of 5 rounds according to the special figure (1) and the special figure (2), it moves the process to S1191. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is a big hit during the “normal gaming state” and a big hit during the short time, the process proceeds to S 1192.

  In S 1191, the sub CPU 201 sets a short-time mid-big hit effect. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1192, the sub CPU 201 sets a big hit effect indicating that all navigations have been confirmed. Here, all navigation means that navigation is executed in all “time-short gaming states” during a set game, as described above. Details of this processing will be described later. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Process when start command is received per V]
A subroutine executed in S1051 in FIG. 66 (processing for receiving a start command per V) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1201, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect when hitting V. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect to be performed when the game ball wins the V winning opening 57 and becomes “per V”. For example, a fanfare image may be displayed.

  In step S1202, the sub CPU 201 determines whether navigation has been executed. If the sub CPU 201 determines that navigation has been executed, the process proceeds to S1203. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that navigation has been executed, the process proceeds to S1207.

  In step S1203, the sub CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the number of times of navigation. If this process ends, the process moves to S1204.

  In step S1204, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is V winning with the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2 as an opportunity. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is V winning with the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2 as an opportunity, that is, if it is determined to be “per V”, the process proceeds to S1205. Move. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is V winning with the small hit (2) -1 or the small hit (2) -2 as an opportunity, that is, if it is not determined that “per V”, the processing proceeds to S1206. Move processing to.

  In S1205, the sub CPU 201 sets a winning success effect. Specifically, the success effect is an effect that is performed when the 16R “big hit” is won by performing the launch operation according to the navigation. For example, an effect as shown in FIG. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1206, the sub CPU 201 sets an avoidance failure effect. Specifically, the avoidance failure effect is an effect that is performed when a 2R “big hit” is won by performing a launch operation that does not follow the navigation. For example, an effect as shown in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S1207.

  In step S <b> 1207, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is V winning with the small hit (2) -3 or the small hit (2) -4. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is V winning with the small hit (2) -3 or the small hit (2) -4 as an opportunity, that is, if it is determined to be “per V”, the process proceeds to S1208. Move. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is V winning with the small hit (2) -3 or the small hit (2) -4 as a trigger, that is, if it is not determined to be “per V”, Exit the subroutine.

  In S1208, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of times per 2R. The number of times per 2R is the number of times that two rounds of “big hit game” have been won. If this process ends, the process moves to S1209.

  In step S <b> 1209, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of times per 2R is 3 out of 3 times excluding the so-called initial hit in the set game. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the number of times per 2R is 3, the process proceeds to S1210. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the number of times per 2R is 3, this subroutine is terminated.

  In S1210, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the number of times of navigation and clears the number of times per 2R. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished. In the first embodiment, a winning failure effect can be set in S1205, and an avoidance success effect can be set in S1206. Of course, these effects can be set additionally.

[Processing when receiving a small hit end command]
A subroutine executed at S1053 in FIG. 67 (processing for receiving a small hit end command) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In S1221, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the launch navigation effect has been executed. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the launch navigation effect has been executed, the process proceeds to S1222. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the launch navigation effect has been executed, the process proceeds to S1223.

  In S1222, the sub CPU 201 sets a winning failure effect. The winning failure effect is an effect that is executed when “per hit V” is not performed despite the launch navigation effect being executed. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1223, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the firing suppression navigation effect has been executed. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the firing suppression navigation effect has been executed, the process proceeds to S1224. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the fire suppression navigation effect has been executed, the process proceeds to S1225.

  In step S1224, the sub CPU 201 sets an avoidance success effect. The successful avoidance effect is an effect that is executed when “per V” is not performed when the fire suppression navigation effect is executed. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S <b> 1225, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of notifying the result when the V winning slot 57 has been won. For example, if the player has won the V winning slot 57 and has won two rounds of “big hit game”, a notification may be given indicating that the player is good. Also, for example, if the player wins the V winning slot 57 and has won the 16-round “big hit game”, the player will be notified of the disappointment. That's fine. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished. In S1222, the winning success effect can be set, and the avoidance failure effect can be set in S1224. These effects can be additionally set.

  Therefore, when the launch navigation effect or the firing suppression effect set as advantageous information for the player is displayed, the result display indicates “successful winning effect”, “unsuccessful winning”, depending on whether or not “per V”. Among the “effects”, “avoidance success effects”, and “avoidance failure effects”, the corresponding effects are displayed.

[Process when receiving display command during opening of big prize opening]
A subroutine executed in S1055 of FIG. 67 (processing for receiving a display command during a special winning opening opening) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1231, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure type is special figure (1) -2. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the special figure type is special figure (1) -2, it moves the process to S1232. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the special figure type is special figure (1) -2, it moves the process to S1239.

  In S1232, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a big hit in the “normal gaming state” or the “second high probability state”. Here, “normal gaming state” means “normal gaming state” (sub-high probability state ”,“ second high probability state ”,“ third high probability state ”and“ fourth high probability state ”). ) ". If the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a big hit in the “normal gaming state” or the “second high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1233. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is a big hit in the “normal gaming state” or the “second high probability state”, the process proceeds to S1239.

  In S1233, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the first round of “big hit game” is being executed. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the first round of “big hit game” is being executed, the process proceeds to S1234. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that the first round of “big hit game” is being executed, the sub CPU 201 advances the process to step S1236.

  In S1234, the sub CPU 201 performs a big hit time navigation lottery based on the selected character and the navigation lottery random number using the big hit time navigation lottery table shown in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S1235.

  In S1235, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect based on the lottery result. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished. Here, for example, when the navigation is to be added in the navigation lottery, an effect such that the selected character wins in the battle game or the like is set. Such an effect is not necessarily performed in the first round, but can be set to be performed in an arbitrary round.

  In S1236, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a round for notifying the lottery result. If the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a round for notifying the lottery result, the process proceeds to S1237. In the first embodiment, the round for notifying the lottery result is 5 rounds, but is not limited to 5 rounds and may be other rounds. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is a round for notifying the lottery result, the process proceeds to S1238.

  In S1237, the sub CPU 201 sets a lottery result notification effect. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1238, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect according to the set effect. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1239, as in S1238, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect according to the set effect. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Processing upon receipt of interval end command per special symbol]
The subroutine executed in S1059 of FIG. 67 (processing for receiving an end-of-interval command per special symbol) will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S <b> 1241, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a “hit” that was won in a short time. If the sub CPU 201 determines that it is a “hit” that was won in a short time, the process proceeds to S1242. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is a “hit” that was won in a short time, the process moves to S1249.

  In S <b> 1242, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the last “time saving gaming state” in the set game. If the sub CPU 201 determines that it is the last “time saving gaming state” in the set game, the process proceeds to S1243. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 does not determine that it is the last “short-time gaming state” in the set game, the process proceeds to S1246.

  In S1243, the sub CPU 201 performs navigation lottery according to the number of “hit” by the special symbol game during the set game, using the set game end navigation lottery table shown in FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S1244.

In S1244, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect based on the lottery result. If this process ends, the process moves to S1245.
In S1245, the sub CPU 201 sets a game state to be shifted to after the set game ends. Specifically, when the game state before the transition to the set game is “first high probability state” to “third high probability state” and “normal game state (sub)”, “first high probability state” State "is set. If the gaming state before the transition to the set game is the “fourth high probability state”, the “fourth high probability state” is set.
In addition, even after the transition to the “third high probability state” which is the ceiling state, a predetermined number of games continue without winning the “big hit” in the special figure (1) -1 to the special figure (1) -7. If a ceiling lottery is performed each time, and this ceiling lottery is won, in a configuration in which “third high probability state” can be accumulated and stored, if “third high probability state” is accumulated, Then, after the set game is finished, the state is again shifted to the “third high probability state” (the “third high probability state” is set).

  In step S1246, the sub CPU 201 checks the number of navigations stored in the work RAM 203 and determines whether there is a remaining number. If the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a remaining number, it moves the process to S1247. If the sub CPU 201 does not determine that there is a remaining number, the process proceeds to S1248.

  In S1247, the sub CPU 201 sets the next navigation effect. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In step S1248, the sub CPU 201 sets the next no navigation effect. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

  In S1249, when the sub CPU 201 determines that it is not the big hit won during the “short-time gaming state”, the sub CPU 201 sets an effect according to the transition destination of the gaming state and the presence or absence of navigation. When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

[Example of production display]
An example of a navigation effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an effect per 16R of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment (see S1221 in FIG. 78). FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an effect per 2R of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment (see S1223 in FIG. 78).

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs navigation when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the set game. As described above, the navigation means “big hit” when “small hit” is won in the “short-time gaming state” and “second hit” is achieved in the open state of the second big winning device 53 due to this small hit. This is a notification that suggests the number of rounds of “game”.

  In the “short-time gaming state”, after the game ball wins the second start opening 45 and “small hit” is determined, the navigation is executed during the variable time. That is, the navigation is executed from several seconds before the change stop. The navigation may be displayed as an image in the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. First, referring to FIG. 81, an example of navigation in a case where “round hit game” of 16 rounds is performed when “per hit” is determined when “small hit” is won. Will be described. The special figure type at this time is small hit (2) -1 or small hit (2) -2.

  When “Small Win” is won, the launch navigation effect is executed before the blade member 53a of the second large winning device 53 operates. For example, an image is displayed in the display area 13a as shown in FIG. Specifically, a rifle sight and a bird can be seen through the sight, and an image in which the rifle is aimed at the bird are displayed. Then, the characters “Tit!” Are also displayed in the display area 13a. Thereby, the player can recognize that when “per V” is reached, “round hit game” of 16 rounds is performed.

  The player recognizes this image and continues to fire without stopping the game ball. At this time, when a game ball wins the V winning opening 57, a successful effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), an image as if a rifle bullet hit a bird is displayed. And the word “Accurate !!” is also displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that “round-hit game” of 16 rounds is started.

  In addition, if the game navigator does not win the V winning opening 57 in the “small hit game” even though the launch navigation effect is executed and the player has continued to fire the game ball, the failure effect is displayed. Executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (c), an image is displayed in which the bird moves away from the sight and escapes. Then, the character “Lose” is also displayed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 82, when “per hit V” is reached, two rounds of “big hit game” are performed when the “small hit” is determined. An example will be described. The special figure type at this time is small hit (2) -3 or small hit (2) -4.

  When “Small Win” is won, the firing suppression navigation effect is executed before the blade member 53a of the second large winning device 53 operates. For example, an image is displayed in the display area 13a as shown in FIG. Specifically, a rifle sight and an image in which a bomb is visible through the sight and the rifle is aimed at the bomb are displayed. The character “Do not hit!” Is also displayed in the display area 13a. As a result, the player can recognize that two rounds of “big hit game” are performed when “per V”.

  The player recognizes this image and stops the launch of the game ball. However, if the game ball cannot be stopped successfully, there is a possibility that the game ball will win the V winning opening 57. If a game ball wins the V winning opening 57, an avoidance failure effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), an image is displayed in which a rifle bullet hits a bomb and explodes. And the word “failure!” Is also displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the two-round “big hit game” is started.

  In addition, when the launch suppression navigation effect is executed and the player stops the game ball from being released, and the game ball can be avoided from winning the V winning opening 57, the avoidance success effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), an image is displayed in which the bomb is removed from the sight and disappears. And the word “danger avoidance” is also displayed.

  In addition, during a set game, there is a case where a “big hit” of 5 rounds is won by entering the first start port 44 or the second start port 45. Even in such a case, it is only necessary that an effect by an image is executed in the display area 13a. In such a case, although not shown, for example, in the display area 13a, a rifle sight and a bird can be seen through the sight, and an image of the bird hitting a tree and falling It should be displayed. Accordingly, the player can recognize that “round hit game” of 5 rounds is performed instead of “per hit V”.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a configuration in which the player is advantageous or disadvantageous according to the number of rounds of the big hit game. Notification (navigation) to suggest can be performed. Thereby, the player can play a game in an advantageous situation by recognizing the notification.
If no navigation is given, it is preferable that, for example, “?” Is displayed over the sight, so that it is not possible to know which round of “big hit game” will be based on “per V”. In addition, when “?” Is displayed over the sight, when “per V” is reached, if 16 rounds of “big hit game” is started, a bird is displayed and 2 rounds are displayed. When the “big hit game” is started, an explosion may be displayed to leave the result to the player.

[Various notification processing by payout control circuit]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the payout CPU 301 of the payout control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Power-on processing]
First, referring to FIG. 83, the power-on process by the payout CPU 301 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a procedure of power-on processing in the first embodiment. The power-on process is a process that starts when the power is turned on. When the power-on process is started, the payout CPU 301 first sets a stack pointer, an interrupt mode, and an interrupt vector.

  First, the payout CPU 301 performs an input / output port setting process (S301). Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not it is in a power interruption detection state (S302). In this process, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is at the H level (high level).

  In S302, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power interruption detection signal is at the H level (when S302 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the power interruption detection state is present, and performs the process of S302.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the power interruption detection signal is not at the H level in S302 (when S302 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that the power interruption detection state is not set, and performs the write permission process of the RAM 303. It performs (S303).

  In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs various initial setting processes such as a work area initialization process in the RAM 303 in addition to the write permission process in the RAM 303.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, that is, whether or not the backup clear switch 121 (see FIG. 33) is on (S304).

  In S304, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is on (when S304 is YES), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S310 described later.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S304 that the backup clear switch 121 is not on (when S304 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not there is a power interruption detection flag (S305). In this process, the payout CPU 301 checks the power interruption detection flag.

  In S305, when the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no power interruption detection flag (when S305 is NO), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S310 described later. On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S305 that there is a power failure detection flag (YES in S305), the payout CPU 301 calculates a work damage check value (S306). In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a damage check on the work area in the RAM 303 and calculates a work damage check value.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 executes error detection processing such as parity check or CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check), and uses the checksum obtained as the execution result as a work damage check value.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the work damage check value is normal (S307). In S307, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the work damage check value is not normal (when S305 is NO), the payout CPU 301 performs the process of S310 described later.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S307 that the work damage check value is normal (when S307 is YES), the payout CPU 301 performs initial processing at the time of power recovery (S308).

  That is, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the backup clear switch 121 is not on, the power interruption detection flag is present, and the work damage check value is normal, the payout CPU 301 is in a state before the power is turned off. It is determined that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be restored to the initial state, and an initial setting process at the time of power recovery is performed based on the data stored in the RAM 303.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs a collateral ball monitoring initial setting process (S309). In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs an initial setting for determining whether 15 game balls are secured in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B, respectively.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 sets initial values in the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B, respectively. In the first embodiment, the fall time of one game ball is 130 ms, and 1950 times corresponding to the fall time of 15 game balls of 1950 ms (= 130 ms × 15) is 1st and 2nd collateral ball counters 305A and 305B. The initial value of.

  Also, the payout CPU 301 sets initial values in the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B, respectively. In the first embodiment, based on the fall time 1950 ms (1950 times) of 15 game balls, 2000 ms is set as the time assumed that the collateral of 15 game balls is completed, and the first and second collateral ball timers 306A, The initial value is 306B.

  After the processing of S309, the payout CPU 301 returns the value of the program counter to the address before power interruption. Specifically, the payout CPU 301 ends the power-on process and continues to execute the program that was being executed when the power-on process was executed.

  If S304 is YES, S305 is NO, or S307 is NO, the payout CPU 301 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be returned to the state before the power is turned off. Execute the process when is entered.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 clears all work areas in the RAM 303 (S310), and performs initial processing when the power is turned on (S311). In this process, the payout CPU 301 resets the stop factor of overpayment and payout motor abnormality. At this time, the overpaid specified number (10) retry count, which will be described later, is also initialized.

  Further, in a state where a stop factor due to a ball breakage has occurred, a display by a payout state notification display device 178 described later is turned off for 2 seconds so as not to be affected by the accumulated state of the secured balls in the ball supply passage 171.

  Specifically, the payout state notification display device 178 indicates that when the predetermined initialization operation is performed when the drive of the payout motor 174 is stopped due to the above-described stop factor, 2 is a number of times until the determination of the ball break is completed. The determination result is not displayed for a second.

  Thereby, for example, it is determined that the ball has run out after a predetermined initialization operation, and when it is determined that the ball is normal, notification by the payout state notification display device 178 can be prevented from being performed. Thereby, unnecessary notification can be eliminated. Here, the predetermined initialization operation means that the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, for example.

  In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpay, or the work area of the error information part without turning on the power again. A work area including two, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs the aforementioned collateral ball monitoring initial setting process (S312) and executes the main process (S313).

  When the power is turned off, the use register, the interrupt state, and the stack pointer are saved, and the excitation data of the payout motor 174 is forcibly set to 0 and switched to a low current.

  If the power is interrupted during the payout operation, it may be assumed that the origin (the number of steps is a multiple of 4) is not assumed. Therefore, by forcibly setting the excitation data to 0, the game ball can fall freely during power interruption. To prevent. Alternatively, the game ball is forcibly dropped at the time of power interruption.

  When the game ball is forcibly dropped at the time of power interruption, the power interruption process may be waited or interrupted for a time required for the game ball to fall, and the execution period may be extended.

  Further, instead of forcibly dropping the game ball, it may be controlled so that the game ball falls freely. In this case, in order to take enough time to detect a free-falling game ball, the power interruption process may be waited or interrupted, and the execution period may be extended.

[Main processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the main process performed in S313 during the power-on process (see FIG. 83) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of main processing in the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the system timer of the payout CPU 301 is 4 or less (S321). In S321, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the system timer is not 4 or less (when S321 is NO), the payout CPU 301 returns the process to S321.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S321 that the system timer is 4 or less (when S321 is YES), the payout CPU 301 subtracts “4” from the system timer (S322). In this process, the payout CPU 301 initializes a system timer.

  That is, if the system timer is a timer that counts every 1 ms, the payout CPU 301 executes S321 and S322, thereby executing the processing of S323 and later described every 4 ms.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 updates the values of all timers used in the main process (S323). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a ball lending control process (S324). In this process, the payout CPU 301 receives a command for managing a game ball and creating a command to be transmitted to the card unit 150 and a command for lending a ball transmitted from the card unit 150 when the lending operation unit 151 is operated. When it does, it manages the number of game balls to rent out.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a prize ball control process (S325). In this process, the payout CPU 301 pays out when a game ball wins the first starting port 44, the second starting port 45, the general winning ports 51 and 52, the first big winning device 54 and the second big winning device 53. Manage the game balls to be released.

  Next, on the condition that an error has occurred in the payout control circuit 300, the payout CPU 301 controls the payout state notification display device 178 so that the payout control circuit 300 displays that an error has occurred (S326).

[System timer interrupt processing (1 ms)]
Next, system timer interrupt processing by the payout CPU 301 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of system timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 interrupts the main process at a predetermined cycle and executes the system timer interrupt process even during the execution of the main process shown in FIG.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 performs system timer interrupt processing in response to a clock pulse generated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 millisecond) from a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) in the payout control circuit 300. Run.

  First, the payout CPU 301 receives a detection command (signal) from the main control circuit 70 and various sensors, and executes a command reception process for analyzing the received command (S331).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 updates the values of all timers (for example, the first and second collateral ball timers 306A, 306B, etc.) used in the system timer interrupt process (S332). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a collateral ball presence detection process (see FIG. 86) described later (S333).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a collateral ball absence detection process (see FIG. 87) described later (S334). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 executes a counting switch detection process (see FIG. 88) described later (S335). Next, the payout CPU 301 executes a motor activation waiting process (see FIG. 89) described later (S336).

  Finally, the payout CPU 301 executes command transmission processing for sending a command indicating payout error information of the payout control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 70 (S337). For example, when a signal indicating that the lower pan is full is input from the lower pan full switch 179, the payout CPU 301 sends a payout error information command indicating that the lower pan is full to the main control circuit. 70.

  However, for a specified time immediately after power-on (for example, 6 seconds), since the main control circuit 70 holds the activation waiting time of the sub-control circuit 200, the payout error information until the main control circuit 70 becomes receivable. Do not send commands.

  Here, when the power is turned on, the history information regarding the payout error information is cleared. Moreover, even if the lower plate full state is canceled by discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 22 during power interruption, etc. before the power interruption, Information indicating that the full tank state has been canceled is not transmitted. However, the payout motor abnormality and the overpayout abnormality that are canceled when the power is turned on again are initialized when the power is restored.

[With collateral ball detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the collateral ball presence detection process performed in S333 during the system timer interruption process (see FIG. 85) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a collateral ball presence detection process in the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (S341). In S341, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (when S341 is YES), the payout CPU 301 receives the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. If it is determined that replenishment is not necessary, the process proceeds to S347.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S341 that the value of the first secured ball counter 305A is not 0 (when S341 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the ON state (S342).

  In S342, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is not in the ON state (when S342 is NO), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number (first embodiment) in the first ball supply passage 171A. In 1, it is determined that 15 gaming balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no collateral ball, and the process proceeds to S347.

  On the other hand, in S342, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the ON state (when S342 is YES), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number in the first ball supply passage 171A. In the first embodiment, 15 game balls are accumulated, that is, it is determined that there is a collateral ball, and the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is decremented by “1” (S343).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (S344). In S344, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is not 0 (when S344 is NO), the payout CPU 301 supplies game balls to the first ball supply passage 171A. Is determined to be necessary, and the process proceeds to S347.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S344 that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (when S344 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays the game to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that it is not necessary to supply the ball, and 1 is set to the first falling ball check flag (S345).

  Here, the first falling ball confirmation flag is set to “1” when it is not necessary to supply the game ball to the first ball supply passage 171A, that is, when there is a collateral ball, the first ball supply passage This flag is set to “0” when a game ball needs to be supplied to 171A, that is, when there is no collateral ball.

Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 0 to the first stop factor flag (S346). Here, the first stop factor flag is a flag that is set to “0” or “1” depending on whether or not there is a factor (stop factor) that stops payout of the game ball by the prize ball case unit 170. In particular, regarding the payout of game balls accumulated (collateralized) in the first ball supply passage 171A, a flag that is set to “1” when there is a stop factor and set to “0” when there is no stop factor It is.

  In the process of S346, it is determined in S344 that the supply of game balls to the first ball supply passage 171A is completed and a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) is accumulated. Therefore, 0 is set to the first stop factor flag in order to release the ball break that is the stop factor. In addition, as a stop factor, although mentioned later, there are various stop factors other than the ball break. Here, as an example, a broken ball is cited.

Next, when S341 is YES, S342 is NO, or S344 is NO, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (S347). ).

  In S347, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (when S347 is YES), the payout CPU 301 receives the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that replenishment is not necessary, and the collateral ball presence detection process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S347 that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is not 0 (when S347 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the ON state (S348).

  In S348, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is not in the ON state (when S348 is NO), the payout CPU 301 sets a predetermined number (second embodiment) in the second ball supply passage 171B. In 1, it is determined that 15 game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no collateral ball, and the collateral ball presence detection process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in S348, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the ON state (when S348 is YES), the payout CPU 301 has a predetermined number in the second ball supply passage 171B. (In the first embodiment, 15) game balls are accumulated, that is, it is determined that there is a collateral ball, and the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is decremented by “1” (S349).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (S350). In S350, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is not 0 (when S350 is NO), the payout CPU 301 supplies the game balls to the second ball supply passage 171B. Is determined to be necessary, and the collateral ball presence detection process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S350 that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (when S350 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays the game to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that it is not necessary to supply the ball, and 1 is set to the second falling ball confirmation flag (S351).

  Here, the second falling ball confirmation flag is set to “1” when it is not necessary to supply the game ball to the second ball supply passage 171B, that is, when there is a collateral ball, the second ball supply passage This flag is set to “0” when a game ball needs to be supplied to 171B, that is, when there is no collateral ball.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the second stop factor flag to 0 (S352), and ends the collateral ball detection process. Here, the second stop factor flag is a flag that is set to “0” or “1” depending on whether or not there is a factor (stop factor) that stops payout of the game ball by the prize ball case unit 170. In particular, regarding the payout of game balls accumulated (collateralized) in the second ball supply passage 171B, a flag that is set to “1” when there is a stop factor and set to “0” when there is no stop factor It is.

  In the process of S352, it is determined in S350 that the supply of game balls to the second ball supply passage 171B has been completed and a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of game balls has been accumulated. Therefore, 0 is set to the second stop factor flag in order to release the ball break that is the stop factor.

  In this way, in the collateral ball detection process, the collateral ball counter and the 15-ball collateral switch are used to determine whether or not there is a collateral ball, whether to replenish the game ball, and the stop factor (payout motor, sprocket, or payout). Since it is possible to determine whether or not to cancel, it is possible to more accurately manage the collateral balls in the payout.

[Non-secured ball detection process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the detection process without a secured ball performed in S334 during the system timer interruption process (see FIG. 85) will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a no-secured-ball detection process in the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A is 0 (S361). In S361, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A is not 0 (when S361 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is replenishing the first ball supply passage 171A. Is determined, and the process proceeds to S371.

  On the other hand, in S361, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A is 0 (when S361 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays the game to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that the replenishment of the ball has been completed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (S362).

  In S362, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 (when S362 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets a predetermined number (implementation) in the first ball supply passage 171A. In form 1, it is determined that 15 game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a collateral ball, and it is determined whether or not the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the OFF state (S363).

  Here, in S361 and S362, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” every time the system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 85 is performed every 1 ms, that is, the updated value of the first collateral ball timer 306A and the collateral In S343 of the ball presence detection process (see FIG. 86), “1” is subtracted, that is, the updated value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is compared, and based on the comparison result, the game balls of the first sprocket 173A are It is determined whether or not the payout is prohibited.

  For example, when S361 is YES and S362 is YES, both the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A and the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A are 0 as predetermined values. Therefore, when 2000 ms which is the initial value of the first collateral ball timer 306A set as a time sufficient for paying out 15 game balls from the ball tank 161 has elapsed, the first collateral ball counter The initial value of 305A, 1950 times (1950 ms), has elapsed.

  The initial value 1950 times (1950 ms) of the first collateral ball counter 305A is a value that is not subtracted unless the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A detects a game ball, so when 2000 ms elapses (0 15) (1950 ms), which is the initial value of the first collateral ball counter 305A, is 0, so that 15 game balls are supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is guaranteed.

  On the other hand, if S361 is YES and S362 is NO, the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A becomes 0 when the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A becomes 0. It will not be.

  That is, when 2000 ms, which is the initial value of the first collateral ball timer 306A, has elapsed, 1950 times (1950 ms), which is the initial value of the first collateral ball counter 305A, has not elapsed. Accordingly, it can be estimated that there was a time when the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A did not detect the game ball until 2000 ms elapsed, that is, there was a time when the supply of the game ball was interrupted. Therefore, when S361 is YES and S362 is NO, it is determined that 15 game balls are not supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A.

  The payout CPU 301 that performs processing for comparing the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A and the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A constitutes a determination unit.

  Next, in S363, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is not in the OFF state (when S363 is NO), the payout CPU 301 includes 15 pieces in the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that game balls are being supplied, and the process proceeds to S371.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S363 that the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is in the OFF state (when S363 is YES), the payout CPU 301 once in S361 and S362 described above. Although it is guaranteed that 15 game balls are supplied to one ball supply passage 171A, for some reason, 15 game balls are not supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A. It is determined that there is no collateral ball, and 0 is set to the first falling ball confirmation flag (S364).

  Here, as a factor determined as YES in S363, for example, a case where game balls are paid out excessively due to a malfunction of the first sprocket 173A or the payout motor 174, or the like can be cited. At this time, the payout of game balls by the first sprocket 173A is prohibited.

  Here, when the game balls are paid out excessively, for example, as a result of excessive rotation of the first sprocket 173A, the number of game balls supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A is changed from 15 to 14. The first 15-ball collateral switch 172A detects that the game ball supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A is reduced and moved in the direction of the first sprocket 173A. This is a case where the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A is turned off because the game ball also moves in the direction of the first sprocket 173A.

  That is, the payout CPU 301 pays out the game ball by the first sprocket 173A even if the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is 0 when the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A is 0. If a game ball has not been detected by the first 15-ball collateral switch 172A before, the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A through the driving of the payout motor 174 is prohibited.

  In this manner, the payout CPU 301 can grasp whether or not there is a game ball replenished in the first ball supply passage 171A, so that payout management can be performed more accurately.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 2 seconds (2000 ms) as the monitoring time for the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the first collateral ball timer 306A (S365). In addition, when 2000 ms set here elapses, it is determined that there is a stop factor, and the payout state notification display device 178 notifies the user.

  Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 sets 1950 times (1950 ms) as the number of times of monitoring of the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the first collateral ball counter 305A (S366), and moves the process to S371.

  On the other hand, in S362, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is not 0 (when S362 is NO), the payout CPU 301 enters the first ball supply passage 171A with a predetermined number ( In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15 game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no collateral ball, and 1 is set to the first stop factor flag (S367).

  In this process, as described above, since it has been determined in S361 and S362 that 15 game balls are not supplied to the first ball supply passage 171A, the first sprocket 173A is prohibited from paying out the game balls. 1 is set to the first stop factor flag.

  In other words, when the value of the first collateral ball timer 306A is 0 and the value of the first collateral ball counter 305A is not 0, the payout CPU 301 uses the first sprocket 173A through the driving of the payout motor 174. Dispensing of game balls is prohibited.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 1 to the origin adjustment flag (S368), and moves the process to S371. In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a process for requesting the origin adjustment control of the first sprocket 173A.

  Here, the origin of the first sprocket 173A is a rotational position (drive position) at which the game ball can be paid out to the first payout passage 180A when the first sprocket 173A is rotated. In the first embodiment, the number of steps of the dispensing motor 174 is controlled based on this origin.

  When the first sprocket 173A stops based on some stop factor (such as “error related to payout” described later), the first sprocket 173A has an index for detecting the position of the position detection sensor (for example, the first sprocket 173A). ) Is not provided, the current rotational position (driving position) is unknown, that is, it is unknown how many steps the dispensing motor 174 is driven with respect to the origin, so the first sprocket 173A The origin may also be unknown.

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the first sprocket 173A stops based on a stop factor, that is, when the origin adjustment flag is set to 1, origin adjustment control for grasping the origin of the first sprocket 173A. Is done. That is, the payout CPU 301 performs the origin adjustment control when it is determined that the game ball payout is prohibited as described above. The same applies to retry control to be described later.

  Thus, by performing the origin adjustment control, it is possible to adjust the origin position of the sprocket 173. For example, even a dispensing device using a sprocket 173 that does not include a position detection sensor accurately dispenses. Can be performed.

  In the first embodiment, the dispensing device in which the position detection sensor is not provided in the sprocket 173 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even a dispensing device in which the position detection sensor is provided in the sprocket is possible. By performing the origin adjustment control, it becomes possible to more accurately manage the position of the sprocket and the payout, so that the payout can be performed more accurately.

  The origin adjustment flag is set according to whether or not the origin adjustment control is requested. When the origin adjustment control is requested, it is set to “1”, and when the origin adjustment control is not requested. This flag is set to “0”.

  Specifically, the payout CPU 301 drives the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (four steps in the first embodiment) until a game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A. Here, the unit drive amount (four steps in the first embodiment) is smaller than a payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment) described later.

  Furthermore, the unit drive amount (four steps in the first embodiment) is a drive amount obtained by dividing the payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment), which will be described later, into four times (the number of origin request retries described later) as a specific number. It is.

  The origin adjustment control is common to retry control described later. Therefore, also in the retry control, the payout CPU 301 drives the payout motor 174 by a unit drive amount (four steps in the first embodiment) until a game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A. Details will be described later. The payout CPU 301 that controls the driving of the payout motor 174 constitutes control means and drive control means.

  Here, in S367 described above, 1 is set to the first stop factor flag so as to prohibit the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A, but when the origin adjustment control is required as described above. The origin adjustment cannot be made unless the game balls are allowed to be dispensed by the first sprocket 173A.

  The same applies to retry control. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 permits the payout of game balls on the condition that the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed even if it is determined that the payout of game balls is prohibited. Thus, it is possible to prevent the origin adjustment control (retry control) from being disabled due to the prohibition of game ball payout.

  Next, when S361 is NO, when S363 is NO, or after the end of S366 or after the end of S368, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B is 0 or not. It discriminate | determines (S371).

  In S371, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B is not 0 (when S371 is NO), the payout CPU 301 is supplying game balls to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is judged that it is, and the detection process without a security ball is ended.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S371 that the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B is 0 (when S371 is YES), the payout CPU 301 plays the game to the second ball supply passage 171B. It is determined that the replenishment of the ball has been completed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (S372).

  In S372, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 (when S372 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets a predetermined number (implementation) in the second ball supply passage 171B. In form 1, it is determined that 15 game balls are accumulated, that is, there is a collateral ball, and it is determined whether or not the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the OFF state (S373).

  Here, since it is the same as the determination whether to prohibit the payout of the game ball by the first sprocket 173A described above, the determination as to whether or not the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B is prohibited is the same. Description is omitted. The payout CPU 301 that performs processing for comparing the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B and the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B constitutes a determination unit.

  Next, in S373, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is not in the OFF state (when S373 is NO), the payout CPU 301 includes 15 pieces in the second ball supply passage 171B. The game ball is determined to be replenished, and the collateral ball absence detection process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S373 that the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B is in the OFF state (if S373 is YES), the payout CPU 301 once in the above-described S371 and S372 Although it is guaranteed that 15 game balls are supplied to the second ball supply passage 171B, 15 game balls are not supplied to the second ball supply passage 171B for some reason. It is determined that there is no collateral ball, and 0 is set to the second falling ball confirmation flag (S374).

  Here, as a factor determined as YES in S373, for example, a case where game balls are paid out excessively due to a malfunction of the second sprocket 173B or the payout motor 174, or the like can be cited. At this time, the payout of the game ball by the second sprocket 173B is prohibited.

  In other words, the payout CPU 301 pays out the game ball by the second sprocket 173B even if the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is 0 when the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B is 0. If no game ball is detected by the second 15-ball collateral switch 172B before the game is performed, the second sprocket 173B is prohibited from being paid out by driving the payout motor 174.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets 2 seconds (2000 ms) as the monitoring time of the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the second collateral ball timer 306B (S375). In addition, when 2000 ms set here elapses, it is determined that there is a stop factor, and the payout state notification display device 178 notifies the user.

  Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 sets 1950 times (1950 ms) as the number of times of monitoring of the idle state of the payout motor 174 in the second collateral ball counter 305B (S376), and ends the no collateral ball detection process.

  On the other hand, in S372, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is not 0 (when S372 is NO), the payout CPU 301 enters the second ball supply passage 171B with a predetermined number ( In the first embodiment, it is determined that 15 game balls are not accumulated, that is, there is no collateral ball, and 1 is set to the second stop factor flag (S377).

  In this process, as described above, it is determined in S371 and S372 that 15 game balls are not replenished in the second ball supply passage 171B, so that the second sprocket 173B is prohibited from paying out the game balls. , 1 is set to the second stop factor flag.

  In other words, when the value of the second collateral ball counter 305B is not 0 when the value of the second collateral ball timer 306B is 0, the payout CPU 301 uses the second sprocket 173B through the driving of the payout motor 174. Dispensing of game balls is prohibited.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 1 (S378), and ends the collateralless detection process. In this process, the payout CPU 301 performs a process for requesting the origin adjustment control of the second sprocket 173B. Here, since the origin adjustment control of the second sprocket 173B is the same as the origin adjustment control of the first sprocket 173A, description thereof is omitted.

[Counting switch detection processing]
Next, the count switch detection process performed in S335 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a counting switch detection process in the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B detects the passage of a game ball (S381). In S381, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B has not detected the passage of the game ball (when S381 is NO), the payout CPU 301 The detection process ends.

  Here, when the origin adjustment control is being performed, the game ball is not yet detected by the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B, and therefore S381 is NO.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S381 that the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B has detected the passing of the game ball (when S381 is YES), the payout CPU 301 It is determined that the game ball has been paid out by the sprocket 173A or the second sprocket 173B, and “1” is subtracted from the payout request number (S382).

  At this time, the payout CPU 301 can count the number of game balls detected by the first counting switch 181A and the second counting switch 181B. Therefore, the payout CPU 301 constitutes counting means.

  Here, the requested number of payouts refers to winning ball control commands and lending transmitted from the main control circuit 70 based on the winning of gaming machines and lending of gaming balls to various starting ports and various winning ports, and received by the payout control circuit 300. Based on the ball control signal, it is a value obtained by sequentially adding the number of prize balls or the number of lent balls, and is the total number of game balls to be paid out by the prize ball case unit 170 (total amount of payout).

  The number of requested payouts is stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. The number of prize balls and the number of rented balls described above correspond to the payout amount. The RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300 constitutes payout storage means. Further, the payout request number is subtracted by paying out the game balls.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the requested drop number (S383). Here, the requested drop number is determined as the number of game balls to be paid out by one driving of the payout motor 174 based on the payout request number (total payout amount) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. The maximum number is 15.

  For example, if the number of payout requests (total amount of payout) is 15 or more, the number of drop requests is 15, and if the number of payout requests (total amount of payout) is 14 or less, the number of drop requests is The number is equal to the stored number of payout requests.

  Also, the drop request number is determined by the payout CPU 301 in accordance with the payout request number (total payout amount). Note that the number of drop requests corresponds to the separation payout amount. Also, the payout CPU 301 corresponds to a divided payout amount determination unit.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S384). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S384 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (when S384 is NO), the payout CPU 301 moves the process to S387.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 in S384 (when S384 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S385).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets an origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S386). Here, the origin adjustment completion flag is a flag for determining whether the origin adjustment control is being performed or whether the origin adjustment control is being completed. When the origin adjustment control is being performed, the flag is set to “0” and the origin adjustment control is completed. This flag is set to “1”.

  Next, when S364 is NO or after the completion of S386, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of drop requests is less than 0 (S387). In S387, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of drop requests is not less than 0 (when S387 is NO), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

  On the other hand, in S387, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the requested drop number is less than 0 (when S387 is YES), the payout CPU 301 has an excess of game balls actually paid out with respect to the requested drop number. Therefore, “1” is added to the number of overpays (S388).

  Here, the number of overpays is the number of game balls that have exceeded the required number of drops when the number of game balls actually paid out exceeds the required number of drops, that is, when overpaid occurs. For example, if the number of drop requests is 15, but the number of game balls actually paid out is 16, the number of overpays is increased because one game ball is overpaid. “1” is added.

  The payout CPU 301 adds the number of overpays described above, whereby the total number of game balls detected by the first count switch 181A and the second count switch 181B (the total number of game balls actually paid out). ) And the requested number of payouts can be stored in the RAM 303.

  Therefore, the RAM 303 constitutes a difference accumulation unit. Note that the number of overpays is stored in the RAM 303 until a predetermined initialization operation is performed. Examples of the predetermined initialization operation include power-on again.

  In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the overpayment number, or the work area of the error information part without turning on the power again. May be cleared, that is, the three work areas may be cleared, or may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of overpays is 10 or more (S389). In other words, the payout CPU 301 compares the total number of game balls detected by the first count switch 181A and the second count switch 181B (the total number of game balls actually paid out) with the payout request number. Then, it is determined whether or not the difference (total number of overpays) is 10 or more.

  In S389, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of overpay is not 10 or more (when S389 is NO), the payout CPU 301 indicates that the number of game balls related to overpayment is within an allowable range (allowable value). The counting switch detection process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S389 that the number of overpay has reached 10 or more (when S389 is YES), the payout CPU 301 does not have the number of game balls related to overpayment within the allowable range (allowable). The overpay flag is set to 1 (S390), and the counting switch detection process is terminated.

  Here, the overpay flag is a flag for determining whether or not the number of game balls related to overpayment is within an allowable range (allowable value), and the number of game balls related to overpayment is within the allowable range. Is a flag that is set to 0, and is set to 1 when the number of game balls related to overpayment is not within the allowable range (over the allowable value).

  When the overpay flag is set to 1, the payout CPU 301 controls the payout motor 174 to stop the first sprocket 173A and the second sprocket 173B until the above-described predetermined initialization operation is performed. .

[Motor start wait processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the motor activation waiting process performed in S336 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of motor activation waiting processing in the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (S401). In S401, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is not 1 (when S401 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control is being performed, and moves the process to S406.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 in S401 (if S401 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been completed, and the first Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second stop factor flag is 1 (S402).

  In S402, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (when S402 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and starts the motor. The waiting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or second stop factor flag is 1 in S402 (when S402 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Then, it is determined whether or not the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S403).

  In S403, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when S403 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no collateral ball, and the motor Ends the startup wait process.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S403 that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when S403 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball and pays out. It is determined whether or not the requested number is larger than 0 (S404).

  In S404, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is not greater than 0 (when S404 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request and ends the motor activation waiting process.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S404 that the number of payout requests is greater than 0 (when S404 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a payout request and performs motor startup initial processing (see FIG. 90) is executed (S405).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S406). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S406 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (NO in S406), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no request for origin adjustment control, and moves the process to S407. Therefore, when S406 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 in S406 (when S406 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a request for origin adjustment control and the number of retries is 12. It is determined whether or not it is larger, that is, whether or not the origin adjustment control has been performed 12 times (S408). Therefore, when S406 is YES, origin adjustment control is performed.

  Here, the number of retries is the number of times that the origin adjustment control has been performed, and more specifically is a value that is added every time the number of motor operations described later is updated. In the origin adjustment control, a driving amount necessary for paying out one game ball after the game ball is paid out to the sprocket 173, that is, a driving amount required for paying out one game ball (payout driving amount). Since the payout motor 174 is driven only, the payout drive amount required to pay out this one game ball (in the first embodiment, 16 steps = unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 times (origin request retry count)) ) Is the number of motor operations = 1. Here, the unit drive amount as excitation data is 4 steps × 5 ms.

  Therefore, every time the number of motor operations is set (updated) in S410, which will be described later, the number of retries is added assuming that the origin adjustment control is completed once. As described above, since the origin adjustment control is the same control as the retry control, the number of retries can be said to be the number of times that the retry control was performed.

  In this manner, the payout CPU 301 updates the number of motor operations as a retry value on condition that the drive amount of the payout motor 174 has reached the payout drive amount (16 steps in the first embodiment).

  The payout CPU 301 for updating the number of motor operations constitutes a retry value update unit. The payout CPU 301 manages the number of times the number of motor operations is updated or the number of times excitation data is set, that is, the number of retries, as the number of times of origin adjustment control (retry control).

  In the first embodiment, three grooves for receiving game balls are formed in each sprocket so that three game balls are paid out each time the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B make one rotation. Yes.

  For this reason, when the number of motor operations is updated six times, the driving amount for each rotation of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B (96 steps = 16 steps in the first embodiment (unit driving amount (4 Step) × 4 times (origin request retry count)) × 6 times (half of the 12 retry counts))).

  Therefore, the number of retries being larger than 12 means that the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are driven for two rotations (in the first embodiment, 192 steps = 96 steps (the driving amount for one rotation) × This means that the dispensing motor 174 has been driven with a driving amount exceeding (twice). The retry count of 12 times is the upper limit count of retry control with 16 steps (unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 times) as one set.

  When the payout CPU 301 determines in S408 that the number of retries is greater than 12 (when S408 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of origin adjustment control has reached the upper limit number (12). Then, the process proceeds to S407.

  At this time, the payout CPU 301 does not detect the game ball by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B, and the drive amount of the payout motor 174 exceeds 192 steps (upper limit drive amount), or the number of retries is The driving of the payout motor 174 is controlled so that the payout of the game ball is stopped until a predetermined initialization operation is performed on condition that 12 times (the upper limit number of times) has been exceeded. Thereby, the origin adjustment control (retry control) ends. Examples of the predetermined initialization operation include power-on again.

  In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on again after the backup clear switch 121 is pressed, the payout CPU 301 clears the entire work area of the RAM 303. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, by performing a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 121), at least one of the entire work area of the RAM 303, the number of overpay, or the work area of the error information part without turning on the power again. A work area including two, that is, three work areas may be cleared, or may be selectively combined to clear the work area according to the purpose.

  In S407, the payout CPU 301 sets the activation state of the payout motor 174 (S407), and moves the process to S414. In this process, if S406 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed, so the acceleration state of the payout motor 174 corresponding to the number of drops requested is set so that normal game balls are paid out. If S408 is YES, the payout motor 174 is set to the idle state in order to stop paying out the game balls.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S408 that the number of retries is not greater than 12 (if S408 is NO), the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 4 steps in preparation for the next origin adjustment control. (S409). In this process, four steps are set as the unit drive amount of the payout motor 174 when the origin adjustment control is executed.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of motor operations to 1 (S410) and sets the origin request retry count to 4 times (S411). In this process, the payout driving amount necessary for paying out one game ball is obtained by multiplying the 4 steps set as the step counter mask value in S409 described above by 4 times set as the number of origin request retry times. Sixteen steps are set.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S412). Here, the falling ball monitoring timer determines whether or not there is a falling ball and whether or not a stop factor has occurred after driving the dispensing motor 174 with the excitation data for the unit driving amount (4 steps) in the origin adjustment control. Is a timer for measuring the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms in the origin adjustment control).

  The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) is an excitation data holding period (in the first embodiment, as a holding period for holding the postures of the first and second sprockets 171A and 171B after the dispensing motor 174 is driven for four steps. 30 ms) and a cooling period during which the payout motor 174 is cooled (100 ms in the origin adjustment control).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets “0” in the origin adjustment completion flag (S413). Next, after the end of S407 or after the end of S413, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S414), and finishes the motor activation waiting process.

  In this process, for example, when origin adjustment control is performed, 16 steps (unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 times (origin request retry count)) as a payout drive amount required to pay out one game ball. Set the excitation data. Further, when paying out normal game balls, excitation data for a predetermined step is set as a drive amount necessary for paying out the required number of game balls. It should be noted that the excitation data is set to 0 when the payout motor 174 is set in the idle state so that the payout of the game ball is stopped.

[Motor startup initial processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the motor start initial process performed in S405 during the motor start wait process (see FIG. 89) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of motor start initial processing according to the first embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of drop requests from the number of payout requests (S421). In this process, a maximum of 15 drop request numbers are set according to the number of payout requests (total amount of payout). For example, when the number of payout requests (total payout amount) is 20, the number of drop requests is set to 15. On the other hand, when the number of payout requests (total payout amount) is 10, the number of drop requests is set to 10 which is the same as the number of payout requests.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs a collateral ball monitoring setting process (S422). In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of times of ON detection monitoring in the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B according to the number of drop requests.

  For example, when the number of requested drops is 9 to 10, 650 times (650 ms) are set as the number of ON detection monitoring times. Further, the payout CPU 301 sets the monitoring time in the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B according to the number of drop requests. For example, when the number of drop requests is 9 to 10, 850 ms is set as the monitoring time.

  Here, the above-mentioned ON detection monitoring frequency and monitoring time are the initial values of the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B set in the collateral ball monitoring initial setting process of S312 during the power-on process of FIG. The initial values of the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B are different.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets “0” in each of the first and second falling ball confirmation flags (S423). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 initializes the number of retries (S424), and sets “1” in the origin adjustment completion flag (S425).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S426). The falling ball monitoring timer cleared here drives the payout motor 174 with excitation data corresponding to the drive amount necessary for paying out the required number of drops in normal payout control in which origin adjustment control and retry control are not executed. After that, a timer for measuring a falling ball monitoring time (500 ms in normal payout control) for monitoring whether or not there is a falling ball corresponding to the required number of drops and whether or not a stop factor has occurred.

  The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) here includes an excitation data holding period (30 ms in the first embodiment) and a cooling period of the payout motor 174 (470 ms in normal payout control). This falling ball monitoring time corresponds to a certain period.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the step counter to 0 (S427). Here, the step counter is a counter that counts the number of steps of the payout motor 174.

  For example, in the case where the number of requested drops is 15, when the falling operation of 15 game balls, that is, the payout operation is completed, the value of the step counter becomes a value for 240 steps. In this process, the payout CPU 301 clears the value for 240 steps counted as described above, for example.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 16 steps (S428), and ends the motor activation initial process. As a result, 16 steps are set as the number of steps of the payout motor 174 required to pay out one game ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 91 to FIG. 102, characteristic portions related to payout control in the first embodiment will be described in detail.

  FIG. 91 is a time chart showing an excitation method of the payout motor 174 of the first embodiment. The dispensing motor 174 employs a two-phase excitation method and a method capable of switching between a high current and a low current.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the payout CPU 301 rotates the payout motor 174 in the forward direction by changing the excitation data in the order of t1, t2, t3, and t4. However, in the first embodiment, the payout motor 174 is structurally impossible to reversely rotate.

  Here, the origin is the position where both “A−” and “B−” of the dispensing motor 174 are on. Note that “A + and B +” (indicated by “S” in the figure) of the payout motor 174 indicates ON / OFF by software control, and “A− and B− (indicated by“ H ”in the figure)” indicate software. Indicates ON / OFF due to logic inversion of output.

  However, in the first embodiment, since there is no conventional detecting means such as an index sensor, it is necessary to perform phase alignment between the apparent origin (excitation data 0) and the structural origin. Such phase alignment of the origin is origin adjustment, and controlling the dispensing motor 174 to perform phase alignment is referred to as origin adjustment control.

  The origin adjustment control is performed using the first payout operation when the first payout request is made when the origin adjustment is required (when there is a factor for the origin adjustment). For example, the origin adjustment control is performed using the payout operation of the first game ball of the required number of drops at the time of the first payout request after the power is turned on.

  Here, the payout request is made from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300. Specifically, the payout request is transmitted to the payout control circuit 300 as prize ball control data including information such as the number of payout requests. . As shown in FIG. 92, the payout control circuit 300 receives prize ball control data from the main control circuit 70 by a reception interrupt.

  On the other hand, the payout control circuit 300 transmits payout error information data to the main control circuit 70, as shown in FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 communicate unilaterally as shown in FIG. 33. However, as shown in FIG. 94, the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 300 may communicate with each other.

  Here, when the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 communicate with each other, a serial communication method is used as the most desirable form, but the present invention is not limited to the serial communication method, and a parallel communication method is used. Various communication methods such as can be used.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the payout control circuit 300 transmits error information including payout control error information, which will be described later, to the main control circuit 70 after detecting an error by self-diagnosis using the serial communication method.

  At this time, the minimum transmission interval of error transmission from the payout control circuit 300 is set to a predetermined time (12 ms in the first embodiment), and when error information continuously changes, as shown in S337. Instead of sending error information to the main control circuit 70 every time error information changes using a command transmission process that can be executed every 1 ms, as shown in FIG. The error information is transmitted after the minimum transmission interval or the minimum transmission interval elapses.

  As a method for synthesizing error information, as shown in FIG. 96, each bit numerical value of parameter 1 and parameter 2 each composed of 8 bits is updated or changed, and error information is transmitted.

  At this time, when receiving the parameter 1 and the parameter 2 as error information, the main control circuit 70 performs masking on each parameter and acquires error information (payout control error information).

  The management of error information in the payout control circuit 300, the management of error information in the main control circuit 70, and the management of error information in the sub control circuit 200 are as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 97 shows an error information notification mode in the payout control circuit 300, an error information notification mode in the main control circuit 70, and an error information notification mode in the sub control circuit 200.

  Specifically, the lower pan full state in the dispensing control circuit 300 is recognized by the main control circuit 70 as lower pan full detection, and the sub control circuit 200 determines that the sub control circuit 200 is based on error information transmitted from the main control circuit 70. It is informed through the liquid crystal display device 13 that “please remove the ball”.

  Also, in the payout control circuit 300, the ball breakage 1 state, the ball breakage 2 state, the motor abnormal state, the VL unconnected state, the CR side communication abnormality, the overpayout abnormality, the payout ball clogging, the reception command abnormality, the reception abnormality and the communication error. Is recognized as a payout abnormality detection in the main control circuit 70, and the sub control circuit notifies the caller of “please call an attendant” via the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the payout error information transmitted from the main control circuit 70.

  As described above, the main control circuit 70 performs management by dividing the plurality of pieces of error information related to the payout control to be transmitted into two types of “bottom pan full error information” and “other information”.

  By transmitting and receiving such error information, error ellipse is continuously generated at the minimum transmission interval of the payout control circuit 300 in an environment where the main control circuit 70 and the payout control circuit 300 perform serial communication with each other. Even when it is changed to (error information, it can be expressed that a plurality of errors have occurred), it is possible to synthesize error information.

  For this reason, the payout control circuit 300 does not send error information after the main control circuit 70 is requested to send error information (or when there is some transmission request), but the minimum transmission of the payout control circuit 300. Error information can be transmitted at intervals or at predetermined time intervals.

  In the above description, error information (payout control error information) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various commands can be combined as commands.

  Next, the prize ball control process in the first embodiment will be described. In the prize ball control process, at least the above-described origin adjustment control, normal payout control, and retry control are performed. First, the origin adjustment control in the prize ball control process will be described.

  As described above, the origin adjustment control is executed when an origin adjustment target factor occurs. Here, the target factors when performing the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control process are as follows: when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped, when the power is turned on, when power is restored, and when an underpayment occurs after completion of the origin adjustment control, Examples include when a stop factor is canceled, when a payout abnormality factor is canceled, and when overpay occurs.

  For example, when the payout motor 174 is out of step or the ball supply passage 171 is not secured with a predetermined number (15 in the first embodiment) of game balls when underpayment occurs after the origin adjustment control is completed. Nevertheless, there are cases where the 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects a game ball due to a short circuit and an intermittent state occurs.

  The origin adjustment control at the time of canceling the stop factor is performed, for example, as a response to the backflow of the game ball when the lower pan full switch 179 is short-circuited. Further, the origin adjustment control at the time of canceling the payout abnormality factor is performed as a response when the origin is physically shifted due to, for example, disconnection, short circuit, or radio wave irradiation. Further, the origin adjustment control when overpay occurs is performed in consideration of the subsequent step-out of the payout motor 174.

  In the origin adjustment control, when the payout motor 174 is driven for 16 steps as described above, one game ball can be dropped (paid out), so that the drive of 4 steps × 5 ms as a unit drive amount is performed. The point at which the falling ball check is completed within the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms = excitation data holding period 30 ms + cooling period 100 ms) is regarded as a physical origin (origin adjustment complete). When the falling ball cannot be confirmed within the falling ball monitoring time, the above-described payout motor 174 is driven for 16 steps in units of 4 steps.

  However, if the falling ball cannot be detected by driving the payout motor 174 for 16 steps, it is determined that normal payout has not been performed (or it may be determined that there is a stop factor). The driving of the dispensing motor 174 in units of four steps is repeated for two rotations.

  “Repeat driving of the payout motor 174 for two rotations” means that the state of the payout motor 174 or the position of the sprocket 173 at the time when it is determined that the falling ball cannot be detected even if the payout motor 174 is driven. As (or rotation start position), for example, when 48 steps are required for one rotation of the motor, it indicates that 96 steps of driving are performed.

  This can also be expressed as equivalent to a drive capable of dropping 12 balls, and the drive of the payout motor 174 or sprocket 173 that can drop a predetermined number of game balls (or rotational drive, or rotation angle). (Driving) can be expressed.

  The origin adjustment control is completed when a falling ball is detected. However, if the falling ball is not counted as a game ball that has been paid out, it is overpaid. Therefore, it is necessary to count the falling ball at the time of completion of the origin adjustment control as a paid out gaming ball.

  Therefore, in the first embodiment, the payout CPU 301 subtracts one drop request number to 14 pieces on the condition that a falling ball is detected by the counting switch 181 when the origin adjustment control is being executed. As a result, upon completion of the origin adjustment control, the remaining number of drop requests (14) excluding one for the number of drop requests is paid out. Thereafter, a normal payout operation is performed.

  FIG. 98 is a timing chart of the origin adjustment control using the prize ball control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 98, when the stop factor is canceled after the power is turned on again, and then a payout request is generated, the origin adjustment control is executed, and first, excitation data for 4 steps × 5 ms. Based on the above, the payout motor 174 is driven for four steps. At this time, the current of the dispensing motor 174 is switched from a low current to a high current with the start of the origin adjustment control.

  Thereafter, when the driving of the dispensing motor 174 for four steps is finished, the current of the dispensing motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period). When the excitation data holding period elapses, the current of the dispensing motor 174 is switched to a low current, and then maintained at a low current for 100 ms (cooling period).

  The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) is composed of 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 100 ms (cooling period). The falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) can be calculated based on a free fall theory.

  Thereafter, when a falling ball is detected by the second counting switch 181B within the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms), the number of requested drops that was three at the start of the origin adjustment is updated to two. Further, the origin adjustment control is completed by detecting the falling ball, and the phase shift from the structural origin is eliminated.

  FIG. 99 is a timing chart of the origin adjustment retry operation after the origin adjustment is not completed using the prize ball control process. For example, as shown in FIG. 99, if the operation of driving the payout motor 174 for 4 steps based on the excitation data for 4 steps × 5 ms described above (this is referred to as an origin adjustment cycle) is performed once, If it cannot be detected, the same origin adjustment cycle is repeated up to 16 steps. That is, after starting the origin adjustment control, a total of four origin adjustment cycles are repeated.

  However, if the falling ball cannot be detected even after the four origin adjustment cycles are performed, the four origin adjustment cycles are performed again. Here, a period in which the first four origin adjustment cycles are performed is referred to as a basic retry operation period. The origin adjustment cycle is unit drive amount (4 steps) × 5 ms, and the basic retry operation period is unit drive amount (4 steps) × 4 times (origin request retry count). In FIG. 99, the operation which is started when the counting switch 181 falling ball is not detected during the basic retry operation period is the origin adjustment retry, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the basic retry operation period is not limited to this. It is good also as an origin adjustment retry that repeats to the upper limit number of times.

  FIG. 74 is a timing chart of the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process, that is, the normal payout operation. FIG. 100 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a payout operation when paying out 15 game balls.

  As shown in FIG. 100, when 15 drop requests are first determined, the payout CPU 301 determines the drive amount of the payout motor 174 based on the determined drop request count (15). Specifically, excitation data necessary for paying out 15 game balls is determined. The payout CPU 301 that determines the drive amount of the payout motor 174 constitutes a drive amount determining means.

  Next, when excitation data necessary for paying out 15 game balls is set, the current of the payout motor 174 is switched to a high current and the payout motor 174 is driven based on the set excitation data. The excitation data at this time is set so that the payout motor 174 gradually accelerates to a steady state and then decelerates and stops.

  Thereafter, when driving of the dispensing motor 174 based on the set excitation data is finished, the current of the dispensing motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period as a holding period). When the excitation data holding period elapses, the current of the dispensing motor 174 is switched to a low current, and thereafter, maintained at a low current for 470 ms (cooling period).

  The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is composed of 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 470 ms (cooling period). During the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the driving of the dispensing motor 174 is stopped. The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) at this time is different from the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) during the origin adjustment control.

  Then, during the above-described falling ball monitoring time (500 ms), the payout CPU 301 monitors whether or not the falling required number (15) of gaming balls has been confirmed. That is, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not a game ball corresponding to the required number of drops (15) is detected through the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B during the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms). The payout CPU 301 that makes such a determination constitutes a payout determining means.

  The payout CPU 301 determines that the number of game balls corresponding to the required number of drops (15) has not been dropped during the above-described drop ball monitoring time (500 ms), that is, the game balls corresponding to the required number of drops (15) are the first. If it is determined that no detection is made through the second counting switches 181A and 181B, it is determined that a stop factor has occurred, and the idle motor 174 is shifted to an idle state in order to stop driving of the payout motor 174 thereafter. As a result, the payout operation cannot be performed continuously.

  On the other hand, even when it is possible to confirm the fall of the required number (15) of game balls during the above-described drop ball monitoring time (500 ms), the system shifts to the idle state in preparation for the subsequent payout operation.

  Here, the excitation data corresponding to the number of drops requested in the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process is as shown in FIG. For example, when the required number of drops is 5 to 15, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), it becomes excitation data for performing two game balls in the acceleration state and the deceleration state, respectively.

  101 (b) shows a case where the number of drop requests is four, FIG. 101 (c) shows a case where the number of drop requests is three, and FIG. 101 (d) shows a case where the number of drop requests is two. (E) represents excitation data when the number of drop requests is one. Note that the above-described falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is provided for any number of requested drops.

  FIG. 102 is a timing chart of the payout operation when a retry operation is required during the basic payout operation of the prize ball control process. FIG. 102 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a payout operation when paying out five game balls.

  As shown in FIG. 102, when the payout operation of the required number of drops (five) is executed, if the game ball related to the fourth payout is not detected by the second counting switch 181B, the drop When the ball monitoring time (500 ms) elapses, there is a shortage of the required number of drops (5). Thereby, it is determined by the payout CPU 301 that the falling of the required number of game balls (5) cannot be confirmed within the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms).

  In this way, when an under-payment occurs in which the number of game balls paid out for the required number of drops (5) is insufficient, the home position adjustment retry similar to the home position adjustment retry operation shown in FIG. Operation is performed. The contents of this origin adjustment retry operation are the same as those shown in FIG.

  Next, error processing in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107.

  Errors relating to the payout of game balls in the first embodiment include (1) excessive payout, (2) payout ball clogging, (3) full lower tray, (4) runout, (5) payout motor abnormality, and the like. . When at least one of these errors occurs, the error is notified via the payout state notification display device 178 (see FIG. 33). Hereinafter, each of these errors will be described in detail.

  FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a payout state notification display device 178. As shown in FIG. 103, the payout state notification display device 178 includes seven segments a to g and an eighth segment DP. One of these segments a to g and DP is lit according to the error type or the like.

  For example, (1) when reporting an overpayment error, the segment b is lit, (2) when reporting an error in the payout ball clogging, the segment d is lit, and (3) the lower plate When notifying a full tank error, the f segment is lit. (4) When notifying an out of ball error, the e segment is lit, and (5) When a payout motor abnormality is reported. The segment of c lights up.

  The DP segment is lit when notifying that the ball is being lent. Therefore, the manager of the hall can easily determine what kind of error has occurred by visually checking the lighting state of the segment of the payout state notification display device 178.

  First, (1) overpayment is an error that does not cause a stop even if it occurs, and can continue the payout operation. As shown in FIG. 104, this overpayment error notification is triggered when the number of game balls overpaid after the required number of drops has been paid out is equal to or greater than the overpayout prescribed number (10 in the first embodiment). This is the timing.

  In FIG. 104, a payout detection signal A is a signal indicating whether or not a game ball is detected by the first counting switch 181A, and is turned on when a game ball is detected. Similarly, the payout detection signal B is a signal indicating whether or not a game ball is detected by the second counting switch 181B.

  The overpayment error is canceled when the power is turned on again. In other words, the trigger for canceling the overpaid error is when the power is turned on again. At this time, the overpayment error notification is also canceled.

  Next, (2) paid-out ball clogging is an error based on a stop factor that occurs due to, for example, ball clogging due to backflow of game balls, adhering dust or foreign matter, or disconnection / short circuit of the counting switch 181. As shown in FIG. 105, for example, when the payout detection signal A of the first counting switch 181A is turned on and does not turn off even after 100 ms, a payout ball clogging has occurred, that is, a stop factor has occurred. It is judged. When it is determined that the stop factor has occurred, the payout ball clogging error notification is triggered.

  When the counting switch 181 is short-circuited, the payout control circuit 300 cannot directly determine the presence or absence of the short-circuit, and therefore cannot be used as a stop factor until the above-described 12-time origin adjustment control retry operation is completed. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined that the stop factor has occurred with the lapse of the falling ball monitoring time after the completion of the retry operation of the 12 origin adjustment control.

  In addition, when the payout control circuit 300 can recognize or determine a short circuit of the counting switch 181 by constantly monitoring a change in voltage that can occur between the counting switch 181 and the short circuit of the counting switch 181, an error can be detected without performing a trial operation. Notification may be performed, or a retry operation may be started simultaneously with notification of an error.

  Further, the notification of the payout ball clogging error is canceled by removing the factors such as ball clogging due to backflow, adhering dust and foreign matters, or disconnection / short circuit of the counting switch 181 described above.

  Next, (3) the lower tray full is an error based on a stop factor that occurs when the game balls stored in the lower tray 22 become full. As shown in FIG. 106, for example, when the bottom pan full switch 179 is turned on and does not turn off even after 1 second, it is determined that a stop factor based on the bottom pan full has occurred. The time when it is determined that the cause of the stop has occurred is a trigger for notifying the bottom pan full error.

  In addition, the notification of the lower tray full error is canceled by discharging the game ball stored in the lower tray 22 in a full state.

  Next, (4) a ball breakage is detected when, for example, the 15-ball collateral switch 172 detects that the collateral ball is insufficient, or when the game tank is waiting to be refilled into the ball tank 161, the ball supply passage 171 This is an error based on a stop factor that occurs when the ball is clogged or when the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is disconnected.

  Such a ball-out error is based on the comparison result between the first and second collateral ball counters 305A and 305B and the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B. This occurs when the stop factor flag is set to 1.

  This ball-out error notification is triggered when the above-mentioned stop factor occurs. In addition, the ball breakage error is caused by a predetermined number (15) of game balls in the ball supply passage 171 when the game balls are replenished to the ball tank 161 or the game balls causing the ball clogging are removed. Is canceled by being secured. At this time, the notification of the ball break error is also canceled.

  Next, (5) the payout motor abnormality is, as shown in FIG. 107, for example, 12 retry operations are executed based on the origin adjustment cycle, and the falling ball monitoring time (130 ms) in the 12th retry operation has elapsed. Is an error based on a stop factor that occurs when the falling ball cannot be confirmed.

  The cause of such a stop factor is, for example, when an adhesive game ball does not stick to the sprocket 173, when a ball engagement occurs between the sprocket 173 and the storage ball (motor rotation failure), or foreign matter A case where a step-out occurs due to a non-rotating state of the motor (only the excitation data is updated) such as mixing is included.

  As shown in FIG. 107, this payout motor abnormality notification is triggered when the above-mentioned stop factor occurs. Further, this payout motor abnormality is canceled by turning on the power again. That is, the trigger for canceling the payout motor abnormality is when the power is turned on again. At this time, the notification of the payout motor abnormality is also canceled.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the receiving process of the payout control circuit 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment is disconnected will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 108, when the XINT interrupt (power interruption) at the time of power interruption occurs as a non-maskable interrupt prior to the reception interrupt on the payout control circuit 300 side, the received data is polled within the XINT interrupt to 1 byte. Bail out.

  Also, assuming that a power interruption occurs immediately after writing to the transmission buffer by the main control circuit 70, the payout control circuit 300 can receive a delayed baud rate time even during processing of an XINT interrupt. Thus, it is preferable to consider the elapsed time for reception within the XINT interrupt. However, it is a condition that electrical interruption processing XINT of the payout control circuit 300 does not occur before the main control circuit 70 electrically.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has values (first values) of the first and second collateral ball timers 306A and 306B, respectively, on condition that the payout of the game ball is started. And the value (2nd value) of 1st and 2nd collateral ball counters 305A and 305B is updated.

  For this reason, if the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B detect game balls continuously after the payout of the game balls is started, when the first value becomes 0, The second value smaller than the first value is already 0. In this case, it is guaranteed that the supply of the game ball is performed in accordance with the payout of the game ball.

  On the other hand, if the second value is not 0 when the first value is 0, the game ball is not replenished according to the payout of the game ball due to some factor.

  Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment compares the updated first value and the second value to determine whether or not the supply of the game ball is correctly performed according to the payout of the game ball. Can be judged.

  As a result, for example, the first and second 15-ball collateral switches 172A and 172B are compared with the case where it is determined whether or not the game ball is replenished based on whether or not the game ball is detected. Management and guarantee of the game balls accumulated in the ball supply passages 171A and 171B can be performed accurately.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment prohibits the payout of game balls when the second value is not 0 when the first value is 0, so the first and second ball supply passages 171A. , 171B can be checked for abnormalities related to the supply of game balls. Thereby, the security regarding replenishment and payout of game balls can be further improved.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a second value of 0 when the first value is 0, and even when it is once guaranteed that the game ball has been replenished, Thereafter, until the game balls are paid out, the game balls are excessively discharged due to, for example, a failure of the first and second sprockets 173A, 173B, and the like in the first and second ball supply passages 171A, 171B. When the number of game balls is reduced, the payout of game balls can be prohibited.

  Thereby, the management of the game balls in the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B can be performed more accurately, and the security related to the supply and discharge of the game balls can be further improved.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment executes retry control that drives the payout motor 174 by unit drive amount (4 steps) until a game ball is detected by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B. Since it is possible, for example, a retry operation for eliminating ball engagement can be performed without providing a slit sensor or the like for detecting the drive positions of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B.

  Further, when such a retry operation is performed, the driving positions of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B when the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B detect the game ball are adjusted as the origin. Therefore, the origins of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B can be adjusted without using a slit sensor or the like.

  As described above, the retry operation can be used not only when the ball is bitten but also when adjusting the origin, so that the retry control can be provided with versatility, and as a result, the processing by the payout CPU 301 can be simplified. .

  Moreover, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is not provided with a slit sensor or the like, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine can be a simple and low-cost configuration.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the unit drive amount (4 steps) of the payout motor 174 at the time of executing the retry control causes the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B to pay out one game ball. Less than the payout driving amount (16 steps) required for paying out the next game ball after that, the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B are divided into a plurality of times in order to pay out one game ball. Can be driven. As a result, for example, when a ball bit or the like has occurred, this can be eliminated, and when the origin is adjusted, it can be adjusted to an accurate origin.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the unit driving amount (4 steps) is a driving amount obtained by dividing the payout driving amount (16 steps) into four times, when paying out one game ball The number of driving of the payout motor 174 can be divided into a plurality of times.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the driving amount of the payout motor 174 exceeds the upper limit driving amount (192 steps) without the game ball being detected by the first and second counting switches 181A and 181B. The payout means can be stopped until an initialization operation is performed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the prize ball case unit 170 from being defective due to repeated repeated retry operations.

  Further, since the payout motor 174 is stopped until the initialization operation is performed, there is no game ball accumulated in, for example, the first and second ball supply passages 171A and 171B due to the stop of the payout motor 174. It can be urged that the award ball case unit 170 and thus the pachinko gaming machine 1 need to be returned from an abnormal state.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs the origin adjustment control (retry control) when it is determined that the payout of the game ball is prohibited, that is, when the stop factor flag is set to 1, so that some abnormality Thus, a retry operation can always be performed after the driving of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B is stopped.

  In this way, by performing the retry operation in conjunction with the drive stop of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B, the processing can proceed smoothly as compared with the case where the retry operation is performed alone.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment executes a retry operation in the origin adjustment control (retry control) until a game ball is detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B, and the number of motor operations Is managed as the number of retry operations, the number of retry operations is surely performed regardless of whether or not a game ball is detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B. And can be easily grasped. In addition, the number of retry operations can be reliably and easily grasped without a slit sensor or the like. As a result, the retry operation can be managed smoothly.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has the origin adjustment control (retry) when the number of retries exceeds the upper limit number (12 times) without the game ball being detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B. Control) is completed, it is possible to prevent the prize ball case unit 170 from being defective due to repeated excessive retry operations.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment compares the total number of game balls actually paid out with the number of payout requests, and as a result of the comparison, the total number of game balls actually paid out and the number of payout requests. Can be grasped as an overpaid game ball.

  Further, when the above-mentioned difference that has been overpaid becomes the allowable value (10) or more, the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are stopped until the initialization operation is performed. When there is an unnatural overpayment, it is possible to prevent further overpayment.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs overpayment, which is the difference between the total number of game balls actually paid out and the requested amount of payout until the initialization operation is performed when overpayment occurs. The number of such game balls can be accumulated.

  This makes it possible to reliably detect, for example, the unnatural overpayment caused by fraud or the like and the amount of unnecessary game balls to be paid out (the number of prize balls and the number of balls lent out) caused by the overpayment.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, during the falling ball monitoring time after the payout motor 174 is driven, the gaming balls corresponding to the number of requested drops are detected by the first or second counting switches 181A and 181B. Since it is determined whether or not it has been detected, the payout motor 174 can be cooled during the falling ball monitoring time, and at the same time, it is confirmed whether or not a game ball corresponding to the required number of drops has been paid out. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently manage the payout amount (the number of winning balls and the number of rented balls) while ensuring a sufficient cooling period of the payout motor 174.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the falling ball monitoring time after driving the payout motor 174 and the holding period for holding the postures of the first and second sprockets 173A, 173B and the payout motor 174 Therefore, the postures of the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B can be maintained after the dispensing motor 174 is stopped, and the first and second sprockets 173A and 173B are caused by inertial force. It is possible to prevent over-rotation. Further, the dispensing motor 174 can be cooled by providing the cooling period.

  Furthermore, when the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B does not detect a game ball corresponding to the required number of drops during the holding period and the cooling period, the driving of the payout motor 174 is stopped. The driving of the dispensing motor 174 can be managed efficiently using the cooling period.

(Embodiment 2)
Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Note that the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that it has a real-time clock 80, but the other configurations are substantially the same. Therefore, in the following, description of the same configuration as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 109 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 109, in the second embodiment, the sub control circuit 200 includes a real time clock 80. The real time clock 80 is connected to the sub CPU 201.

  Here, the real-time clock 80 is a device capable of specifying the current “year (year)”, “month”, “day”, “day of the week”, “hour”, “minute”, and “second”. It is. The real time clock 80 is realized as a serial interface type real time clock module incorporating a crystal oscillator. Since the sub CPU 201 is connected to the real time clock 80, the time information specified by the real time clock 80 can be acquired by the sub CPU 201. The real-time clock 80 is operated by the power supply when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with power, and when the power is turned off, the backup power supply or an independent power supply such as a button battery is supplied even during a power failure. Works by. Therefore, the real time clock 80 can specify the current time even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off.

  Thus, in Embodiment 2, since the real-time clock 80 is provided, various effects corresponding to the current time can be performed.

[Point addition table]
In the first embodiment, the points according to the lottery are added using the point addition table stored in the program ROM 202, and it is possible to shift to the “first high probability state” according to the accumulated points. It was.

  In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the point addition table is stored in the program ROM 202. However, the point addition table corresponds to a different time for each character displayed for each determined content of the presentation. The points to be added differ according to the time. As a result, the points that are added when the game is lost differ depending on the character displayed in accordance with the time and effect of the game. Therefore, the player can enjoy a game with change, and the interest of the game is improved.

  A point addition table according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating an example of a point addition table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, there are a plurality of characters (characters A to C) according to the contents of the effect of the lost reach production. That is, there are a plurality of lost reach effects corresponding to a plurality of characters. In addition, the time corresponding to each character is determined, and when the lose reach production by the character corresponding to the time in the game is performed, it is added more than the case where the other character's lose reach production is performed. Points are likely to increase. Therefore, it can be said that the probability of shifting to the “first high probability state” is high. Therefore, if the character corresponding to the time at which the game is performed is displayed in the production, it can be said that it is advantageous for the player as compared to the case where other characters are displayed.

  For example, character A may correspond to 8:00 to 12:59, character B may correspond to 13:00 to 17:59, and character C may correspond to 18:00 to 23:59. Here, the effects of the variation pattern commands “83H02H” and “83H03H” are lost reach effects. Upon receiving this variation pattern command, the sub control circuit 200 determines by drawing whether the detailed contents of the reach effect, that is, which of the characters A to C are displayed. The probability that each of the characters A to C is displayed may be the same (all are 1/3). As shown in FIG. 110, the points to be added differ between the random number “9” in “83H02H” and all the random values in “83H03H” depending on the relationship between the character displayed by the presentation and the game time. For example, when the variation pattern command is “83H02H” and the acquired random number value is “9”, when the character A is displayed in the “second high probability state”, the time is from 8:00 to 12:59. If so, 50 points are added, but 20 points are added at other times. Similarly, when character B is displayed in the “second high probability state”, if the time is from 13:00 to 17:59, 50 points are added, but at other times it is added. The point is 20. Similarly, when character C is displayed in the “second high probability state”, if the time is from 18:00 to 23:59, 50 points are added, but at other times it is added. The point is 20. The same applies when the variation pattern command is “83H03H”. Also, the “normal gaming state” is the same as in the “second high probability state”, but as in the first embodiment, the “second high probability state” is set to accumulate points more easily.

  Similarly to the first embodiment, stop symbol and effect content determination processing may be performed according to the points determined using this point addition table (see S1072 in FIG. 69).

As described above, the time is displayed and the displayed character is associated with different points, but the time and the displayed character are associated with each other, not the points and the number of navigations given is different. It is good. That is, the time corresponding to the character is determined in advance. For example, when a character corresponding to the time at which a game is performed is selected, the big hit time navigation lottery table different from that used at other times It is assumed that the number of navigations that can be given is defined more than that used at other times in the jackpot navigation lottery table. As a result, the number of navigations to be given increases, and the probability of giving navigation can inevitably be increased. In addition to determining the number of navigations by lottery, it is also conceivable to determine the navigation grant probability of whether or not to navigate by lottery.
In the first embodiment, a lottery in which navigation is given with a probability of 1/10 in the lose super reach B is performed. However, in the second embodiment, such a lottery may be performed. In addition, a lottery in which navigation is given in the lose super reach A may be performed. Further, as described above, the winning probability may be changed according to the time and the displayed character. This case will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an example of a lottery table for a lost super reach of a pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 111, when the displayed character corresponds to the time, the probability of winning the navigation is higher than when the character does not correspond. In addition, the number of navigations provided is increasing. In this way, the advantages and disadvantages for the player differ according to the time, so that the player plays in anticipation of an advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved. FIG. 111 shows the case of Lost Super Reach A. Similarly, in the case of Lost Super Reach B, the probability of winning a navigation and the number of navigations to be given are also determined by the combination of the displayed character and time. May be changed.
In addition, although the probability that each of the characters A to C is displayed is the same as each other, it may be different. For example, the probability that the character corresponding to the time is displayed may be lower than 1/3.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 will be described, in particular, only processes including steps different from the first embodiment.

[Timer interrupt processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 112, timer interrupt processing by the sub CPU 201 of the second embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 112, the point that the process of S1301 is added between the process of S1023 and the process of S1024 is different from the timer interrupt process of Embodiment 1 (see FIG. 64). Since other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  When the process of S1023 is completed, the sub CPU 201 moves the process to S1301. In step S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs time management processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for acquiring and updating data on standard time as a reference from the real-time clock 80. If this process ends, the process moves to S1024.

  Thereby, in Embodiment 2, various effects using the standard time can be performed. For example, a predetermined process can be executed at a specific time. Thereby, since a privilege can be provided with respect to a player at a specific time or a special effect can be executed, the interest of the game is improved.

[Direction determination process during the first high probability state]
With reference to FIG. 113, the first high probability state effect determination process by the sub CPU 201 of the second embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 113, the point that the process of S1302 is added after the process of S1129 is different from the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 72) of the first embodiment. Since other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  When the process of S1129 ends, the sub CPU 201 moves the process to S1302. In S1302, the sub CPU 201 performs an all day navigation lottery based on the time. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines that the character displayed by the presentation based on the standard time acquired from the real-time clock 80 is a character corresponding to the current time with a probability of 1/20 as “the fourth high probability state”. If the winning lottery is selected, the fourth high probability state flag is set. If the displayed character is not the character corresponding to the current time, this transition lottery may be omitted. If the displayed character is not the character corresponding to the current time, the transition lottery may be performed with a probability lower than the winning probability in the case where the displayed character is the character corresponding to the current time. . When this process is finished, this subroutine is finished.

Further, the set time flag may be set when the time set in advance by the real time clock 80 is reached regardless of the displayed character. If the first hit after the set time flag is set is the “big hit” in the special figure (1) -12, the “fourth high probability state” is won with a probability of 1/1, and the “fourth” It is only necessary to shift to the “high probability state”. In addition, the set time flag is turned off regardless of the first hit after the set time flag is set, and the subsequent hit becomes the “big hit” in the special figure (1) -12 May win the “fourth high probability state” with a probability of 1/10 and shift to the “fourth high probability state”.
Thus, there is a possibility that so-called all-day navigation can be acquired even when the RAM is not cleared or when the power is turned on. Therefore, even if the player is not immediately after opening the store, he / she enjoys the game expecting navigation all day throughout the day. In addition, since it is possible to acquire navigation all day without RAM clearing work and power-on work, it is possible to reduce the amount of work on the hall side and increase the number of customers.

  Further, for example, by setting the real-time clock 80 so that the navigation can be acquired once a day once a day, a 24-hour navigation in which the entire navigation state is continued for 24 hours can be realized. That is, after the store is closed, navigation is continued all day on the next day. Thereby, it is difficult to give an unfair feeling to the player, and an increase in the number of customers can be expected.

In addition, for example, a high probability gaming state other than the above may be provided in the “normal gaming state”, and at least a part of the high probability state may be easily given navigation at a specific time using the real time clock 80. That is, it is only necessary to have a high-probability gaming state in which the ease with which navigation is given changes according to time.
For example, in the performance in the “first high probability state”, the characters A to C are each displayed with a probability of 1/3, and the special figure (1) -8 to the special figure (1) -11 is a big hit. However, if the displayed character is a character corresponding to the current time, there may be a possibility of shifting to the “fourth high probability state”.
Also, for example, in the “first high probability state”, even when the special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -7 is a big hit, the displayed character is not the character corresponding to the current time. If the displayed character is a character corresponding to the current time, the probability is higher than if the displayed character is not a character corresponding to the current time. It is good also as a navigation is provided by. In addition, the character displayed in the production in the “first high probability state” may be different from the characters (characters A to C) in the lose reach production.

(Embodiment 3)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described.

  The third embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the payout destination (movement destination) of the game ball by the sprocket 173 can be switched, but other configurations are substantially the same. ing. Therefore, in the following, description of the same configuration as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only differences from the first embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the prize ball case unit 170 of the third embodiment has a first payout passage 180A and a second payout passage 180B, as in the first embodiment, and each of these passages has a two-row structure. Therefore, the configuration is the same. Accordingly, the configuration of the first payout passage 180A will be described as an example.

  The first payout passage 180A of the third embodiment is a first ball passage 401A for paying out (or guiding, supplying, and circulating) a game ball into the pachinko gaming machine (for example, the upper plate 21). And a second ball passage 402A for guiding (moving) (or paying out, supplying, and circulating) the game ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (for example, the ball circulation path of the island management facility). .

  Here, the island management facility is a device that can be connected to a plurality of or a single gaming machine, a gaming device provided for the gaming machine (for example, a sand, each counter, a data display device, etc.). Is a management device for managing the state of game balls and gaming machines, and is usually connected to a facility (eg, a computer or data management device) for managing a game hall called a hall computer. Aggregates information about gaming machines and transmits data.

  Here, the ball circulation path is a facility that enables a game ball to be shared among a plurality of or a single gaming machine provided in the island management device, and the ball circulation path can be independently driven as a ball circulation device. It may be a thing, and it is not essential to be provided in the island management device, and may be provided in a gaming machine, or a device that circulates a game ball in the gaming machine.

  Similarly, the second payout passage 180B has a first ball passage 401B and a second ball passage 402B. Hereinafter, the first ball passage 401A and the first ball passage 401B are collectively referred to as “first ball passage 401”, and the second ball passage 402A and the second ball passage 402B are collectively referred to as “first ball passage 401B”. 2 ball passage 402 ".

  Further, the first ball passage 401A is provided with a first counting switch 481A as a first detection means for detecting a game ball passing through the first ball passage 401A, and the second ball passage 402A has a second ball passage 402A. A first ball removal switch 482A is provided as second detection means that passes through the second ball passage 402A.

  Similarly, the first ball passage 401B and the second ball passage 402B are also provided with a second counting switch 481B and a second ball removal switch 482B. The first counting switch 481A and the second counting switch 481B are collectively referred to as “counting switch 481”, and the first ball removing switch 482A and the second ball removing switch 482B are collectively referred to as “ball removing switch 482”. There are times.

  Further, between the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage 402, more specifically, between the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage 402, the payout destination of the game balls by the sprocket 173 is the first ball passage 401 and the second ball passage. First and second flappers 400 </ b> A and 400 </ b> B are provided as path switching means controlled by the payout CPU 301 so as to switch to any one of 402. The first and second flappers 400A and 400B may be collectively referred to as “flapper 400”.

  The flapper 400 has a flapper driving device 410 (see FIG. 115), and the flapper driving device 410 is controlled to be driven by the dispensing CPU 301, so that the flapper 400 can be rotated in the direction of the arrow.

  Specifically, the flapper 400 has a position where the game ball is paid out to the second ball passage 402 side (a position indicated by a broken line in the figure), and a game ball is paid out to the first ball passage 401 side. It is designed to rotate between a position to be moved (a position indicated by a solid line in the figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115, the payout control circuit 300 according to the third embodiment includes the first count switch 481A, the second count switch 481B, the first ball removal switch 482A, and the second ball removal. A switch 482B and a flapper driving device 410 are connected. The flapper driving device 410 is common to the first flapper 400A and the second flapper 400B, but may be provided separately.

  Further, when the payout CPU 301 of the third embodiment executes the above-described retry operation in a state where there is no prize ball number and rented ball number (payout amount) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300, The flapper 400 is switched via the flapper driving device 410 so that the payout destination is the second ball passage 402.

  In addition, when the payout CPU 301 of the third embodiment executes a retry operation in a state where the flapper 400 is switched so that the payout destination of the game ball becomes the second ball passage 402, the game ball is selected by the ball removal switch 482. The retry operation is terminated on condition that it is detected.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 116 to 119, the contents of various processes executed by the payout CPU 301 of the payout control circuit 300 will be described, particularly only processes including steps different from those in the first embodiment.

[System timer interrupt processing (1 ms)]
First, with reference to FIG. 116, system timer interrupt processing by the payout CPU 301 of the third embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 116, in the system timer interrupt process in the third embodiment, steps S431 to S435 are the same as S331 to S335 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) in the first embodiment. Description of is omitted.

  The payout CPU 301 executes a motor drive process, which will be described later, after the process of S435 is completed (S436), and executes an origin adjustment excitation data setting process (S437). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 executes a command transmission process (S438), and ends the system timer interrupt process. The command transmission process (S438) of the third embodiment is the same as the command transmission process (S337) of the first embodiment.

[Counting switch detection processing]
First, the count switch detection process performed in S435 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 116) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 117, in the count switch detection process in the third embodiment, the steps S481 to S490 are the same as the steps S381 to S390 in the count switch detection process (see FIG. 88) in the first embodiment. Description of is omitted.

  When S481 is NO, S487 is NO, S489 is NO, or after the end of S490, the payout CPU 301 determines whether the first ball removal switch 482A or the second ball removal switch 482B is a game ball. It is discriminated whether or not the passage of is detected (S491).

  When the payout CPU 301 determines in S491 that the first ball removal switch 482A or the second ball removal switch 482B has not detected the passage of the game ball (when S491 is NO), the payout CPU 301 The count switch detection process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S491 that the first ball removal switch 482A or the second ball removal switch 482B has detected the passing of the game ball (when S491 is YES), the payout CPU 301 It is determined whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S492).

  In S492, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (when S492 is NO), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 in S492 (when S492 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S493).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets an origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S494). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 controls the flapper driving device 410 to automatically switch the first and second flappers 400A and 400B to the first ball passages 401A and 401B (the payout side) (S495), and the counting switch The detection process ends.

[Motor drive processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 118, the motor drive process performed in S436 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 116) of the third embodiment will be described.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (S501).

  When the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 in S501 (when S501 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and drives the motor. The process ends.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or second stop factor flag is 1 in S501 (if S501 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Then, it is determined whether or not the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S502).

  In S502, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when S502 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no collateral ball, and the motor The driving process ends.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S502 that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when S502 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball and pays out. It is determined whether the requested number is larger than 0 (S503).

  In S503, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of payout requests is not greater than 0 (when S503 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no payout request and ends the motor driving process.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S503 that the number of payout requests is greater than 0 (when S503 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a payout request and executes motor activation initial processing ( S504). Since the motor startup initial process is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 performs an activation state setting process for the payout motor 174 (S505). In this process, the payout CPU 301 does not perform the origin adjustment control, and thus sets the acceleration state of the payout motor 174 according to the number of drops requested so that normal game balls are paid out.

  Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 sets excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S506). In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data for a predetermined step as a driving amount necessary for paying out the required number of game balls, assuming that a normal game ball is paid out.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets “1” in the payout control flag (S507), and ends the motor driving process. Here, the payout control flag is a flag that is set to “0” or “1” depending on whether or not the flapper 400 is switched, and is set to “1” when the flapper 400 is switched. This flag is set to “0” when the flapper 400 is not switched.

[Home adjustment excitation data setting process]
First, with reference to FIG. 119, the origin adjustment excitation data setting process performed in S437 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 116) of the third embodiment will be described.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S511). If the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 in S511 (if S511 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no request for origin adjustment control, and ends the origin adjustment excitation data setting process. To do. Therefore, when S511 is NO, the origin adjustment control is not performed.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment flag is 1 in S511 (if S511 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a request for origin adjustment control, and the number of retries is 12. It is determined whether or not it is larger, that is, whether or not the origin adjustment control has been performed 12 times (S512). Therefore, when S511 is YES, origin adjustment control is performed.

  If the payout CPU 301 determines in S512 that the number of retries is greater than 12 (if S512 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of origin adjustment controls has reached the upper limit number (12 times). Then, the process proceeds to S513.

  In S513, the payout CPU 301 sets the activation state of the payout motor 174 (S513), and moves the process to S523. In this process, the payout CPU 301 sets the payout motor 174 to an idle state in order to stop paying out the game balls.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S512 that the number of retries is not greater than 12 (when S512 is NO), the payout CPU 301 resets the start-up state of the payout motor 174 (S514).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 resets the excitation data (S515), and determines whether or not the payout control flag is 1 (S516). When the payout CPU 301 determines in S516 that the payout control flag is not 1 (when S516 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that switching between the first and second flappers 400A and 400B is not necessary. Then, the process proceeds to S518. In this case, the first and second flappers 400A and 400B are not switched, and the payout destination of the game ball is maintained on the first ball path 401A and 401B side (the payout side).

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S516 that the payout control flag is 1 (when S516 is YES), the payout CPU 301 needs to switch between the first and second flappers 400A and 400B. And the flapper driving device 410 is controlled to automatically switch the first and second flappers 400A and 400B to the second ball passages 402A and 402B (ball removal side) (S517).

  Next, when S516 is NO, or after the end of S517, the payout CPU 301 sets the step counter mask value to 4 steps in preparation for the origin adjustment control (S518). In this process, four steps are set as the unit drive amount of the payout motor 174 when the origin adjustment control is executed.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets the number of motor operations to 1 (S519) and sets the origin request retry count to 4 times (S520). In this process, the payout driving amount necessary for paying out one game ball is obtained by multiplying the 4 steps set as the step counter mask value in S518 described above by 4 times set as the number of origin request retry times. Sixteen steps are set.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 clears the value of the falling ball monitoring timer to 0 (S521). The falling ball monitoring timer is the same as that of the first embodiment. Next, the payout CPU 301 sets “0” in the origin adjustment completion flag (S522).

  Next, after the end of S513 or after the end of S522, the payout CPU 301 sets the excitation data of the payout motor 174 (S523) and ends the origin adjustment excitation data setting process. In this process, for example, when origin adjustment control is performed, excitation data for 16 steps is set as a payout drive amount necessary for paying out one game ball.

  Further, when paying out normal game balls, excitation data for a predetermined step is set as a drive amount necessary for paying out the required number of game balls. It should be noted that the excitation data is set to 0 when the payout motor 174 is set in the idle state so that the payout of the game ball is stopped.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following operational effects in addition to the operational effects of the first embodiment.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the payout destination of the game ball is set to either the first ball path 401 or the second ball path 402 in each of the first and second payout paths 180A and 180B. Since the flapper 400 for switching to one side is provided, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed when the game ball is paid out to the outside of the gaming machine, for example, at the time of renting a game ball or at the time of a prize ball. Sometimes, the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 can be switched to the first ball path 401 by the flapper 400.

On the other hand, when the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed without paying out the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine, the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 is switched to the second ball path 402 by the flapper 400. Can do. Thereby, excessive payout of game balls by origin adjustment control (retry control) is prevented.

  Therefore, by switching to either the first ball passage 401 or the second ball passage 402 by the flapper 400, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed regardless of whether or not the game ball is paid out to the outside of the gaming machine. be able to.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment executes the origin adjustment control (retry control) in a state where there is no payout amount (the number of prize balls and the number of loaned balls) stored in the RAM 303 of the payout control circuit 300. Since the flapper 400 is switched so that the payout destination of the game ball by the sprocket 173 becomes the second ball passage 402, the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed without paying out the game ball to the outside of the game machine. Even so, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being overpaid by the sprocket 173.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment ends the origin adjustment control (retry control) on the condition that the ball removal switch 482 has detected a game ball, so the payout amount (the number of winning balls and Even if the origin adjustment control (retry control) is executed in a state where there is no rental ball number), the counting switch 481 does not detect a game ball.

  For this reason, the game balls paid out from the sprocket 173 are paid out to the outside of the gaming machine by the origin adjustment control (retry control) executed without the payout amount (the number of winning balls and the number of lent balls) stored in the RAM 303. It can be prevented from being detected as a game ball. Thereby, the range of operation of origin adjustment control (retry control) can be expanded.

(Embodiment 4)
Next, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the fourth embodiment, the first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in particular, after the completion of the origin adjustment control, the remaining number of drops requested by subtracting one ball from the number of drops requested (for example, the remaining number of drops requested if 15 before subtraction. Is different in the point of paying out 14 game balls), but the other configurations are substantially the same.

  Therefore, in the following, description of the same configuration as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only differences from the first embodiment will be described. Specifically, only processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described. Note that processing other than the processing described below (for example, system timer interrupt processing) is the same as the processing in the first embodiment.

[Counting switch detection processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 120, the count switch detection process performed in S335 in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) similar to that of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of a counting switch detection process according to the fourth embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B detects the passage of a game ball (S581). In S581, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B has not detected the passage of the game ball (when S581 is NO), the payout CPU 301 The detection process ends. Here, when the origin adjustment control is being performed, the game ball is not yet detected by the first counting switch 181A or the second counting switch 181B, and therefore S581 is NO.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S581 that the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B has detected the passing of the game ball (when S581 is YES), the payout CPU 301 "1" is subtracted from the number (S582).

  That is, the payout CPU 301 updates the number of drop requests on condition that a game ball is detected by the first count switch 181A or the second count switch 181B. The payout CPU 301 that performs such an update constitutes a separate payout amount update means.

  Here, in the fourth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the number of payout requests is not subtracted in the counting switch detection process. The number of payout requests is equal to the number of game balls corresponding to the determined drop request number when the drop request number is determined (set) in S627 in a motor start initial process (see FIG. 122) described later. Has been subtracted.

  In other words, when the drop request number is determined (set), the payout CPU 301 subtracts the number of game balls corresponding to the determined drop request number from the payout request number. Yes. The payout CPU 301 that performs such subtraction of game balls constitutes subtraction means.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment flag is 1 (S583). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S583 that the origin adjustment flag is not 1 (if S583 is NO), the payout CPU 301 ends the counting switch detection process.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S583 that the origin adjustment flag is 1 (when S583 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the origin adjustment flag to 0 (S584).

  Next, the payout CPU 301 sets an origin adjustment completion flag to 1 (S585). Thereafter, the payout CPU 301 sets the post-origin adjustment post-execution flag to 1 (S586), and ends the counting switch detection process.

  Here, the post-origin adjustment execution flag is a flag that is set to “0” or “1” depending on whether the post-origin adjustment control is executed or not (not executed). This flag is set to “1” when the operation is performed, and is set to “0” when the origin adjustment control is not performed.

[Motor start wait processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the motor activation waiting process performed in S336 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 85) similar to that of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of motor activation waiting processing according to the fourth embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (S601). In S601, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment completion flag is not 1 (when S601 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control is being performed, and moves the process to S605.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S601 that the origin adjustment completion flag is 1 (if S601 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the origin adjustment control has been completed, and the first Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second stop factor flag is 1 (S602).

  In S602, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (when S602 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a stop factor and starts the motor. The waiting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S602 that neither the first or second stop factor flag is 1 (when S602 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no stop factor. Then, it is determined whether or not the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (S603).

  In S603, when the payout CPU 301 determines that neither the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when S603 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no collateral ball, and the motor Ends the startup wait process.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S603 that the first or second falling ball confirmation flag is 1 (when S603 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is a collateral ball and will be described later. The motor starting initial process (see FIG. 122) is executed (S604). In the fourth embodiment, unlike in the first embodiment, it is not determined whether or not the number of payout requests is greater than zero.

  Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, a payout request flag to be described later is set, and whether or not there is a payout request from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300 is determined based on the payout request flag. This payout request flag is transmitted at the same time when information on the number of payout requests is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the payout control circuit 300, for example. The payout request flag is set to “1” when there is a payout request, and is set to “0” when there is no payout request.

  Here, the processing of S605 to S613 is the same as the processing of S406 to S414 in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

[Motor startup initial processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the motor start initial process performed in S604 in the motor start wait process (see FIG. 121) of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of motor start initial processing according to the fourth embodiment.

  First, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the post-origin adjustment execution flag is 1 (S621). If the payout CPU 301 determines in S621 that the post-origin adjustment post-execution flag is not 1 (NO in S621), the payout CPU 301 determines that it is before execution (or has not been executed) of home-origin adjustment control. The process proceeds to S623.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S621 that the post-origin adjustment post-execution flag is 1 (when S621 is YES), the payout CPU 301 determines that the post-origin adjustment control has been executed and falls. It is determined whether the requested number is 0 or less (S622).

  If the payout CPU 301 determines in S622 that the requested drop number is not less than or equal to 0 (if S622 is NO), the payout CPU 301 uses the drop requested number as it is, that is, in the count switch detection process (see FIG. 120). The process proceeds to S628 with the number of drops requested after “1” subtracted in S582.

  On the other hand, if the payout CPU 301 determines in S622 that the requested drop number is 0 or less (when S622 is YES), the payout CPU 301 should reset the drop requested number (or perform initial setting). Then, the value of the drop request number is reduced to the payout request number (S623).

For example, when the value of the requested drop number becomes “−1” due to excessive payout of the game ball, the payout CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the payout request number that has already been subtracted by the drop requested number.

  That is, the payout CPU 301 reflects the number of drop requests (“−1” if overpaid) after subtracting “1” in S582 of the counting switch detection process (see FIG. 120) in the payout request number. The payout CPU 301 that performs such reflection constitutes reflection means. When the process of S623 is performed for the first time (first time), both the number of payout requests and the number of drop requests are “0”.

  Here, the payout CPU 301 determines that the number of drop requests after “1” is subtracted in S582 of the above-described counting switch detection process (see FIG. 120) when all the game balls for the payout request number have been paid out. When it is not “0”, it is determined that a payout error has occurred. The payout CPU 301 that makes such a determination constitutes a payout error determination means.

  For example, when the required number of drops after subtraction is greater than “0” when the number of game balls that have been paid out is paid out, it can be determined that a payout error due to underpayment has occurred.

  On the other hand, if the number of drop requests after the subtraction described above is less than “0” when the number of game balls to be paid out has been paid out, it can be determined that a payout error has occurred due to overpayment.

  Next, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the payout request number is smaller than “−10” (S624). That is, the payout CPU 301 determines whether or not the number of overpays has become 10 or more.

  In S624, when the payout CPU 301 determines that the value of the number of payout requests is smaller than “−10” (when S624 is YES), the payout CPU 301 does not have the number of game balls related to overpayment within an allowable range. Therefore, the overpay flag is set to 1 (S625), and the motor activation initial process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S624 that the value of the number of payout requests is not smaller than “−10” (when S624 is NO), the payout CPU 301 allows the number of game balls related to overpayment to be permitted. It is determined that it is within the range, and it is determined whether or not the payout request flag is 1 (S626).

  When the payout CPU 301 determines in S626 that the payout request flag is not 1 (when S626 is NO), the payout CPU 301 determines that there is no game ball payout request from the main control circuit 70. End the motor startup initial process.

  On the other hand, when the payout CPU 301 determines in S626 that the payout request flag is 1 (when S626 is YES), the payout CPU 301 sets the drop request number from the payout request number (S627).

  In this process, a maximum of 15 drop request numbers are set according to the number of payout requests (total amount of payout). At this time, simultaneously with the setting of the drop request number, the payout request number is subtracted by the set drop request number.

  Here, the processing of S628 to S634 is the same as the processing of S422 to S428 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following operational effects in addition to the operational effects of the first embodiment.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the required number of drops is updated on condition that a game ball is detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B. That is, the required number of drops is updated every time a game ball is detected by the first or second counting switch 181A, 181B.

  As a result, for example, when the payout motor 174 is driven to pay out the game balls corresponding to the required number of drops, when there is a payout exceeding the required number of drops (overpaid), The number of drop requests can be updated in consideration of the number.

  On the other hand, the number of payout requests reflects the updated number of drop requests described above after the number of game balls corresponding to the number of drop requests is subtracted when the number of drop requests is determined. Thus, even if there is an overpayment as described above by driving the payout motor 174 once, the number of game balls subtracted from the number of payout requests and the number of game balls actually paid out are calculated. Can be matched.

  As a result, it is not necessary to stop the payout motor 174 every time overpayment occurs by driving the payout motor 174 once, so that it is possible to continue paying out the game balls. Therefore, smooth payout can be performed.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention is an enclosed gaming machine, wherein a launching means for launching a game ball is installed on the top of the game machine, and the launched game ball passes through a game area provided on the game board. (The game board itself may be a game area), and it is also applied to an enclosed game machine collected in a ball polishing device or a lifting device provided in the game machine.

  In the case where the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to such a gaming machine, means (for example, a screw or the like) for lifting a game ball provided in the lifting device by a sprocket, or a payout motor Even if the driving means for driving the means for lifting (for example, a lifting motor), the counting switch is a means for detecting discharge from the lifting device (for example, a sensor for managing circulation of game balls, etc.) Good.

  According to the embodiment of the present invention, the game ball passes through the payout passage 180, is paid out to the upper plate 21 provided on the front surface of the gaming machine, and moves from the upper plate 21 to the launching device 15. The gaming machine according to the present invention is also applicable to a device that lifts the launching device 15 as described above.

  In the above embodiment of the present invention, the ball tank lower passage 162, the ball supply passage 171, the ball passage in the vicinity of the sprocket 173, and the payout passage 180 may be integrally formed. The term “integrally” expressed here includes a state in which they are integrally formed by welding, die cutting, screwing, caulking, or the like.

  Further, when the ball tank lower passage 162 and the ball supply passage 171 are integrally formed, the ball supply passage 171 and the ball passage near the sub rocket 173 are integrally formed. Two configurations may be extracted and may be integrally formed by a divided configuration.

Similarly, when the ball passage near the sprocket 173 and the dispensing passage 180 are integrally formed, the ball tank lower passage 162, the ball supply passage 171 and the ball passage near the sprocket 173 are integrally formed. Three configurations may be extracted from the four configurations to be formed, and the body may be formed by a configuration divided into cases.

  Further, the ball supply passage 171 may be provided in a gaming member (for example, a decoration unit or a ball polishing device of an enclosing game machine) constituting the gaming machine. This is nothing but the fact that the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied even when a device provided with a member corresponding to the sprocket 173 is connected to a gaming member acting as the ball supply passage 171.

  Further, the ball supply passage 171 may be provided with a structure capable of moving a game ball like the sub rocket 173. Generally, a game ball existing in the ball supply passage 171 in conjunction with and in synchronization with the sprocket 173. If can be moved, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied.

  Further, in the above embodiment of the present invention, the current of the dispensing motor 174 is maintained at a high current for 30 ms (excitation data holding period), and the current of the dispensing motor 174 becomes a low current after the excitation data holding period has elapsed. Switched and then maintained at low current for 470 ms (cooling period). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms) is configured by 30 ms (excitation data holding period) and 470 ms (cooling period). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The falling ball monitoring time (500 ms + 0 to 100 ms) may be composed of the (period), 470 ms (cooling period), and 0 to 100 ms (sprocket adjustment period).

  By having such a configuration, it is possible to finely adjust the position of the sprocket 173 during the sprocket adjustment period, and forward rotation and reverse rotation assuming ball engagement may be repeated. In addition, when a heat detection unit capable of detecting the heat generation of the payout motor 174 is provided and the payout control circuit 300 can determine that the payout motor 174 is abnormal when the heat generation of the payout motor 174 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. May continue to use the sprocket adjustment period as the cooling period.

  Furthermore, even when no heat detection means is provided, when a payout of a predetermined value or more (for example, payout of 10 balls or more when paying a maximum of 16 balls) continues continuously for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times or more). Alternatively, the sprocket adjustment period may be set to a specific value (for example, 50 ms). At this time, the set sprocket adjustment period may be a predetermined value or a constant value. There is no need to set a sprocket adjustment period to perform cooling because a sufficient cooling period is originally provided, but because the environment differs depending on the game arcade where the gaming machine is installed, the payout motor is used during the original cooling period. 174 cooling may be inadequate. Therefore, by assuming such a case and adopting the above-described configuration, it is possible to perform treatment for the cooling period of the dispensing motor 174 when the dispensing is continuous. As a result, the payout can be performed more safely.

  As described above, when the falling ball monitoring time (500 ms + 0 to 100 ms) is configured with 30 ms (excitation data holding period), 470 ms (cooling period), and 0 to 100 ms (sprocket adjustment period), It can be expressed that the cooling period of the payout motor 174 is extended based on the extension of the ball monitoring time, and can also be expressed that the monitoring time of the falling ball is extended based on the extension of the cooling period. Is possible.

  In the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the shape, material, and driving method are particularly selected if the payout CPU 301 controls the flapper 400 to switch to one of the first ball path 401 and the second ball path 402. It is not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 114, it may be plate-shaped, and it moves horizontally by being cured by a game ball falling from the upper part of the ball passage so that the game ball cannot pass through one ball passage. As a result, the mechanism may be such that the game balls can be distributed, or a mechanism similar to the sprocket 173 is provided, and the game balls are guided in an arbitrary direction after receiving the game balls once. There may be.

  In the above embodiment of the present invention, 5 ms × 4 steps are defined as the excitation data corresponding to the unit drive amount. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The excitation data 174 of 5 ms × 16 steps is driven as the excitation data in the number of retries, and the excitation data holding period 30 ms + cooling period 470 ms = 500 ms after stopping the driving of the 5 ms × 16 steps payout motor 174 is set. Is set to 5000 ms (basic retry operation period), and the time required by subtracting the excitation data holding period, the cooling period, and the time required for one retry (5 ms × 16 = 80 ms) from the basic retry operation period. Set as falling ball monitoring time, stop factor occurs within the falling ball monitoring time, or the specified number of times (2 If the retry of 0 times) is finished, it is also possible to transition to the idle state. At this time, the number of retries is 240, and the time required for one retry is set as the basic retry operation period. Thereby, since a sufficient monitoring time is set as the falling ball monitoring time, it becomes possible to use the falling ball monitoring time as the time to store by intermittent prevention when the 15-ball collateral switch 172 is disconnected, It becomes possible to pay out more safely.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment of the present invention, the number of requested drops is obtained by subtracting the number of game balls to be moved by one driving of the payout motor 174 based on the number of game balls detected by the counting switch 181 in the retry control. The (separate payout amount) is set, but “setting the number of drop requests (separate payout amount)” here may include contents such as determination, update, and change.

  The payout in the above embodiment of the present invention is based on the premise that a game ball is paid out as a game medium. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and game media include medals, credits, and electronically managed game media. It is considered to pay out various media such as pseudo media handled in terms of number and amount.

  The “movement” described in the claims of the present application includes a case where the position of the game ball is moved by the game ball control means such as payout, lending, retry control, and lifting. Therefore, the present invention is applicable to any case as long as the position of the game ball is moved by the above-described game ball control means.

  In addition, “the game ball moves” means that the game ball is free when the game ball is directly pushed by the game ball control means, when it is pulled, or when the game ball is unlocked. The game ball moves indirectly, which is assumed when one or more game balls move indirectly as a result of starting a fall or when one game ball is moved by the game ball control means. Including the case.

  As mentioned above, although embodiment of this invention has been described, this invention is not limited to the above-mentioned structure. For example, the navigation is performed according to the number of navigations given, but the continuation rate lottery may be performed to give the navigation continuation rate. That is, for example, it is possible to stock a plurality of navigations having a continuation rate of 0%, 50%, 80%, etc., and whether or not navigation is continuously performed by performing a continuous lottery according to the continuation rate when navigation is executed It may be determined. If you win, the next lottery will continue with the same continuation rate. If you don't win, this navigation will disappear, but if the navigation is in stock, use the next navigation to continue the navigation. The lottery may be continued at a rate. Note that the continuation rate of 0% is a state in which navigation does not continue and ends only once. In addition, when all the navigations are given, the navigation guarantees the execution of the navigation for three times, and thereafter, the continuation rate lottery may be performed. In the case of all navigations, navigation having a continuation rate of 100%, limited to the number of continuations up to three, may be given.

  In addition, for example, as an effect during “big hit game”, it was shown that the number of navigations was determined in advance and the result was shown in the effect, but the player succeeded in mini-games etc. in order to give the player technical intervention In this case, navigation may be given. For example, when a hit game having a plurality of difficulty levels is executed during a big hit game, 0% continuous navigation is given when a low difficulty game is successful, and a high difficulty game is successful. You may make it give all the navigation. The mini game may be other than the push game, for example, a quiz.

  In the “second high probability state”, if the winning content is “normal without a ball” (special figure (1) -8 to special figure (1) -12), the set game is not performed after the “big hit game state”. The “normal gaming state” shifts to the “first high probability state”. Therefore, an effect is provided so that the transition to the “first high probability state” can be recognized. However, due to this effect, the player may recognize that the gaming state shifts, and may misunderstand that the degree of expectation of “hit” has increased. Therefore, it is only necessary to perform an effect that suggests the transition to the “normal game state (sub)” before the effect that the transition to the “first high probability state” can be recognized. As a result, in spite of the fact that the game shifts from the “hit game state” to the “first high probability state”, the player recognizes that the game has changed from the “hit game state” to the “normal game state (sub)”. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the above misunderstanding.

In addition, in the “short-time game” after 50 times, it was decided to suppress navigation such as not performing navigation from the viewpoint of preventing “combat attack”, but a player who has executed “short-time game” 50 times or more However, it can be said that they are not necessarily “capturing”. Therefore, for example, a right-handed sensor for detecting a game ball is installed in the right area of the game area 12a so that it can be detected that a right-hand hit has been made, for example, a detection signal from the second start opening winning ball switch 45a and Based on the detection signal of the right-handed sensor or the like, it is only necessary to determine the normal timing due to the normal constant firing and the abnormal timing caused by operating the firing handle 25.
For example, as shown in FIG. 123, a right strike sensor 58 and a rail 59 for guiding the game ball to the right strike sensor 58 may be provided on the game board 12. FIG. 123 is a front view showing a configuration of a gaming board of a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. 123, members similar to those of the game board 12 shown in FIG. The game board 12 shown in FIG. 123 is substantially the same as the game board 12 shown in FIG. 3 except that the game board 12 includes a right-handed sensor 58 and a rail 59.
In FIG. 123, the right-handed sensor 58 is installed on the upper right side of the game board 12. Further, the rail 59 is also installed on the upper right side of the game board 12, and when the player is making a right strike, the rail 59 is arranged at a position where the game ball is guided to the rail 59. In addition, the game ball guided to the rail 59 is arranged so as to pass through the right-handed sensor 58 without fail. As a result, when the player is making a right strike, the game ball always passes the right strike sensor 58, and it is determined whether or not the player is firing the game ball toward the right side of the game board 12. Judgment can be made.
As described above, the normal timing and the abnormal timing can be discriminated based on the detection signal of the second start opening winning ball switch 45a and the detection signal of the right-handed sensor 58. As a result, it is presumed that the “strategy” is being performed in the case of abnormal timing despite the fact that the 16-round “big hit game” is being navigated. If the detection signal output timing is detected (abnormality detection) due to "combat strategy", it can be inferred that "capture" is being performed regardless of the number of "short-time games". The flag may be set.

  Further, when the time from the output of the detection signal from the second start opening winning ball switch 45a to the output of the detection signal from the right-handed sensor 58 is too long, etc., it may be inferred that it is “strategy shot”. . Since the output timing of the detection signal based on the normal method and the output timing of the detection signal based on the “capture” are different, it can be estimated that the “capture” is being performed.

  In addition, if the first abnormality is detected, “warning” is performed, the second warning is given, the navigation is stopped for the third time, etc. It may be taken.

  Moreover, although the normal symbol is assumed to be known, the normal symbol and the special symbol may be related to each other. For example, when it is assumed that there are a plurality of normal symbols and “per V” is reached, the normal symbol and the first grand prize that triggered the opening of the second start opening 45 that triggered “per V”. The next navigation lottery may be performed based on the special symbol when the device 54 is opened.

  For example, if there are two types of normal symbols, the normal symbol (1) and the normal symbol (2), and the combination of the normal symbol (1) small hit (2) -1 is high in the next navigation lottery. If it is a combination of normal symbols (2) small hits (2) -4, the lottery may be drawn with a low probability in the next navigation lottery. As a result, the player can play the game with interest at the opportunity until “per V”.

  In addition, in the case of “per V”, the navigation lottery probability may be changed according to the number of winning prizes at the time of winning the second start opening 45 that is the opportunity. Furthermore, you may alert | report about this winning number. For example, the display may indicate that “the next navigation is confirmed if three balls or more enter the second start opening 45 and hit V”. As a result, the player can play the game with interest at the opportunity until “per V”.

  In the above-described embodiment, the navigation is performed according to the number of assigned navigations. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the number of navigations is 1 or more, the navigation is used. It may be determined by lottery or not when winning or winning a time college. Thus, since such a release effect is performed during the big hit, the player can hope for the game with more interest during the big hit.

  The present invention can be applied to enclosed game machines. The enclosed game machine has a fixed number of game balls in the game machine, and manages the number of game balls from the viewpoint of fraud prevention. Therefore, the detected game balls are also detected, and the number of shot balls is managed. Therefore, when the present invention is applied to an enclosed game machine, for example, a ceiling lottery may be performed based on the number of game balls fired. For example, every time 1500 game balls are fired, it is determined whether or not “big hit” is won, and if not won, a ceiling lottery may be performed. In addition, if a “big hit” is not won even if 15000 are launched, 100% may be won for the ceiling lottery. In this way, by using the number of game machines fired as a reference, the ceiling state is uniformly given without being affected by the ease of winning at the start opening.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the lottery is performed and the winner is selected, the game immediately shifts to the “third high probability state”. For example, even if the winner is selected, the special symbol game is not transferred immediately. May be performed after 20 times are performed. And during these 20 times, you may perform the effect (so-called sign effect) which alert | reports that it wins a ceiling lottery after this. Thereby, the player can know the game state and the like to be transferred from now on, and can play the game with expectation. Also, in general, such a sign production could only be performed for the number of game balls held, but a sign production could be performed over a larger number of game periods, and the player was expected for a relatively long time. It is possible to have it.

  Although the all day navigation lottery has a high probability due to the RAM clear, as described above, the all day navigation lottery may have a high probability by turning on the power of the gaming machine.

  The contents of the navigation effect, the opportunity for giving the number of times of navigation, and the like are not limited to the above-described embodiment. In the above embodiment, in the “first high probability state”, when the special figure type is special figure (1) -1 to special figure (1) -7, all navigations, that is, three navigation times are given. Is not limited to three, and for example, only two may be provided. However, it is preferable that the “first high probability state” is more easily given navigation than game states other than the “first high probability state”.

  In the above-described embodiment, the advantageous first special game has a larger number of rounds. However, the first special game is a case where the number of sets in the short-time game state is eliminated and the game shifts to the short-time game, which is the first special game. The case of a normal big hit that does not shift may be the second special game. If the navigation is given, the first special game and the second special game are not limited as long as there is an advantage or disadvantage for the player, such as launch navigation at the time of winning the small hit as the first special game.

[Application example]
In each of the above embodiments and the various modifications, a pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The above-described various technologies of the present invention can be applied to other gaming machines, for example, various gaming machines such as slot gaming machines, swing game machines, ball game machines, gaming machines, and enclosed game machines. You can also Further, for example, it can also be applied to a sealed pachinko machine, an arrangement ball, a ball, etc., which are a kind of a ball game machine.

  The background art and problems (No. 1 to No. 8) of the configuration described in the above-described embodiment will be described.

[Background Technology and Issues (Part 1)]
Among the players who enjoy a game with a pachinko gaming machine or a pachislot machine, there are players who have selected a gaming machine in the hope of being in an advantageous state for the player. However, in general, it is difficult to find a gaming machine that is in an advantageous state for a player without playing a game. In general, the hall side wants to reduce the number of gaming machines that are in an advantageous state for the player if possible. On the other hand, in the time zone when there are fewer players, There is also a hall that wants to make a state advantageous to the player, and a gaming machine that can set the gaming machine to a state advantageous to the player is desired.

  For example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-22248, a gaming state when a gaming machine is turned off can be saved as a backup, and when the power is turned on again, the gaming can be started in that gaming state. A gaming machine is disclosed. In such a gaming machine, when the hall is closed in a gaming state advantageous to the player, the gaming machine is turned off in the gaming state advantageous to the player. When the gaming machine is turned on immediately before the opening of the next day, the gaming machine is in a gaming state advantageous to the player who is in the closing state of the previous day. When such a gaming machine is installed, a player who has closed time in an advantageous gaming state enjoys a game in an advantageous gaming state by playing with the gaming machine from the opening of the next day. be able to. Thus, the player may be able to find a gaming machine that is in an advantageous state.

  However, in this gaming machine, if the power is not turned off in a gaming state advantageous to the player, the gaming state advantageous to the player will not be entered when the power is turned on next time. The gaming machine is not always in an advantageous gaming state for the player after the gaming machine is turned off, that is, after the store is closed. Therefore, with this gaming machine, it has been difficult to realize a gaming state advantageous to the player at a desired timing on the hall side.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a state advantageous to a player at a desired timing.

[Background Technology and Issues (Part 2)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area with a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Also, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined number of times. In the big hit game, the number of game balls corresponding to the game ball won in the big prize opening is paid out. Here, some prize winning openings have a blade member, and such a prize winning opening repeatedly operates from the closed state to the open state by operating the blade member to execute the big hit game.

  For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during a small hit game, the posture of the blade member changes to an open posture that opens the open / close region, and a game ball can enter the open / close region There is a pachinko machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the open / close area, and a game ball is won at the V winning opening during the small hit game, and is controlled to the big hit gaming state. In this pachinko machine, if a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the small hit symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the current big hit gaming state The game state after the big hit game is ended is determined according to the type of the game. Note that, as the gaming state changes, for example, the probability of transition to the big hit gaming state changes. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

  By the way, in the gaming machine described in JP2013-233375A, it is configured so that it is easy to win a small hit game during a short-time game, and the opening and closing area is easy to open, so that a game ball is won at the V winning opening. There is a possibility to shift to a big hit gaming state. Further, even if the game is not in a short-time game, the game state may change to the big hit game state, and the game state may be changed. As described above, the game state changes, and as a result, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player changes. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in JP2013-233375A, the number of gaming balls that can be acquired by the player changes as a result, not at a constant rate, as the gaming state changes. Therefore, it is suppressed that a game becomes monotonous.

  As described above, according to the gaming machine described in JP2013-233375A, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. However, it is only about the number of game balls that a player can acquire. Even when a player continues to play a game for a long time, it is preferable that the gaming machine has a configuration that can further prevent the game from becoming monotonous in order to concentrate and play the game. In the case of not having such a configuration, there is a problem that if the game is continued for a long time, the player will eventually get bored with the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that allows players to concentrate and play games without getting bored, and that can improve the interest of the game. And

[Background Technology and Issues (Part 3)]
Among pachinko gaming machines, for example, there is a so-called one-type and two-type mixed type as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-273786. In this pachinko gaming machine, a special symbol lottery is executed when a game ball wins a predetermined starting port. Then, after the symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display, the symbol indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. Here, when a predetermined jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display, the first special game is executed with a one-type jackpot. On the other hand, when a predetermined small winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display, the blade member that closes the variable specified winning opening is activated, and during this time, the game ball enters the variable specified winning opening and passes through the V zone. Then, the second special game is executed with a big hit of two types.

  This pachinko machine is provided with a variable start opening that is opened only while the ordinary electric accessory is operating, in addition to the predetermined start opening, and is executed when a game ball wins the variable start opening. In the special symbol lottery to be done, it is a small hit with a relatively high probability. In this pachinko gaming machine, the winning probability of the opening / closing lottery of the variable starting port executed when the game ball passes through the predetermined passing area is relatively increased, and the variable starting port of the variable starting port when winning the opening / closing lottery is increased. When the opening time is extended, the game may be controlled in the short game state. In the short-time gaming state, there is a relatively high possibility that a game ball will enter the variable specific winning opening, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will pass the V zone and win two types. Further, even if the game ball does not pass through the V zone, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out only by entering the variable specific winning opening. Thus, it can be said that the short-time gaming state is an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  As described above, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-273786, not only the type 1 big hit and type 2 big hit but also the short time gaming state is advantageous for the player. It can be said that it is preferable for the player to continue. Thus, some players perform a game ball launch operation at a timing that does not pass through the V zone even if the game ball enters the variable specific winning opening. By such irregular hitting, the number of game balls to be paid out can be increased by preventing the game balls from passing through the V zone until the end of the duration of the short-time game state.

  However, such irregular beating by the player is not preferable for the hole side. For this reason, there are holes that prohibit this irregular hitting, and measures such as caution are taken when a player who hits an irregular hit is found. However, it is necessary to keep watching the game for a while in order to find out that this anomaly is being beaten, and it cannot be easily found.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses a player from making irregular hits.

[Background Technology and Issues (Part 4)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area with a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Since this game ball can be exchanged for money, the player is playing a game with the expectation that more game balls will be paid out.

  Further, some pachinko gaming machines are awarded points by satisfying a predetermined condition in the game. And by accumulating this point, some privilege is provided. For example, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-42574, points are added when a game designated as a point-up condition is performed, and the game level is increased when this point becomes equal to or greater than the “reference point” number. And a lottery necessary for collecting item information used for games such as music data and character image data is performed according to the quantity of game levels.

  Thereby, the player can enjoy the point by increasing the game ball in addition to increasing the game ball.

  As described above, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-42574, the ability to collect music data, character image data, and the like is certainly one of the pleasures of gaming. However, this point is not related to the payout of the game ball, and it can be said that the player is slightly less interested in the point.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and it is possible for a player to perform diversified games while enjoying an increase in points accumulated in the game, and to improve the interest of the game. An object is to provide a game machine that can be used.

[Background Technology and Issues (Part 5)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area with a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Also, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined number of times. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls won in the big prize opening. Here, some prize winning openings have a blade member, and such a prize winning opening repeatedly operates from the closed state to the open state by operating the blade member to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hit game in which a special winning opening is opened from a closed state for a predetermined time.

  Incidentally, in recent years, game machines have been provided with a movable accessory in order to improve performance. As such a gaming machine, Patent Document 1 includes a first movable body that is a rotating body and a second movable body that is a swing arm, and power is supplied to the second movable body to the first movable body. A game provided with a movable accessory in which a plurality of gears to be transmitted are attached and the second movable body is driven by a single driving device so that the second movable body swings and the first movable body is rotated by the plurality of gears. A machine is disclosed.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in JP2013-146413A, the first movable body and the second movable body are interlocked by a single driving device by attaching a plurality of gears to each movable body. Is provided at one end of the second movable body and rotates, and the second movable body rotates with the other end as a fulcrum. Therefore, the moving direction of the first movable body depends on the rotation direction of the second movable body. Therefore, the possibility that the second movable body and the first movable body are recognized as separate bodies is reduced, and the individual effects of the plurality of movable members of the first movable body and the second movable body are reduced. There was a risk.

  An object of the present invention is to solve such problems and to enhance individual effects of each movable member even when a plurality of movable members are interlocked with each other, and to improve the interest for the player's performance. And

[Background Technology and Issues (Part 6)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area on a game board surface by a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined ball A number of game balls are paid out. Also, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined number of times. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls won in the big prize opening. Here, some prize winning openings have a blade member, and such a prize winning opening repeatedly operates from the closed state to the open state by operating the blade member to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hit game in which a special winning opening is opened from a closed state for a predetermined time.

  By the way, in recent years, as a configuration of a winning device, there is a gaming machine having a configuration in which a gaming ball that has entered a large winning opening rolls to the back side of the gaming board surface and a winning sensor detects the gaming ball. As such a gaming machine, Patent Literature 1 has a function of giving a probable state after the big hit game is finished by passing a game ball through a specific area provided in the big winning opening, and specifying the opening mode of the big winning opening and specifying There is disclosed a gaming machine in which the degree of overlap with the operation mode of the area shutter is changed to vary the difficulty level of the game ball passing through a specific area.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-255784, the rolling speed of the gaming ball cannot be adjusted when the gaming ball can pass through the specific area where the winning sensor is provided. In some cases, the speed of movement was so fast that the winning sensor could not detect the passing of the game ball.

  An object of the present invention is to solve such problems and to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately detecting the passage of a game ball by a passage detection means.

[Background Technology and Issues (Part 7)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area with a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Also, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined number of times. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls won in the big prize opening. Here, some prize winning openings have a blade member, and such a prize winning opening repeatedly operates from the closed state to the open state by operating the blade member to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hit game in which a special winning opening is opened from a closed state for a predetermined time.

  Incidentally, in recent years, game machines have been provided with a movable accessory in order to improve performance. As such a gaming machine, Patent Document 1 discloses that after the first and second upper peach movable members are rotated so as to open outward, the first and second upper peach movable members are closed inward. In the peach-shaped movable accessory device that rotates to the right, the first and second magnet portions are provided on the inner sides of the joints of the first and second upper peach movable members, and the first and second magnets are provided. The first and second upper peach movable members are substantially opposed to each other when the first and second upper peach movable members are closed, and in this state, the first and second magnet parts are arranged so as to be in a mutually attracting direction. A gaming machine is disclosed.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-87611, since the magnet is used to reinforce the coupling between the end faces between the actors, the coupling between the two actors can be reinforced, From the standpoint of stabilizing the state of a single accessory after operation, the end of the accessory cannot be reinforced at all for a configuration in which the accessory operates alone. It was difficult to apply.

  An object of the present invention is to solve such problems and to provide a gaming machine capable of easily stabilizing the state after the operation of the accessory by a configuration capable of fixing the operating accessory. .

[Background Technology and Issues (Part 8)]
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, to a game area on a game board surface by a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined ball A number of game balls are paid out. Also, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which a large winning opening, which is normally closed, is repeatedly opened for a predetermined number of times. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls won in the big prize opening. Here, some prize winning openings have a blade member, and such a prize winning opening repeatedly operates from the closed state to the open state by operating the blade member to execute the big hit game. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hit game in which a special winning opening is opened from a closed state for a predetermined time.

  By the way, in recent years, there is a gaming machine equipped with a winning device that guides a game ball that falls from an upstream in a gaming area to the inside of a winning opening by driving the movable piece in the front-rear direction as viewed from the player. As such a gaming machine, Patent Document 1 has a winning opening for receiving a flowing game ball and is connected to driving means so as to advance and retract in the front-rear direction between the front and rear of the winning opening. A gaming machine is disclosed that includes a winning device having a ball receiving member that receives a game ball into a winning opening when advanced forward by driving.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-177281, the ball receiving member that advances and retreats in the front-rear direction between the front and rear of the winning opening only accepts the game ball into the winning opening. Even if game balls are picked up excessively, they are all guided to the inside of the winning opening. If such a phenomenon occurs repeatedly, it will give a player an unexpectedly large profit, while the game hall will suffer an unexpectedly large loss, and the balance of profits between the player and the game hall It deviates greatly from the estimate at the time of manufacture of the machine.

  An object of the present invention is to solve such problems and to provide a gaming machine including a winning device capable of accurately managing the balance of profits between a player and a game hall.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 721 Base member 722 Motor 724 1st connection member 726 2nd connection member 727 Electric decoration body 820 Upper left 3rd movable accessory 830 Arm member 831 1st arm member 832 2nd arm member 835 4th connection member 840 1st 3 connecting members

Claims (2)

A gaming machine including a movable accessory driven by a driving means,
The movable accessory is
A first member to which the driving means is attached;
A second member pivotally supported by the first member so as to be rotatable around a predetermined position, and rotated by driving of the driving means;
The second member is pivotally supported by the second member, meshes with the first member, and the shaft center moves by the rotation of the second member, whereby the contact position meshing with the first member moves and rotates. A first connecting member that moves;
A second connecting member pivotally supported by the second member, meshed with the first connecting member, and rotated as the first connecting member rotates;
A third connecting member attached to the first connecting member and rotating as the first connecting member rotates;
A decorative member attached to the second connecting member and rotating with the rotation of the second connecting member;
The second member is
A first arm member having a proximal end engaged with the driving means and pivotally supporting the first connecting member;
A second arm member that movably engages the first arm member, pivotally supports the second connecting member, and has a fourth connecting member that can mesh with the third connecting member;
The second arm member is configured such that the third connecting member meshes with the fourth connecting member after the decorative member is rotated by the rotation of the second connecting member from the standby position, and the third connecting member is rotated. Movement to move in a direction extending from the distal end side of the first arm member,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the decorative member can contact another member by moving the second arm member in a direction extending from a distal end side of the first arm member.   The first arm member has a groove that extends in a direction in which the second arm member moves and movably engages with an end of a rotation shaft of the second connecting member that moves together with the second arm member. The gaming machine according to 1.